1. law, govt and politics
2. armed forces
3. army

PROJECT MANUAL
NORTH POST EXCHANGE
CUSTOMER SERVICE RELOCATION
FT. BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA
PN: 0530-13-000020
CONTRACTS: COMBINED WORK – ALL TRADES
BY:
ARCHITECTS
Illinois Design Firm License Number 184-002661
Post Office Box 820
600 West Main Street ▪ Suite 2
Carbondale, Illinois 62901
618 ▪ 457 ▪ 5709 Fax 618 ▪ 457 ▪ 5638
DATE: 30 JULY 2014
SOLICITATION SPECIFICATIONS
NORTH POST EXCHANGE
CUSTOMER SERVICE RELOCATION
FT. BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA
PN: 0530-13-000020
ARCHITECT
h. michael bohnsack ARCHITECTS
600 West Main Street  Suite 2
Carbondale, Illinois 62901
618  457  5709 Fax 457  5638
E-mail  hbohnsack@hmbarchitects.com
PROFESSIONAL CONSULTANTS
MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL/FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEERING
McCoy & Howard Consulting Engineers, Inc.
18088 North Old Salem Lane
Post Office Box 581
Mt. Vernon, Illinois 62864
618  242  0473 Fax 242  2330
E-mail  ccalvert@mhengineers.com
hmb PROJECT NO. 1406.0
30 JULY 2014
© 2014 h. michael bohnsack ARCHITECTS
PROJECT MANUAL
TOC – Table of Contents
NORTH POST EXCHANGE
CUSTOMER SERVICE RELOCATION
FT. BRAGG, NORTH CAROLINA
PN: 0530-13-000020
BIDDING REQUIREMENTS
PAGES
CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS
List of Drawings
00860-1
SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Requirements of Ft. Bragg
Summary of Work
AAFES Furnished & Installed Equipment
AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed Equipment
Unit Prices
Substitutions Procedures
Cutting & Patching
Grades, Lines & Levels
AAFES Safety Policies & Procedures
AAFES Safety Regulations & Codes
Phasing
Schedule of Values
AAFES Progress Meetings
Progress Payments
Project Management & Coordination
Construction Progress Schedules
AAFES Weather Table
Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals
Quality Control
Testing Laboratory Services
AAFES Environmental Protection
Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls
Temporary Utilities
Field Offices & Sheds
Material & Equipment
Storage & Protection
Systems Start-up
Project Closeout
Cleaning
Project Record Documents
01000-5
01010-11
01017-3
01018-2
01026-2
01030-3
01045-2
01051-1
01060-4
01090-8
01140-2
01210-2
01220-2
01230-3
01310-3
01320-3
01331-2
01340-9
01400-3
01410-3
01420-10
01500-9
01510-5
01590-2
01600-2
01620-3
01650-2
01700-28
01710-2
01720-2
DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK
Selective Demolition
TABLE OF CONTENTS
02070-4
TOC-1
DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE WORK
Interior Concrete Slab Repair & Joint Filler Replacement
Polished Concrete Floor Finish
03354-11
03356-10
DIVISION 4 – MASONRY (NOT USED)
DIVISION 5 – METALS (NOT USED)
DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTICS
Rough Carpentry
Finish Carpentry
Architectural Woodwork
06100-5
06200-6
06400-7
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
Firestopping
Building & Paving Joint Sealers
07270-5
07920-4
DIVISION 8 – DOORS & WINDOWS
Metal Doors & Frames
Wood Doors (Installation Only)
Finish Hardware (Installation Only)
Glass & Glazing
08100-5
08211-2
08710-2
08800-5
DIVISION 9 – FINISHES
Gypsum Drywall
Acoustical Panel Ceilings
Resilient Tile Flooring
Painting
09250-7
09510-4
09650-3
09900-5
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
Wall Surface Protection Systems
Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets & Accessories
10265-5
10522-3
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT (NOT USED)
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS (NOT USED)
DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Intrusion Detection
Fire Alarm
Wet Pipe Sprinkler System
13720-8
13851-10
13915-5
DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMS (NOT USED)
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
General Provisions
Ductwork
Air Outlets & Inlets
TABLE OF CONTENTS
15010-5
15890-4
15940-2
TOC-2
DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL
Electrical Demolition for Remodeling
Conduit
Building Wire & Cable
Boxes
Wiring Devices
Manufactured Wiring Systems
Grounding & Bonding
Supporting Devices
Electrical Identification
Dry Type Transformers
Panelboards
Interior Luminaires
Telephone Service, Raceways & Wiring
Occupancy Sensors
Testing
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC-3
16060-2
16111-4
16123-3
16130-3
16141-3
16150-2
16170-3
16190-2
16195-2
16461-3
16470-3
16510-4
16741-1
16904-2
16950-3
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Section 00860 – LIST OF DRAWINGS
SHEET NO.
TITLE
T-1.00
T-1.01
T-1.02
Title Sheet/ Index of Drawings
General Information
Phasing Floor Plan
D-1.00
D-6.10
Demolition Floor Plan, Reflected Ceiling Plan & Equipment Plan
Demolition Interior Elevations & Floor Slab Repair Details
A-1.00
A-6.00
A-9.00
Floor Plan, Reflected Ceiling Plan & Equipment Plan
Large Scale Plan - Customer Service & Interior Elevations
Floor Finish Plan, Room Finish Schedule & Finish Material List
M-1.00
Floor Plans Mechanical
FP-1.00
Floor Plans Fire Suppression
ED-1.00
E-1.00
E-2.00
E-3.00
Electrical & Lighting Plans Demolition
Electrical & Lighting Plans New Work
Electrical & Special Systems Plan New Work
Symbols & Schedules - Electrical
All drawings dated: 30 JULY 2014
END 00860.
LIST OF DRAWINGS
00860-1
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01000 – REQUIREMENTS OF FT. BRAGG
1
GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDES
A.
Work Schedule.
B.
Protection of Government Property and Personnel.
C.
Covering of Debris.
D.
Environmental Protection.
E.
Contractor Installation Identification Credentials.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 01010 – Project Summary.
B.
Section 01420 – AAFES Environmental Protection.
C.
Section 01500 – Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls.
D.
Section 01510 – Temporary Utilities.
E.
Section 01590 – Field Offices & Sheds.
F.
Army & Air Force Exchange Service - General Provisions, a copy of which is included in the
Solicitation Package.
1.3
WORK SCHEDULE
A.
All work at Ft. Bragg shall be accomplished during normal working hours 0700 to 1600
hours exclusive of Saturdays, Sundays, and federal holidays unless other times are
approved by the Contracting Officer, or otherwise stated in the contract.
1.
2.
1.4
Coordinate the work schedule with the Contracting Officer.
Work may be expanded to 0600 and 1800 hours if approved by the Contracting
Officer.
PROTECTION OF GOVERNMENT PROPERTY AND PERSONNEL
A.
Contractor shall furnish, place, and maintain all required barricades as directed by the Ft.
Bragg DPW Safety Office and Contracting Officer or designated representative.
1.
2.
B.
Suitable interior signage, barricades and temporary partitions to alert AAFES
customers, employees and others of work areas within the building and to re-route
pedestrian traffic around construction areas.
Exterior signage and barricades to alert vehicular traffic around staging areas,
equipment storage areas, Contractor parking areas and other exterior site related
areas associated with construction activities.
Access drives and roadways shall remain clear at all times.
REQUIREMENTS OF FT. BRAGG
01000-1
C.
If road/lane closures or traffic interruption becomes necessary during the course of work:
1.
2.
D.
Contractor shall conduct operations to offer the least possible obstruction and
inconvenience to public traffic.
1.
2.
3.
1.5
Contractor shall submit for approval, 15 days prior to commencing work, a barricade
and sign plan clearly showing work area, location, and type of sign to be placed for
rerouting traffic.
Part VI, The Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices will be used for traffic signing
and barricades.
All traffic shall be permitted to pass adjacent to work with as little delay as possible.
Where the nature of construction operations in progress, equipment, and machinery
in use are of character to endanger passing traffic, Contractor shall provide lights and
signs, erect fences or barriers, and station flaggers necessary to give adequate
warning to avoid damage or injury to passing traffic.
Signs, flags, lights, warning and safety devices shall conform to applicable
installation, city, county, and state requirements.
SITE USE
A.
Contractor shall furnish, place and maintain temporary construction fencing to separate
construction areas from entry by unauthorized personnel including, but not limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Stockpile areas.
Construction trailers.
Temporary storage trailers, sheds and lay-down areas.
Equipment parking areas.
Other areas subject to construction work under this Contract.
Contractor shall coordinate all site use areas with Ft. Bragg DPW and Contracting Officer or
designated representative.
1.
Submit detailed site plan for approval, 15 days prior to commencing work, indicating
all areas to be temporarily fenced and indicate specific use proposed for all areas
within fencing.
a.
b.
2.
1.6
Indicate proposed location of all temporary construction trailers, storage trailers
and sheds.
Provide temporary utility needs and proposed source for each.
Obtain written approval of proposed site use plan from Ft. Bragg DPW and
Contracting Officer prior to construction of temporary fencing or utilities.
COVERING OF DEBRIS
A.
Contractor and all subcontractors shall be required to cover all loads of debris before
hauling them off from the Site.
B.
Contractor shall be responsible for clean up of all incidental debris that inadvertently falls
onto pavements or other properties during hauling operations.
1.7
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
A.
Contractor shall abide by the environmental requirements of Ft. Bragg, the State of North
Carolina and Federal Government.
1.
Detailed requirements are set forth in Section 01420, AAFES Environmental
Protection.
REQUIREMENTS OF FT. BRAGG
01000-2
B.
Vehicles and other powered equipment shall meet local air quality regulations for emissions.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Whenever a spill of oil or hazardous material is discovered, Contractor shall take immediate
action to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
This Spill Report shall be submitted to the Ft. Bragg Environmental Division
representative investigating the spill.
Contractor shall make submit monthly report of fuel consumption for each fuel burning unit,
whether permitted or not, for all operational time throughout construction until Substantial
Completion or when that unit is retired from service on this Project, whichever is longer.
1.
2.
1.8
Stop the flow of product
Advise personnel of the incident.
Immediately shut down equipment and minimize sources of ignition.
Contain the spill.
Notify Ft. Bragg Fire and Emergency Services immediately.
Contractor shall also prepare a formal “Spill Report” chronicling the events leading to the
spill and the efforts to contain it.
1.
E.
Vehicles and equipment shall be mechanically sound and have all seals, grease
rings, and other containment systems in place to ensure against leakage.
Drip pans shall be maintained such that overflow and spills do not occur.
There shall be no activities for equipment maintenance including oil changes, filter
replacements, or hydraulic equipment repair performed on Ft. Bragg Property.
Make monthly submittals to Ft. Bragg DPW.
At Substantial Completion submit the total amount of fuel used for each unit to Ft.
Bragg DPW substantiating monthly reports.
RECYCLING
A.
Ft. Bragg promotes recycling of demolished materials and construction waste removed from
construction.
1.
2.
3.
Ft. Bragg encourages the Contractor to recycle as many materials as are feasible
under this Contract.
Recycling of Construction waste will be at Contractor's discretion and is suggested in
an effort to reduce the amount of solid waste deposited in landfills.
Examples of demolished materials that Contractor may consider for recycling include,
but are not limited to:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Steel studs.
Aluminum and/or steel, including trim work.
Cardboard.
Piping.
Fittings.
Cast iron.
HVAC diffusers, grilles and ductwork.
Light fixture housings.
1.)
2.)
Ballasts shall be legally disposed of as potentially hazardous waste
unless units have “NO PCB” designation.
Mercury containing lamps (fluorescent, mercury vapor, metal halide and
high-pressure sodium) shall be legally disposed of as potentially
hazardous waste.
REQUIREMENTS OF FT. BRAGG
01000-3
i.
j.
4.
Wiring.
Other materials as deemed appropriate by Contractor and acceptable to Ft.
Bragg.
The POC for recycling materials at Ft. Bragg is as follows and the Contractor is
encouraged to contact prior to the start of Construction to establish logistics for
salvaging, recycling and delivery of acceptable materials to the Recycling Center on
Post:
Ft. Bragg Garrison
Environmental Division
Ft. Bragg, NC 28307
ATTN: Tim Nance.
Phone: (910) 396-5323.
5.
1.9
Per AR 200-1, all manifest or shipping papers that require the Installation EPA ID
number must be signed by authorized a responsible party of the Garrison
Environmental Division, Ft. Bragg, NC.
DISPOSAL
A.
Contractor shall refer to applicable paragraphs in Section 01420, AAFES Environmental
Protection for details pertaining to waste disposal including:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Unless recycled per Paragraph 1.9 above, or hazardous waste, all other solid waste shall be
collected and disposed of off Ft. Bragg Property.
1.
2.
C.
Hazardous waste generation, handling and disposal.
Non-hazardous waste disposal.
Normal construction debris disposal.
There shall be no accumulation of solid waste unless properly containerized or put
within a fenced area to prevent wind blown pollution.
No materials shall be put into dumpsters owned or managed by Ft. Bragg.
Only empty paint cans shall be allowed in Contractor furnished trash receptacles.
1.
2.
Paint cans are considered empty if paint comprises less than 1 inch or 3% by weight
of the total capacity of the container, whichever is less.
If the residue in the container exceeds these limits, contact the Contracting Officer for
disposal instructions.
D.
Unless recycled per Paragraph 1.9 above, all piping and wiring scheduled for removal shall
be removed from the site and legally disposed of in accord with Section 01420, off Ft. Bragg
property.
E.
Unless recycled per Paragraph 1.9 above, all solid waste not specifically indicated shall be
removed from the site and legally disposed of in approved landfill off Ft. Bragg property.
1.10
CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL IDENTIFICATION CREDENTIALS
A.
Contractor shall comply with the following procedures for obtaining Installation identification
passes for the Contractor’s personnel and subcontractors.
1.
Contractor shall submit a written request on company letterhead stationary to the Ft.
Bragg sponsoring entity (identified at the Pre-construction Meeting) specifying:
a.
b.
Contract number.
Location of work site.
REQUIREMENTS OF FT. BRAGG
01000-4
c.
d.
e.
2.
The Ft. Bragg sponsoring entity will submit information to authority having jurisdiction
and that authority may:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
4.
5.
Date entry to the Installation must begin and contemplated termination date of
entry.
Names, date of birth (DOB) and social security numbers (SSN) of Contractor
and subcontractor employee requiring access to the Installation.
The name of the individual who will submit the Request for Identification
Credentials for each employee for whom identification credentials are needed.
Endorse the request.
Attach a copy of the contract cover page and any other pages that provide
performance information, such as the need for and duration of access to the
work site.
Forward this request to the Security Police, Pass and Identification Office of the
installation where the work is to be performed.
Provide appropriate blank Form to the Contractor.
The Contractor shall be required to complete and submit Form and request for
identification credentials, for each of the firm’s employees and for each subcontractor
employee who must have access to the installation.
The Contractor shall also request appropriate Form for vehicle decals when the
request for identification credentials is submitted.
To obtain the vehicle decal from the Security Police, Pass and Identification Office,
the Contractor shall produce:
a.
b.
c.
A valid driver’s license.
Proof of financial responsibility or insurance
Current vehicle registration.
B.
Contractor employees shall wear visible identification either as a part of, or attached to, their
outer clothing at all times while on a military installation.
C.
The identification shall clearly identify the individual as being a Contractor employee.
D.
During performance of the contract, the Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining
required identification for newly assigned personnel, and for prompt return of credentials
and vehicle registration decals to the Security Police, Pass and Identification Office, for any
employee who no longer requires access to the work site.
E.
At the termination or completion of the contract, or upon expiration of credentials (if any
such expirations are specified), the Contractor shall return all installation identification
credentials and vehicle registration decals for all Contractor and subcontractor employees to
the Security Police, Pass and Identification Office.
2
PRODUCTS (Not Used).
3
EXECUTION (Not Used).
END 01000.
REQUIREMENTS OF FT. BRAGG
01000-5
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01010 – SUMMARY OF WORK
1
GENERAL
1.1
STATEMENT OF WORK
A.
Scope: The work covered by these specifications consists of furnishing all plant,
supervision, labor, equipment and materials required to relocate the AAFES Exchange
Customer Service functions, including selective demolition of existing, salvage of
designated fixtures and equipment and construction of new functions, in accordance
with these specifications, the applicable drawings, and subject to the terms and
conditions of the contract.
B.
Location: The work to be performed is located at the site of the existing North Post
Exchange Building, Building 8-5050, Butner Road, Ft. Bragg, North Carolina with site
location described as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Access from Post security perimeter by the Butner Road Gate accessed off from
Bragg Boulevard (State Route 24).
Butner Road continues west to onto Post and intersects with Souter Place within
500 feet of the Butner Road Gate.
The North Post Exchange Building is accessed by turning south on Souter Place
for approximately 700 feet and then west into the parking lot toward the main entry
to the Building.
The Building is bounded by:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
North: Butner Road.
East: Souter Place.
South: D Street (Woodruff).
West: Chute Street.
Principal Features:
1.
Demolition:
a.
Selective demolition of designated existing interior Building elements
indicated by Contractor:
1.)
2.)
3.)
4.)
5.)
6.)
7.)
8.)
2.
Architectural casework, countertops and pass-through counter.
Hollow metal door and pass-through counter window frames and
glazing.
Aluminum storefront framing and glazing.
Acoustical tile grid and suspension systems, gypsum drywall ceilings,
soffits and bulkheads.
HVAC, sprinkler, fire alarm and electrical construction.
Floor finishes, base trim, corner guards and adhesives.
Wall finishes, gypsum drywall and metal drywall stud partitions.
Dyed black accent banding at polished concrete floor slab-on-grade.
Temporary removals for reuse in new construction or salvage:
a.
Designated existing interior Building elements indicated for reuse by
Contractor:
1.)
For reinstallation in new construction:
a)
b)
c)
SUMMARY OF WORK
Lighting fixtures.
Wood doors and door hardware.
Sprinkler heads.
01010-1
d)
e)
2.)
For salvage and delivery to AAFES for storage:
a)
b.
Office furnishings.
Designated Customer Service casework.
Checkout station and Tobacco corral.
Retail shelving units and gondolas.
Renovation and new construction:
a.
Renovation of approximately 2,000 square feet of existing construction for
expansion of Soft Lines at original Customer Service location:
1.)
2.)
3.)
4.)
5.)
6.)
b.
Patch and refinish wall surfaces to remain.
Preparation of existing floor surface to receive new finishes.
Patch, refinish and polish floor surfaces to remain.
Floor finishes and vinyl base.
ACT ceiling and grid system.
HVAC, sprinkler, fire alarm and electrical construction commensurate
with area renovation.
Renovation and new construction of approximately 1,250 square feet of
existing Retail and Checkout area construction for new Customer Service:
1.)
2.)
3.)
4.)
5.)
6.)
7.)
8.)
9.)
10.)
D.
24" x 24" acoustical tile ceiling pads.
Designated existing interior Building elements indicated for reuse by AAFES:
1.)
2.)
3.)
4.)
3.
Wall mounted signage.
Modular cash vault and vault door in conjunction and in
coordination with AAFES designated contractor hired by
Contractor.
Preparation of existing floor surface to receive new finishes.
Polished concrete slab-on-grade and dyed black accent band.
Metal drywall stud partitions, fascia, soffit and gypsum drywall.
HVAC, sprinkler, fire alarm and electrical construction commensurate
with area renovation and new construction.
ACT ceiling and grid systems.
Hollow metal door and view window frames.
Wall finishes and corner guards.
Glazing, reinstallation of existing doors and door hardware.
Architectural casework, countertops and pass-through counter.
Floor finishes and base trim.
General Provisions
1.
Contractor is advised to take note of the following General Provisions of the
Contract:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Cleaning up.
Material and Workmanship.
Accident Prevention.
Existing structures on and surrounding site.
Utilities and improvements.
Operation and storage areas.
Site investigation.
Permits.
Other responsibilities indicated in General Provisions.
SUMMARY OF WORK
01010-2
2.
1.2
A copy of the Army & Air Force Exchange Service - General Provisions is included
in the Solicitation Package.
EXISTING CONDITIONS
A.
The Project will be constructed on an occupied Military Installation in and around an
occupied facility.
B.
Work performed under this Contract will require phasing and extensive coordination with
AAFES and Ft. Bragg personnel to ensure the health, safety and welfare of AAFES
employees, customers and Post personnel.
C.
Contractor shall be responsible for the construction of temporary barricades, barriers
and services as indicated to:
1.
2.
3.
Protect occupants and pedestrians from injury.
Protect vehicles and existing construction to remain from damage.
Maintain security of the Site and the Building at all times.
1.3
Refer to paragraph 1.27 of this Section and provisions of Section 01420, Environmental
Protection for information pertaining to encounter of potentially hazardous materials.
1.4
SPECIAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
General working hours on Post are from 0700 to 01600 hours.
B.
No streets will be blocked without Post DPW approval.
C.
Contractor shall immediately clean up any debris tracked on to streets resulting from this
construction operation.
D.
Construction areas, including equipment, temporary office and storage areas, shall be
kept clean and neat.
E.
No burning is permitted on the Installation.
1.5
UTILITIES (WATER, SEWER, GAS AND ELECTRICITY)
A.
Refer to Section 01510, Temporary Utilities.
B.
AAFES will pay for utilities consumed within the building for related construction work.
C.
Contractor will be required to pay designated utility companies the prevailing rate for
utilities consumed for this Project for temporary offices and storage sheds (water, sewer,
gas and electricity).
D.
Ft. Bragg utilities information:
1.
Water/Sewer:
a.
Old North Utility Services, Inc. (ONUS):
1.)
2.)
3.)
SUMMARY OF WORK
POC: Jimmy Coats.
E-mail: jcoats@onus.asusinc.com.
Phone: (910) 237-8745.
01010-3
2.
Natural gas:
a.
Ft. Bragg:
1.)
2.)
3.)
3.
Electrical power:
a.
Sandhills Utility Services:
1.)
2.)
3.)
4.
Ft. Bragg:
1.)
2.)
3.)
POC: Janet Gresham.
E-mail: janet.l.gresham2.civ@mail.mil.
Phone: (910) 643-2720.
Data/LAN:
a.
Ft. Bragg:
1.)
2.)
3.)
1.6
POC: John Myers.
E-mail: johnmyers@sandhillsutility.com.
Phone: (910) 818-1769.
Communications:
a.
5.
POC: Robert Mullen.
E-mail: Robert.p.mullen10.civ@mail.mil.
Phone: (910) 432-9760.
POC: Janet Gresham.
E-mail: janet.l.gresham2.civ@mail.mil.
Phone: (910) 643-2720.
LAYING OUT WORK
A.
Layout:
1.
2.
3.
Dimensions and elevations indicated in layout of work shall be verified by
Contractor.
Discrepancies between Drawings, specifications, and Conditions shall be referred
to the Contracting Officer in writing for adjustment before work affected is
performed.
Failure to make such notifications shall place responsibility upon Contractor to
carry out work in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner.
B.
Contractor shall be responsible for the location and elevation of all the construction
contemplated by the construction documents.
C.
Prior to commencing work, Contractor shall carefully compare and check all
Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, and Electrical drawings, each with the other, that in
any way affect the locations of elevation of the work to be executed by him.
1.
2.
D.
Any discrepancy shall be immediately reported to the Contracting Officer or
designated representative for verifications and adjustment.
Any duplication of work made necessary by failure or neglect on Contractor's part
to comply with this function shall be done at his expense.
Field Dimensions:
1.
The drawings accompanying these specifications indicate the general design and
arrangement of all apparatus, fixtures and accessories necessary to complete the
work required.
SUMMARY OF WORK
01010-4
2.
3.
1.7
Exact location or arrangement of equipment may be subject to minor changes
necessitated by field conditions and shall be made as required without additional
cost to AAFES.
Measurements shall be verified by actual observations at the construction site, and
Contractor shall be responsible for all work fitting into place in a satisfactory and
workmanlike manner meeting the approval of the Contracting Officer.
EXISTING OVERHEAD OR UNDERGROUND WORK
A.
Carefully check the site where project is to be erected and observe any overhead wires
and equipment.
1.
B.
Attention is directed to the existence of pipe and other underground improvements that
are shown on the drawings.
1.
C.
All reasonable precautions shall be taken to preserve and protect all such
improvements shown on the drawings and not scheduled for demolition.
Locations of underground lines, shown on the drawings, are based on the best available
sources, but are to be regarded as approximate only.
1.
1.8
Any such work shall be moved, replaced, or protected, as required, whether or not
shown or specified.
Exercise extreme care in locating and identifying these lines before excavating in
adjacent areas.
INTERRUPTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES SERVICES
A.
Contractor shall make utility connections “Hot/Live” whenever possible.
B.
When “Hot/Live” connections are not feasible, Contractor shall perform the work under
this Contract with a minimum of outage time for all utilities.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Contractor may be required to perform the work while the existing utility is in
service.
Interruption shall be by written approval from utility owner.
Existing utility services may only be interrupted when approved, in writing, by the
Contracting Officer and Ft. Bragg DPW.
When it is necessary to interrupt the existing utilities, Contractor shall notify the
Contracting Officer, Ft. Bragg DPW and utility owner in writing at least ten (10) business
days in advance of the time he desires the existing service to be interrupted.
1.
2.
Interruption time shall be kept to a minimum.
Depending upon the activities at the facility that require continuous service from
the existing utility, an interruption may not be subject to schedule at the time
desired by the Contractor.
a.
b.
1.9
In such cases the interruption may have to be scheduled at a time of
minimum requirement of demand for the utility including nights, weekends
or holidays.
The amount of time requested by the Contractor for interruption of existing
utility services shall be as approved, in writing, by the Contracting Officer, Ft.
Bragg DPW and utility owner.
WELDING PERMIT
A.
Prior to commencing any welding, Contractor shall obtain a welding permit through Ft.
Bragg DPW offices from the Ft. Bragg Fire Department.
SUMMARY OF WORK
01010-5
1.10
BARRICADES AND WARNING DEVICES
A.
Contractor shall provide barricades and lighting devices, in accordance with Manual for
Uniform Traffic Control Devices by Department of Transportation, latest Edition, at all
points of excavation and construction in vehicle traffic areas.
B.
Refer to Section 01500, Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls for additional
information and provide detailed Traffic Control Plan for review and approval by
Contracting Officer and Ft. Bragg Safety Officer.
1.
2.
1.11
Include provisions for transportation and delivery of materials and equipment to
site without interference with normal traffic operations.
Include provisions for controlling and directing customers on site for ingress and
egress to and from gasoline dispensing islands and parking without interference
with other site functions.
PROTECTION FOR OPEN FLAME DEVICES
A.
When open flame and/or spark producing devices, i.e., acetylene oxygen welding
equipment, electric arc welding, sweat soldering, etc., are employed for job
accomplishment, the following procedures are mandatory:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Inspect all surroundings and equipment to insure that combustible substances are
not present in any area where contact of metal at a temperature above the
flashpoint of any compound is possible.
Ensure that no open containers or spills of combustible substances are present.
Ensure that ignition is not possible by conduction, convection, radiation, or
dispersion of molten metal.
Proper protection equipment and practices will be used, i.e., fireproof blankets,
wetting of surrounding area, removal o combustible materials where practicable,
earth filled backing and portable fire extinguishers of proper type on hand.
When the above devices are being used notify the Post Fire Department 24 hours
ahead of usage and obtain a permit.
a.
b.
c.
1.12
POC: Inspector Ken Lamey.
E-mail: Kenneth.c.lamey.civ@mail.mil.
Phone: (910) 432-6727.
FIRE PROTECTION
A.
Contractor shall at all times maintain good housekeeping practices to reduce the risk of
fire damage.
B.
All scrap materials, rubbish, and trash shall be removed daily from in and about the
building and shall not be permitted to be scattered on adjacent property.
C.
Suitable storage space shall be provided 50 feet minimum outside the building area for
storing flammable materials and paints.
1.
No storage will be permitted within the building.
D.
Excess flammable liquids being used inside the building shall be kept in closed metal
containers and removed from the building during unused periods.
E.
Contractor shall provide fire extinguishers in accordance with the recommendations of
NFPA Nos. 10 and 241, however, in all cases a minimum of four fire extinguishers shall
be available for each area of work and temporary building.
SUMMARY OF WORK
01010-6
F.
Fire Codes: Contractor shall obey all requirements of the National Fire Codes, Army
Fire Regulations and Installation Fire Regulations, as they relate to his work on this
Post.
G.
Contractor shall provide a fire extinguisher at each location where cutting and welding is
being performed.
1.
2.
1.13
Where electric or gas welding or cutting is done, interposed shields of
incombustible material shall be used to protect against fire damage due to sparks
and hot metal.
When temporary heating devices are used they shall be monitored when operating
when other workmen are not on the premises.
WORK BY OTHERS
A.
Work not included: Except for such auxiliary work as is shown or specified or is
necessary as a part of the construction, the following work is not included in the
Contract:
1.
2.
3.
1.14
Any work shown, but marked "NOT IN CONTRACT" (N.I.C.).
Any work indicated to be furnished and installed by the Vendors or
Concessionaires.
Any work indicated to be furnished and installed by AAFES.
AAFES FURNISHED AND INSTALLED EQUIPMENT
A.
1.15
See Specification Section 01017, AAFES Furnished and Installed Equipment (AF/AI).
AAFES FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT
A.
1.16
See Specification Section 01018, AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed Equipment
(AF/CI).
LINING OF JOINTS IN FINISH MATERIALS
A.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to make certain in the installation of jointed
floor, wall, and ceiling materials that:
1.
2.
The joints line through in a straight line and in both directions wherever possible.
The joints relate to all openings and breaks in the structure and be symmetrically
placed wherever possible including:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
4.
Grills and registers.
Lighting fixtures.
Equipment.
Miscellaneous items not specifically address but requiring alignment for
aesthetic purpose.
If, because of the non-related sizes of the various materials and locations of
openings, etc., it is not possible to accomplish the above, Contractor shall meet
with the Contracting Officer or designated representative to determine the most
satisfactory arrangement.
The Contractor shall establish centerlines for all trades.
SUMMARY OF WORK
01010-7
1.17
INTEGRATING WORK
A.
All streets, buildings, and other improvements shall be protected from damage.
B.
Contractor's operations shall be confined to the immediate vicinity of the project work
and shall not in any way interfere with or obstruct the ingress or egress to and from
street or adjacent property.
C.
If new work is to be connected to existing work, special care shall be exercised not to
disturb or damage the existing work more than necessary.
D.
All damaged work shall be replaced, repaired, and restored to its original condition at no
cost to AAFES, the Army or Ft. Bragg.
1.18
HEADROOM UNDER PIPES
A.
All horizontal runs of plumbing and heating pipes and/or electrical conduit suspended
from ceilings shall provide for a maximum headroom clearance, but in no case shall this
clearance be less than 8'-0" without written consent from the Contracting Officer.
B.
Where piping or conduit is left exposed within a room, the same shall run true to plumb,
horizontal or intended planes.
C.
Where possible, uniform margins are to be maintained between parallel lines and/or
adjacent wall, floor, or ceiling surfaces.
1.19
PATCHING GOVERNMENT-OWNED FACILITIES
A.
1.20
Government-owned structures, facilities, streets, curbs, walks and other features and
landscaping that are damaged or removed due to required excavations or other
construction work, shall be patched, repaired or replaced, and be left in their original
state of repair by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer, Ft. Bragg
DPW and of authorities having jurisdiction.
LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPING
A.
Drawings showing location of equipment, piping, ductwork, etc., are diagrammatic and
job conditions may not always permit installation in the location shown.
B.
When this situation occurs, it shall be brought to the Contracting Officer or designated
representative’s immediate attention and the relocation determined in a joint conference.
C.
The Contractor will be held responsible for relocating any items without first obtaining the
Contracting Officer's approval.
D.
He shall remove and relocate such items at his own expense if so directed by the
Contracting Officer or designated representative.
1.21
OVERLOADING
A.
The Contractor shall be responsible for excessive overloading of any part or parts of
structures beyond their safe calculated carrying capacities by placing of materials,
equipment, tools, machinery, or any other item thereon.
SUMMARY OF WORK
01010-8
B.
1.22
No loads shall be placed on floors or roof structure that exceeds safe capacities of these
structural elements.
STANDARDS
A.
Any material specified by reference to the number, symbol, or title of a specific standard
such as Commercial Standard, a Federal Specification, a trade association standard, or
other similar standard shall comply with the requirements in the latest revision thereof,
and any amendment or supplement thereto, in effect on the date of invitation for
proposals, except as limited to type, class, or grade, or modified in such reference, and
except as otherwise indicated.
B.
The standard referred to, except as modified in the specifications, shall have full force
and effect as though printed in these specifications.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.23
Where Federal Specifications are referred to as a measure of quality and
standard, they refer to Federal Specifications established by the Procurement
Division of the United States Government and are available from the
Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office.
Where Federal Specification numbers are used, they refer to the latest edition
including amendments thereto.
Where Commercial Standards are referred to as a measure of quality, standard,
and method of fabrication, they refer to Commercial Standards issued by the U.S.
Department of Commerce.
Where ASTM Serial Numbers are used, they refer to the latest tentative
specifications, standards specifications, standards methods, or standard method
of testing issued by the American Society for Testing and Materials.
CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMANCE
A.
Except where tests and/or inspections in connection with structural materials are
specified or required by applicable laws, rules, and regulations, manufacturer's
certificate covering conformance with the requirements of the above mentioned Federal
Specifications and Commercial Standards may be acceptable in lieu of such items.
B.
Such certificates shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer and designated
representative for all items so specified.
1.24
OCCUPANCY BY THE EXCHANGE
A.
The Exchange shall reserve the right and privilege of partial occupancy during progress
of the work.
B.
Access shall be allowed at all times to the Exchange and its own Contractors in the
endeavor.
1.25
TESTS AND REPORTS
A.
See Specification Sections for detailed requirements of testing and reporting.
B.
Refer to outline requirements in Section 01400, Quality Control and Section 01410,
Testing Laboratory Services.
SUMMARY OF WORK
01010-9
1.26
REFERENCES
A.
All references to the word "Government" in the specifications shall mean Army and Air
Force Exchange Service (AAFES).
B.
Wherever the word "provide" is used in the Contract Documents as a directive, it shall be
interpreted as meaning "provide and install completely and ready for use".
C.
Definitions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Vendor: Person or persons selling any material item.
Base or Facility: Location on which Project is being constructed.
Concessionaire: Person who is directly responsible for the lease of and operation
of the concession.
Architect-Engineer: That person or firm responsible for preparing the working
drawings and specifications.
a.
5.
6.
1.27
h. michael bohnsack ARCHITECTS
600 West Main Street, Suite 2
Post Office Box 820
Carbondale, Illinois 62901
618.457.5709
AAFES or Exchange: Army and Air Force Exchange Service.
Inspection Agency: Project Construction Inspector contracted by AAFES.
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
A.
Do not incorporate any materials or equipment into the work that contain
asbestos, lead-based paint, PCB’s or any other know hazardous material.
B.
Discovery of hazardous Site materials:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.28
Removal and disposal of Hazardous Materials is not included in this Contract.
If the Contractor encounters such materials, immediately notify Ft. Bragg DPW
Environmental and the Contracting Officer.
Immediately cease work until resolution is determined by Ft. Bragg DPW
Environmental and the Contracting Officer.
Advise Contracting Officer or designated representative in writing of the extent and
time delay anticipated where such materials are encountered.
SUBMISSION OF PHOTOGRAPHS
A.
Contractor shall submit to the Contracting Officer photographs taken on or about the first
of every month, showing the general conditions of the work as viewed from the north,
south, east, west where applicable and interior.
B.
Photographs shall be digital (minimum of 1200 pixels x 1600 pixels [2 MB]) with a
minimum of twenty (20) 3" x 5" standard prints accompanying each Application for
Payment.
C.
Each print shall be identified by date of exposure, project title, and AAFES Project
Number, location and direction taken.
D.
The Contractor may also submit a digital video of the above requirements as an option
to photographs.
SUMMARY OF WORK
01010-10
1.29
COPIES OF DOCUMENTS FURNISHED
A.
After Contract award, and for construction purposes only, the Contractor will be
provided:
1.
2.
B.
A record set of “Issued for Construction” Drawings and Specifications.
A reproducible set of the “Issued for Construction” Drawings and Specifications in
electronic format (CD/.pdf)
Additional copies will be the responsibility of the Contractor.
2
PRODUCTS (Not Used)
3
EXECUTION (Not Used)
END 01010.
SUMMARY OF WORK
01010-11
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01017 – AAFES FURNISHED &
INSTALLED EQUIPMENT
1
GENERAL
1.1
AAFES FURNISHED AND INSTALLED PROPERTY (AF/AI), (AF/VI), (VF/AI) or (VF/VI)
A.
Definitions:
1.
2.
3.
For the purposes of this Section the term AAFES shall mean the Army and Air
Force Exchange Service (A) and Exchange and/or its Vendors (V).
For the purposes of this Section the party responsible for furnishing the product
shall be designated (A) or (V) followed by (F) representing AAFES Furnished (AF)
or Vendor Furnished (VF).
For the purposes of this Section the party responsible for installing the product
shall be designated (A) or (V) followed by (I) representing AAFES Installed (AI) or
Vendor Installed (VI).
B.
Property: Property is indicated on the drawings.
C.
Schedule: Contractor shall schedule phased completion of designated areas for
beneficial occupancy by AAFES for their use prior to completion of entire project.
D.
AAFES or others, including vendors and concessionaires, will furnish and install property
as indicated and subject to the following performance duties set forth below:
1.
Contractor's Duties:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
Scheduling and advanced notification to AAFES of when property will be
needed.
Coordination of property deliveries and temporary storage facilities for illtimed scheduling on the part of the Contractor.
Provide access for AAFES and Vendor personnel.
Provide blocking and backing rough-ins required for mounting fixtures and
equipment.
Coordinate work and cooperate with the installers of the property so that
installation can be accomplished in accordance with Construction Schedule.
Provide electrical rough-ins in coordination with AFFES furnished shop
drawings, property and building systems.
Provide final hard wired connections between property and rough-ins as
indicated.
Provide security of designated areas.
AAFES Duties:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Inspect designated area prior to use and issue statement of acceptance of
area for installation of property.
Deliver or arrange deliveries of property based on Contractor furnished
schedule.
Uncrate, assemble and set property in Contractor coordinate locations.
Make plug-in or quick couple connections between property and building
systems and Contractor provided rough-ins and devices as indicated.
Provide custodial services for designated areas during use after beneficial
occupancy.
AAFES FURNISHED &
INSTALLED EQUIPMENT
01017-1
1.2
DELIVERY DATE CHANGES
A.
Requests by Contractor to change designated delivery dates shall be made in writing to
Contracting Officer or designated representative at least 30 days in advance of the
designated delivery date.
B.
If the Contractor is not ready to accept delivery of AAFES furnished property the
Contractor shall be responsible for storage, protection and/or redelivery cost.
C.
Should AAFES be unable to effect the change, or should the Contractor fail to submit his
request within the time stated above, the Contractor's obligation under this contract and
as stated herein shall not be relieved and further, the Contractor will have no basis upon
which he can file a claim under these conditions.
1.3
AAFES ACTIVITIES AFFECTING PROGRESS OF WORK:
A.
Exchange Retail: Schedule date of use and possession of these areas for installation of
fixtures, equipment, accessories and signage with sufficient time to prevent scheduling
delays in completion of the Project.
B.
Customer Service: Schedule date of use and possession of these areas for installation
of casework, equipment, accessories, fixtures and signage with sufficient time to prevent
scheduling delays in completion of the Project.
1.4
ACCEPTANCE OF AREAS FOR BENEFICIAL OCCUPANCY
A.
Completion: Construction in each area at date scheduled for its use and possession by
AAFES or others:
1.
2.
B.
Inspection: Prior to acceptance by AAFES of an area for beneficial occupancy:
1.
2.
C.
Shall be sufficiently complete, in accordance with Contract Documents, so that
AAFES or others may occupy the area for the use for which it is intended.
Comply with Contract Clauses titled Inspection of Construction, and Use and
Possession Prior to Completion.
The Contracting Officer will conduct an inspection of the specific area.
A list of deficiencies will be provided to the Contractor.
Acceptance: If the Contracting Officer determines the specific area is sufficiently
complete for beneficial occupancy by AAFES:
1.
2.
The area will be accepted in writing with the exception of the deficiencies listed.
The deficiencies listed shall be completed or corrected prior to final acceptance at
the completion of the project.
D.
Damage: Damage resulting from AAFES' use will not be considered the Contractor's
responsibility.
E.
General Provisions: Refer to clause entitled "Final Inspection and Acceptance" of the
AAFES "General Provisions".
AAFES FURNISHED &
INSTALLED EQUIPMENT
01017-2
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
EXCHANGE RETAIL:
A.
AAFES Furnished and Installed Retail Items: AAFES will furnish and install the items
indicated (AF/AI).
B.
Contractor Provide: Coordination and rough-ins, hard-wired services and final
connections for items furnished and installed by AAFES unless indicated otherwise and
subject to provisions set forth above.
2.2
3
CUSTOMER SERVICE:
A.
AAFES and Vendor Furnished and Installed Customer Service Items: AAFES and/or
Vendor will furnish and install the items indicated (AF/AI), (AF/VI), (VF/AI) or (VF/VI).
B.
Contractor Provide: Coordination and rough-ins, hard-wired services and final
connections for items furnished and installed by AAFES and/or Vendor unless indicated
otherwise and subject to provisions set forth above.
EXECUTION (Not Used)
END 01017.
AAFES FURNISHED &
INSTALLED EQUIPMENT
01017-3
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01018 – AAFES FURNISHED/
CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT
1
GENERAL
1.1
AAFES FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT (AF/CI):
A.
For the purposes of this Project the term AAFES shall mean the Army and Air Force
Exchange Service (A) and Exchange and/or its Vendors (V)
B.
AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed (AF/CI) equipment shall be handled in
accordance with the "Army and Air Force Exchange Service General Provisions" clause
entitled "AAFES Furnished Property".
C.
AAFES Furnish Equipment: AAFES will furnish equipment indicted for installation by the
Contractor.
D.
Contractor Provide:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Scheduling and advanced notification to AAFES of when property will be needed.
Coordination of property deliveries and temporary storage facilities.
Coordination and confirmation of exact equipment dimensions and rough-in
requirements for all property furnished by AAFES.
Electrical rough-ins in coordination with AAFES furnished shop drawings, property
and building systems.
Final hard wired connections between property and rough-ins as indicated.
Provide security of designated areas.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
EXCHANGE RETAIL:
A.
AAFES Furnished, Contractor Installed Retail Items: AAFES will furnish wall mounted
ViraWall shelving fixtures indicated for installation in the expanded Soft Lines area by
the Contractor (AF/CI).
B.
Contractor Provide: Complete installation of fixtures, including appropriate rough-ins
and final connections, unless indicated otherwise and subject to provisions set forth in
these Solicitation Documents.
2.2
CUSTOMER SERVICE:
A.
AAFES Furnished, Contractor Installed Customer Service Items: AAFES will furnish
existing Cash Vault and Vault Door indicated for installation by designated AAFES
Contractor in the Customer Service area paid for by the Contractor (AF/CI).
B.
Contractor Provide: Complete installation of equipment by designated AAFES
Contractor, including appropriate rough-ins and final connections for items furnished by
AAFES unless indicated otherwise and subject to provisions set forth in these
Solicitation Documents.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S DUTIES
A.
Designate required delivery date for each product.
AAFES FURNISHED/
CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT
01018-1
1.
2.
B.
Notify the Contracting Officer or designated representative in writing at least 60
days in advance of the date that AAFES furnished equipment and furnishings will
be needed.
Shop drawings indicating dimensional locations of all rough-ins will be furnished by
AAFES.
The equipment and fixtures will be received at the job site by a representative of AAFES
who will jointly, with the Contractor, verify condition and quantities.
1.
2.
The representative will then affect receipted transfer of custody of the equipment,
fixtures and furnishings to the Contractor.
After receipt of equipment, fixtures and signage Contractor shall:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
4.
The installation shall be complete in all respects, including mechanical and
electrical hook ups, and put into good operating condition.
Upon completion of installation Contractor shall provide:
a.
b.
C.
Make adjustments to all equipment and fixtures.
Written notification to Contracting Officer or designated representative of
completion and readiness.
AAFES Duties:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.2
Unload, handle, store (on-site), protect, uncrate, assemble, install set in final
position, align, join, level, and make all utility connections to all items of
equipment.
Installation shall be performed in accordance with the specifications,
equipment, fixture and furnishing plans and schedules shown on the
Drawings and the rough-in drawings provided by AAFES.
Construct all openings, furnish and install required sleeves and furnish and
install all reinforcing, miscellaneous supports, angles, plates, anchors, and
bolts necessary to secure AAFES furnished equipment in place.
Repair or replace items damaged as a result of Contractor's operations.
Apply finish indicated, if any.
Deliver all AAFES furnished items to the job site.
Schedule delivery date with supplier in accordance with Progress Chart.
Provide Contractor with installation drawings and instructions.
Provide Contractor with shop drawings indicating dimensional locations of all
plumbing and electrical rough-ins.
DELIVERY DATE CHANGES:
A.
Requests by Contractor to change designated delivery dates shall be made in writing at
least 30 days in advance of the designated delivery date.
B.
If the Contractor is not ready to accept delivery of AAFES furnished equipment the
Contractor shall be responsible for storage and delivery cost.
C.
Should AAFES be unable to effect the change, or should the Contractor fail to submit his
request within the time stated above, the Contractor's obligation under his contract and
as stated herein shall not be relieved and further, the Contractor will have no basis upon
which he can file a claim under these conditions.
END 01018.
AAFES FURNISHED/
CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT
01018-2
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01026 – UNIT PRICES
1
GENERAL
1.1
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE
A.
Contractor provide:
1.
2.
1.2
Unit prices as indicated for specified items.
Conformity to administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A.
Contract Documents.
B.
Division 1 – General Requirements.
C.
Section 03354 – Interior Concrete Slab Repair & Joint Filler Replacement.
D.
Section 03356 – Polished Concrete Floor Finish.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Unit price shall be added to Contractor’s proposal on AAFES Solicitation Form 4450024, as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services added to or deducted
from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if estimated quantities of Work
required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased.
PROCEDURES
A.
Unit prices shall include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation,
insurance, applicable taxes, overhead, and profit.
B.
Measurement and Payment:
1.
2.
Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of
unit prices.
Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those
Sections.
C.
Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor’s measurement of work-in-place that
involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner’s
expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.
D.
List of Unit Prices:
1.
2.
2
A list of unit prices is included in Part 3 of this Section.
Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for
materials described under each unit price.
PRODUCTS
A.
See Section 03354 – Interior Concrete Slab Repair & Joint Filler Replacement.
B.
See Section 03356 – Polished Concrete Floor Finish.
UNIT PRICES
01026-1
3
EXECUTION
3.1
LIST OF UNIT PRICES
A.
Refer to Section 03354, Interior Concrete Slab Repair & Joint Filler Replacement for
detailed description of work and method for computing cost for the following items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Joint filler removal and replacement.
Spalled joint repair or joint with metal keyway (less than ¾”).
Spalled joint repair with metal keyway or self leveling compound (greater than ¾”).
Crack repair.
Surface defect repair, including pop-outs, spalls and gouges.
Surface embed repair including cleanouts, in-floor electrical outlets and Walker
Duct access holes.
Large area surface repair, existing underlayment removal and replacement.
Grout coat surface enhancement, including micro-pin holes, pitting and other
shallow surface deficiencies.
Full grind, densify and polish portions of the project not currently indicated on the
drawings.
END 01026.
UNIT PRICES
01026-2
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01030 – SUBSTITUTIONS PROCEDURES
1
GENERAL
1.1
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE
A.
Substitution submission procedures.
B.
Documentation of changes to Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time.
1.2
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
AAFES Solicitation/Proposal/Award Form, contained in the AAFES solicitation package.
B.
AAFES Instructions to Offerors and Conditions of Proposal/Awards form, contained in
the AAFES solicitation package.
C.
Individual specification Sections relevant to the work required under each product.
1.3
GENERAL SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A.
List proposed substitutions on the AAFES Proposal Substitution Form.
B.
Substitutions listed on the AAFES Proposal Substitution Form will be reviewed and
accepted or rejected at AAFES's discretion.
C.
Accepted substitutions will be identified by Solicitation Amendment.
D.
Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate the Work of each
option.
1.4
SUBSTITUTIONS DURING SOLICITATION
A.
Prior to solicitation closing, Contracting Officer will consider written requests to amend
Solicitation Documents to ADD products not specified provided such requests are
received with sufficient advance time to issue an Amendment, which must be issued 10
days prior to proposal date.
1.
2.
B.
Requests received without sufficient advance time to review and be incorporated
into an Amendment will not be considered with timing as determined by
Contracting Officer.
If a request is approved, an Amendment will be issued indicating approval.
No substitutions will be considered after date of Solicitation Proposal receipt except
under one or more of the following conditions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Required for compliance with final interpretations of code requirements or
insurance regulations.
Unavailability of specified product, through no fault of Contractor.
Subsequent information discloses inability of specified product to perform properly
or fit designated space.
Manufacturer or fabricator refusal to certify or guarantee performance of product
as specified for intended use.
SUBSTITUTIONS PROCEDURES
01030-1
1.5
SUBSTITUTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
In the event a material substitution is to be submitted, the Offeror will follow the
procedure outlined in Paragraphs A1 thru 3 below and Paragraph B1 thru 6:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Requests for substitution based on the above, when forwarded by Offeror to Contracting
Officer, are understood to mean that Offeror:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Proposing Offeror shall submit three copies of request for substitution.
Request shall be accompanied by complete data on proposed substitution
substantiating compliance with Contract Documents including product
identification and description, performance and test data, references and samples
where applicable, and an itemized comparison of proposed substitution with
product specified.
Request shall be accompanied by accurate cost data on proposed substitution in
comparison with product specified, whether or not modification of Contract sum is
to be a consideration.
Represents that he/she has personally investigated proposed substitute product
and determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to product specified.
Represents that he/she has coordinated the substitute product with subcontractors
for compatibility of installation into Project and that no additional costs will be
incurred due to acceptance of the substitution.
Will provide same guarantee for substitution that he/she would for specified
product.
Certifies that cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under
this Contract, but excludes costs under separate contracts and redesign costs,
and waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution.
Will coordinate installation of accepted substitution, making such changes as may
be required for work to be completed in all respects.
Product substitutions price increases will not be considered, only price decreases.
Substitutions will not be considered if:
1.
2.
3.
They are indicated or implied on Shop Drawing submittals without formal request
required above.
For implementation they require a substantial revision of Contract Documents in
order to accommodate use.
They are unacceptable to the Contracting Officer.
D.
NO FURTHER SUBSTITUTIONS WILL BE PERMITTED AFTER CONTRACT AWARD.
E.
Refer to AAFES Proposal Substitution Form (CSI) attached to the end of this Section.
2
PRODUCTS (Not Used)
3
EXECUTION (Not Used)
END 01030.
SUBSTITUTIONS PROCEDURES
01030-2
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01045 – CUTTING & PATCHING
1
GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of Work.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 01010 – Summary of Work.
B.
Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.
C.
Section 07270 – Firestopping.
D.
Individual Product Specification Sections:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Cutting and patching incidental to work of the Section.
Advance notification to other Sections of openings required in work of those Sections.
Limitations on cutting structural members.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Structural integrity of any element of Project.
Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element.
Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.
Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.
Work of AAFES or others.
Include in request:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Identification of Project.
Location and description of affected Work.
Necessity for cutting or alteration.
Description of proposed Work and Products to be used.
Alternatives to cutting and patching.
Effect on work of AAFES or others.
Written permission of affected entity.
Date and time work will be executed.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Primary Products: Those required for original installation.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine existing conditions prior to commencing Work, including elements subject to
damage or movement during cutting and patching.
B.
After uncovering existing Work, assess conditions affecting performance of work.
CUTTING & PATCHING
01045-1
C.
3.2
Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Provide temporary supports to ensure structural integrity of the Work.
B.
Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage.
C.
Provide protection from elements for areas that may be exposed by uncovering work.
3.3
CUTTING
A.
Execute cutting and fitting to complete the Work.
B.
Uncover work to install improperly sequenced work.
C.
Remove and replace defective or non-conforming work.
D.
Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.
E.
Provide openings in the Work for penetration of Fire Protection, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical,
Communications and Alarms and Surveillance work.
F.
Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and
moisture resistant elements, and elements where finish surfaces will be exposed.
G.
Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill.
1.
3.4
Pneumatic tools shall not be allowed without prior approval from Contracting Officer or
designated representative.
PATCHING
A.
Execute patching to complement adjacent Work.
B.
Fit Products together to integrate with other Work.
C.
Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work and which will provide appropriate
surfaces to receive patching and finishing.
D.
Employ original installer to perform patching for weather exposed and moisture resistant
elements, and sight-exposed surfaces.
E.
Restore work with new Products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
F.
Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through
surfaces.
G.
At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely
seal voids with fire rated material, to full thickness of the penetrated element.
H.
Refinish surfaces:
1.
2.
3.
Match adjacent finish.
For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break.
For an assembly, refinish entire unit.
END 01045.
CUTTING & PATCHING
01045-2
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01051 – GRADES, LINES & LEVELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Contractor provide:
1.
2.
B.
Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
Lay out of Work.
Establish all working lines, levels, elevations and measurements.
General Conditions of the Contract for Construction.
Section 01010 –Summary of Work.
Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.
Technical Sections of the Project Manual.
CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
Contractor shall provide:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Coordination and supervision of layouts of own work.
Coordination and supervision of layouts of own subcontractors work.
Coordination of AAFES and AAFES/Vendor layouts.
Contractor shall provide:
1.
Coordination and supervision of overall layout of Work.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
1.3
Coordination of AAFES Furnished/AAFES Installed and Vendor Furnished/
Vendor Installed equipment layout.
Coordination and supervision of AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed
equipment layout.
Supervision of subcontractor layout.
Establish all working lines, levels, elevations and measurements for Work.
Employ qualified personnel to perform layout of Work.
CONTRACTING OFFICER WILL FURNISH:
A.
Locations, dimensions and data pertaining to other improvements so far as known (shown
of drawings).
B.
Information and contact person for the purpose of Contractor coordination and supervision
of AAFES Furnished and Vendor Furnished equipment and work.
END 01051.
GRADES, LINES & LEVELS
01051-1
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01060 – AAFES SAFETY POLICIES &
PROCEDURES
1
GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Contractor required health and safety plan.
1.
2.
B.
1.2
Contractor is responsible for risk assessment plan.
Contractor shall maintain OSHA permissible exposure limits related by the risk
assessment of 25 ppm (170 mg/cubic meter) during any 8 hour work shift for a
40-hour week
Construction Hazard Plan.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Submittals – Section 01340 (Construction Hazard Plan, Job Safety and Health Plan,
Emergency Response Plan).
B.
AAFES Environmental Protection – Section 01420.
C.
Project Record Documents - Section 01720.
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent
referenced.
1.
U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Publication:
a.
2.
B.
1.4
EM 385-1-1 Safety and Health Requirements Manual (Oct. 92)
OSHA 1910 R.E.G. - 29CFR, OSHA 1910.120
The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submittals for AAFES approval: The following items shall be submitted for AAFES
approval:
1.
Designation of Safety Representative - The Contractor shall designate in
writing a qualified employee OSHA Trained under 1910.120 responsible for the
overall supervision of all accident prevention activities.
a.
b.
2.
3.
Duties shall include ensuring applicable safety requirements are
incorporated into work methods and inspecting the job site to ensure that
safety measures and instructions are actually being applied.
This person shall be on site at all time that work is in progress.
The Contractor shall be trained/certified in OSHA 1910.120 procedures.
All other employees performing site work will meet OSHA 1910 training
requirements for their job capacity.
AAFES SAFETY POLICIES & PROCEDURES 01060-1
B.
Submittals for Information Only - The following items shall be Contractor certified:
1.
Job Hazard Analysis: Contractor shall develop a job hazard analysis for
presentation at the pre-construction conference.
a.
b.
2.
The Contractor's job hazard analysis shall list potential hazards that could
arise during the course of the work.
For each hazard, the applicable paragraph of EM 385-1-1 shall be cited.
Job Safety and Health Plan.
a.
b.
c.
d.
The Contractor shall develop a Job Safety and Health Plan for
presentation at the Pre-construction conference.
The Contractor's Safety Plan shall make whatever provisions are
necessary to conduct his work in accordance with current OSHA
standards.
The safety and health plan must specifically address the excavation
portion of construction and will be specific to all Hazardous Materials
(Haz-Mats), and incorporate decontamination procedures for personnel
and equipment, continuous vapor monitoring, a prohibition against eating
in proximity to the site, and a prohibition against the smoking of tobacco
products in the proximity to the site.
The following are minimum requirements for the health and safety plan:
1.)
2.)
The Contractor is responsible for all compounds and degredation
products addressed by the Risk Assessment Plan.
Specialized Designs: Specialized designs will be provided when
the situation requires.
a)
3.)
Safety Plans: Safety Plans will be the responsibility of the
Contractor for construction areas identified by the installation
and/or AAFES as areas of known hazards only.
a)
b)
4.)
Examples of such designs include, but are not limited to,
vapor barriers in areas of known vapor hazard.
These plans are required by 29 CFR 1910 and are the
responsibility of the Contractor.
This requirement will be coordinated through the Health and
Safety Program of the military installation by the Contractor.
Minimum Requirements for the Health and Safety Plan are as
follows:
a)
b)
c)
d)
Must be kept on site, and must be written.
Will contain a hazard analysis (safety and health risk) for
each site task and operation (to be supplied by the
installation).
Will include employee training (per paragraph (3) of
1910.120).
Will include personal protective equipment to be used by
employees for each of the site tasks and operations
(paragraph (g) (5) of 1910.120).
AAFES SAFETY POLICIES & PROCEDURES
01060-2
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
n)
e.
f.
g.
1.5
Will include provision for medical surveillance (paragraph (f)
of 1910.120).
Will include the frequency and types of air monitoring,
personal monitoring, environmental sampling techniques and
instruments to be used (their maintenance and calibration).
Will include a site control program (per paragraph (d) of
1910.120) to be coordinated with the installation.
Will include a decontamination procedure (per paragraph (k)
of 1910.120).
Will include an emergency response plan (per paragraph (1)
of 1910.120).
Will include a confined space entry procedure (per 1910.146,
147 or program equivalent).
Will include provision for spill containment (per paragraph (j)
of 1910.120).
Will include pre-entry briefings (prior to each site task
activity) for all employees involved in the task, supervision, or
emergency response.
Written verification of adherence to the "plan" by a Safety
and Health Supervisor is required (the supervisor must meet
the 1910.120 training requirements for supervisors).
Deficiencies will be corrected immediately upon discovery
and after consultation with the AAFES Contracting Officer.
Hazard Response Plan: The planned, unplanned or non-predicted
discovery of such hazards as transite pipe, contaminated soils, and other
possible hazards will be addressed within an Emergency Response Plan
(ERP) by Contractor.
This requirement will be coordinated through the Health and Safety
Program of the military installation by the Contractor.
Material Safety Data Sheets will be maintained at the site for all
hazardous materials in use.
MONTHLY SAFETY MEETINGS
A.
Schedule safety meetings with Contractor and subcontractor personnel on a monthly
basis in conjunction with Progress/Pay Meetings.
1.
2.
1.6
Minutes of safety meetings shall be prepared and signed by the Contractor.
Concurrence signed by Inspection Section and the original submitted to the
Contracting Officer for inclusion in the contract file.
ACCIDENT REPORTING AND RECORD KEEPING
A.
Accident reporting and record keeping shall be in accordance with Section 2, EM
385-1-1.
B.
Telephonic reports of injuries or property damage will be made as soon as possible
after the incident and will be followed by a copy of U.S. Army Investigation Accident
Report (DA Form 285).
AAFES SAFETY POLICIES & PROCEDURES
01060-3
2
PRODUCTS (Not Used)
3
EXECUTION
3.1
LIFE OF CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS
A.
3.2
The Contractor shall comply with EM 385-1-1 and all provisions of this section during
the life of the contract.
HEAD PROTECTION (HARD HATS)
A.
All work sites under this contract are designated Hard Hat Areas.
B.
Contractor shall post the area in accordance with Paragraph 7.C.03, EM 385-1-1 and
shall ensure that all personnel, vendors and visitors use hard hats while within the
limits of the work site.
END 01060.
AAFES SAFETY POLICIES & PROCEDURES
01060-4
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01090 – AAFES SAFETY REGULATIONS &
CODES
1
GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Reference Standards.
B.
Licenses and Permits.
C.
Safety.
D.
Affirmative Procurement Program.
E.
Ozone Depleting Substances.
F.
Lead Based Paint.
G.
Cleaning & Debris Control.
H.
Nuisance Dumping & Polluting Activities.
I.
Stormwater Pollution Prevention.
J.
Excavation at IRP Sites.
K.
Contaminated Soil.
L.
Suspected Hazardous Materials.
M.
Oil-Filled or Impregnated Electrical Components.
N.
Spill Response and Reporting.
O.
Waste Disposal and Environmental Protection.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 01000 – Requirements of Ft. Bragg.
B.
Section 01010 – Summary of Work.
C.
Section 01060 – AAFES Safety Policies & Procedures.
D.
Section 01310 – Project Management & Coordination.
E.
Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.
F.
Section 01400 – Quality Control.
G.
Section 01410 – Testing Laboratory Services.
AAFES SAFETY REGULATIONS & CODES
01090-1
H.
Section 01420 – AAFES Environmental Protection.
I.
Section 01510 – Temporary Utilities.
J.
Section 01590 – Field Offices & Sheds.
K.
Section 01600 – Material & Equipment.
L.
Technical Sections of the Project Manual.
1.3
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
Federal, State and Local Codes and Ordinances take precedence over these
Specifications and Drawings where conflicts occur, unless the Drawings or
Specifications call for more stringent requirements.
1.
Notify the Contracting Officer and designated representative of conflicts in writing.
B.
Comply with all applicable laws, building and construction codes, OSHA Safety and
Health Regulations and applicable requirements of any governmental agency under
whose jurisdiction this Work is being performed.
C.
Obtain a copy of standards referenced in the various Specification Sections.
1.
D.
Maintain copy at the jobsite during execution of Work to which the standard
applies.
Construction that is not governed by the contract specifications will be governed by the
more stringent provisions of the latest published edition or statute adopted edition, of the
following applicable codes, regulations and standards.
1.
ACI – American Concrete Institute.
a.
b.
2.
3.
ADAAG – Americans With Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings
and Facilities, U.S. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board.
AISC – American Institute of Steel Construction.
a.
4.
ASCE/SEI 7-05 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.
ASHRAE – American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning
Engineers.
a.
b.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Specification for the Design of Cold-formed Steel Structural Members,
including 2004 Supplement Standards for Cold-formed Steel Framing.
ANSI – American National Standards Institute.
ASCE/SEI – American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute.
a.
7.
AISC 360-05, Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.
AISI – American Iron and Steel Institute,
a.
5.
6.
ACI 318-05 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
ACI 530-05 Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures.
Energy Conservation in New Buildings Design (ASHRAE 90.1).
Standard for Natural and Mechanical Ventilation (No. 62).
ASME – American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
ASPE – American Society of Plumbing Engineers.
ASTM – American Society for Testing and Materials, Standards and Certifications.
ATBCB – Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board.
AAFES SAFETY REGULATIONS & CODES
01090-2
12.
AWS – American Welding Society.
a.
b.
13.
14.
CFR – Code of Federal Regulations.
CPSP – Consumer Products Safety Commission.
a.
15.
23.
33.
Occupational Safety and Health Act.
PCA – Portland Concrete Association.
a.
31.
32.
APA Rated Sheathing Standards.
OSHA – Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
a.
30.
Grading Rules.
APA – American Plywood Asscociation.
a.
29.
National Design Specification for Stress Grade Lumber and its Fastenings.
SPIB – Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
a.
28.
NFPA 101, Life Safety Code, 2009.
NFPA-54, National Fuel Gas code, 2006.
NFPA-58, Liquefied Petroleum Gas code, 2004.
NFPA-70, National Electric Code, 2008.
NFPA-72, Fire Alarm Code, 2007.
NLMA – Northeastern Lumber Manufacturer’s Association.
a.
27.
Specifications for the design and Construction of Load-Bearing Concrete
Masonry.
NESHAPS – National Emissions Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants.
NFPA – National Fire Protection Association.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
26.
Oil Pollution Prevention, 40 CFR, Ch.1, Part 112, 1July 2004 Edition.
FM – Factory Mutual, Standards and Certifications.
IBC – International Building Code, 2009 Edition.
IECC – International Energy Conservation Code.
IMC – International Mechanical Code.
IPC – International Plumbing Code.
MIL-STD-3007F – Standard Practice for unified Facilities Criteria and Unified
Facilities Guide Specifications, 15 February 2006.
NCMA – National Concrete Masonry Association.
a.
24.
25.
Manual of Standard Practice.
EPA – Environmental Protection Agency.
a.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Material.
CRSI – Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute.
a.
16.
AWS D1.1-1.4, Structural Welding Code.
AWS D1.2, Structural Welding Code-Aluminum.
Concrete Floors on Grade.
PCI – Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute.
UFAS – Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards, U.S. Architectural and
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board.
UFC – Unified Facilities Criteria.
a.
UFC 1-200-01, General Building Requirements, 27 November 2007.
AAFES SAFETY REGULATIONS & CODES
01090-3
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
34.
35.
1.4
UFC 1-300-08, Criteria for Transfer and Acceptance of Military Real Property,
30 June 2004.
UFC 3-120-10, Interior Design (including Change 1, July 2007).
UFC 3-310-01, Structural Load Data, 25 May 2005.
UFC 3-310-04, Design: Seismic Design for Buildings.
UFC 3-400-01, Energy Conservation, 5 July 2002.
UFC 3-400-10N, Mechanical Engineering.
UFC 3-410-01FA, Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (with Change 1,
15 May 2003).
Ufc 3-410-02N, Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning and Dehumidifying
Systems, 8 June 2005.
UFC 3-420-01, Plumbing Systems (including Changes 1 & 2, October 2006).
UFC 3-500-10N, Electrical Engineering.
UFC 3-600-01, Fie Protection Engineering for Facilities, 26 September 2006.
UFC 4-010-01, DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for Buildings (including
Change 1, 22 January 2007).
UFC 4-010-02, DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standoff Distances for Building
(FOUO), (including Change 1, 19 January 2007).
UL – Underwriters Laboratories, Standards and Certifications.
Other applicable codes and standards as applicable or as referenced by the
individual specification Sections.
LICENSES AND PERMITS
A.
Contractor shall obtain and maintain current for the duration of this Contract, all required
Federal, State and local licenses and permits.
1.
Contractor shall pay all associated fees without additional cost to the Government.
B.
Obtain from Post security all required vehicle and entry permits as specified in Section
01000, Requirements of Ft. Bragg.
C.
Obtain any additional permits as required by Ft. Bragg DPW at no additional cost to the
Government.
1.5
SAFETY
A.
Comply with all Federal and State regulations concerning safety of personnel and
equipment.
1.
2.
All Contractor personnel shall wear hard hats and steel toe safety shoes while on
the project site.
All Contractor personnel shall wear hearing protection (ear muffs or ear plugs)
when required by OSHA regulations.
B.
Ensure that lock out, tag out procedures are established and used as directed by 29
CFR 1910.145.
C.
Comply with all safety, traffic and protection requirements in effect on Ft. Bragg.
D.
Provide safety barriers around open excavations, openings in floors and other hazards
created by the Contractor’s activities.
E.
The Contracting Officer may direct the Contractor to cease activities that are deemed
unsafe.
AAFES SAFETY REGULATIONS & CODES
01090-4
1.6
AFFIRMATIVE PROCUREMENT PROGRAM
A.
These standards apply to all new construction, demolition, rehabilitation, alteration,
modification, repair, and maintenance of existing facilities.
B.
In an effort to comply with the affirmative procurement requirements of Section 6002 of
the Resource Conservation Recovery Act (RCRA) and Executive Order 13101, the
government strongly promotes the use of the recycled and recovered materials and
products identified in the Environmental Protection Agency’s Comprehensive
Procurement Guidelines.
C.
Recycled and recovered materials and products shall be used throughout the project in
quantities as set forth in the technical Sections of the specifications and subject to
compliance with performance requirements of these specifications.
1.7
OZONE DEPLETING SUBSTANCES
A.
1.8
No ozone depleting substances (refrigerants or any other compounds) shall be used in
any capacity on this project.
LEAD BASE PAINT
A.
1.9
No paint with a lead content of 0.06 percent or greater shall be used in any capacity on
this project.
CLEANING AND DEBRIS CONTROL
A.
During the term of this Contract, the Contractor shall remove any materials and
equipment that are not required for the completion of the work as promptly as possible.
1.
2.
All debris shall be removed from the site and legally disposed.
The Contractor shall take particular care to eliminate any hazards created by his
operations.
B.
The Contractor is responsible for any damage caused by his debris without additional
cost to the Government.
C.
The Contractor shall maintain at all times during his work at this Project Site a strict
windblown debris control program.
1.
1.10
This program shall ensure no windblown debris or other debris from his work shall
contaminate or interfere with any access to or operation of any facility or any
parking area, road or street.
NUISANCE DUMPING AND POLLUTING ACTIVITIES
A.
Polluting, dumping, or discharging of any harmful, nuisance, or regulated materials (such
as concrete truck washout, vehicle maintenance fluids, residue from saw cutting
operations, solid waste or hazardous substances) into building drains, site drains,
streams, waterways, holding ponds or to the ground surface is not permitted.
1.
2.
Contractor shall be responsible for any and all damages resulting from dumping or
discharges.
Contractor shall conduct activities in such a fashion to avoid creating any legal
nuisance, including but not limited to, suppression of noise and dust, control of
erosion, and implementation of other measures as necessary to minimize off site
impacts of work activities.
AAFES SAFETY REGULATIONS & CODES
01090-5
B.
Fugitive dust emissions (airborne dust generated by vehicles operating on unpaved
surfaces, transfer or transport of dust producing materials, etc.) shall be controlled at the
construction site, haul routes and at staging areas.
1.
1.11
Water spraying shall be conducted as necessary to minimize fugitive dust
generation.
STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION
A.
Coordinate with Ft. Bragg DPW Environmental prior to commencement of any site work.
B.
Prior to clearing, grading or excavating, the Contractor shall notify the North Carolina
Department of Environment and Natural Resources, Division of Water Quality (DWQ) for
any additional direction.
C.
If contaminated ground water should be encountered during excavation activities
Contractor shall notify Ft. Bragg DPW Environmental immediately and provide written
notification to Contracting Officer and designated representative.
1.12
CONTAMINATED SOIL
A.
If unexpected contaminated soil is encountered while performing work, stop work
immediately, notify Ft. Bragg DPW Environmental and provide written notification to
Contracting Officer and designated representative.
B.
Do not resume work until approved by the Contracting Officer or designated
representative.
1.13
SUSPECTED HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
A.
Any suspect hazardous materials encountered during demolition or construction shall
immediately be brought to the attention of Ft. Bragg DPW Environmental and provide
written notification to Contracting Officer and designated representative.
B.
Work shall not resume until the Contracting Officer is satisfied that the materials are not
hazardous.
C.
Should suspect materials be found to be hazardous, Contractor shall immediately take
steps to contain the material, so further damage and contamination does not occur.
D.
Contractor shall then submit a proposal for removal.
1.14
OIL-FILLED OR IMPREGNATED ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
A.
Notify Base Environmental Safety Office before demolition or installation of any oil-filled
electrical equipment.
B.
All transformers and light ballasts, unless labeled “No PCBs”, shall be disposed through
the Base Hazardous Material and Waste Handling facility.
1.15
SPILL RESPONSE AND REPORTING
A.
Spills of hazardous waste, hazardous materials or non-regulated substances such as
oils, antifreeze, grease, latex paint, hydraulic fluid, etc. shall immediately be reported.
AAFES SAFETY REGULATIONS & CODES
01090-6
1.
If a spill occurs after normal working hours, or on a weekend or holiday, report
spills to the Post Fire Department.
B.
Contractor is encouraged to have a supply of absorbent pads on-site to aid in immediate
clean-up of smaller spills, such as oil, coolant or hydraulic fluid leaks from vehicles or
equipment.
C.
Spill notification placards are to be placed on the job site prior to construction.
D.
Contractor shall develop a spill plan.
E.
The format for the plan shall be approved by Ft. Bragg DPW Environmental prior to
construction.
1.16
WASTE DISPOSAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
A.
Contractor shall comply, and ensure that all subcontractors comply, with all Federal,
State, local laws, and regulations, ordinances and standards related to environmental
pollution control and abatement in effect and the specific requirements stated elsewhere
in the Contract Documents.
B.
All hazardous wastes as defined in 40 CFR, Part 261, shall be collected and disposed of
in accordance with 40 CFR, Parts 260-268.
C.
The Contractor is responsible for properly storing, marking, labeling, securing and
transporting hazardous wastes.
D.
All hazardous wastes shall be collected in contractor furnished DOT/UN approved
containers and taken to Ft. Bragg Hazardous Waste Facility, or as directed by Ft. Bragg
Environmental for disposal.
1.
2.
Call the Hazardous Waste Facility prior to transporting wastes to the facility to
coordinate delivery of the waste materials.
The Contractor shall not store hazardous waste on Post for more than 30 days.
E.
Any previously unidentified suspected hazardous materials encountered during
performance of the work of the contract shall immediately be brought to the attention of
the Contracting Officer or designated representative.
F.
All general construction wastes, other than those specifically allowed, or required, to be
disposed of on the Post shall be legally disposed at an off-base sanitary landfill.
G.
Contractor shall refer to Waste Disposal Form attached at the end of this Section.
2
PRODUCTS (Not Used)
3
EXECUTION (Not Used)
END 01090.
AAFES SAFETY REGULATIONS & CODES
01090-7
(POST OR BASE)
WASTE DISPOSAL
Contractor shall obtain all permits required by federal, state and local laws for the construction
activities involved.
Contractor shall perform all work in such a manner as to minimize the polluting of air, water or land
and shall, within reasonable limits, control noise and the disposal of solid waste materials, as well
as other pollutants.
Contractor shall ensure that all construction, repair, maintenance operations and practices and
waste disposal performed under this contract shall be in strict compliance with all applicable city,
county, state and federal environmental laws and regulations.
1.
Hazardous and Non-hazardous Waste Disposal: There are no known existing sources of
hazardous waste involved with this project. If the Contractor generates or discovers suspected
hazardous waste it shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Contracting Officer for review
and direction on how to proceed with handling and disposal.
2.
As part of the proposed implementation above and prior to on-site construction, the
Contractor shall submit for approval, a plan for storing, characterizing and disposing of hazardous
and non-hazardous waste materials resulting from the work under this contract. Waste includes,
but is not limited to, paint waste, paint equipment cleaners and used paint containers.
3.
If any waste material is dumped in unauthorized areas, the Contractor shall remove the
materials and restore the area to the condition of the adjacent undisturbed areas. Where directed
and approved by the Contracting Officer, contaminated ground shall be excavated, characterized,
stored, disposed of and replaced with suitable fill material at the expense of the Contractor.
4.
All waste disposal shall be in strict accordance with local, state and federal requirements and
regulations. Waste paint, paint equipment cleaners and used paint containers shall be disposed of
off base by the Contractor, at the Contractors’ expense. Any soil contaminated through spillage
shall be removed and disposed of in accordance with the requirements specified herein. Soil that is
required to be removed shall be replaced by similar soil approved by the Contracting Officer.
AAFES SAFETY REGULATIONS & CODES
01090-8
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01140 – PHASING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Contractor provide:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2
Coordination.
Barriers.
Temporary Utilities.
Notifications.
Schedule revisions.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
General Conditions of the Contract for Construction.
B.
Section 01010 –Summary of Work.
C.
Section 01045 – Cutting & Patching.
D.
Section 01051 – Grades, Lines & Levels.
E.
Section 01320 – Construction Progress Schedules.
F.
Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.
G.
Section 01420 – AAFES Environmental Protection.
H.
Section 01500 – Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls.
I.
Section 01510 – Temporary Utilities.
J.
Technical Sections of the Project Manual.
1.3
CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
Construction phasing shall serve as a guide in managing the construction progress.
B.
In preparing construction phasing system, scheduling of construction shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
1.4
COORDINATION
A.
Construction shall be phased and coordinated with the Contracting Officer and Store
Manager in order to keep to a minimum, any disruption of, or interference with, the
operation of the existing retail facility.
1.
2.
Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer and designated representative within 15
days of notice to proceed if any problems or conflicts concerning indicated
construction phasing are evident.
The Exchange will be in operation, throughout this contract.
a.
b.
PHASING
Contractor shall submit Contractor prepared Construction Progress Schedule in
accordance with Section 01320.
Submittal shall illustrate a detailed schedule of work utilizing the priority and
sequence of work shown on the Construction Phasing Plan.
01140-1
3.
B.
The Contractor shall keep the Contracting Officer and designated representative
advised of any anticipated changes in the work schedule in sufficient time to permit
adjustment of store operations, without adversely affecting the ability of the Exchange
to function as required.
Phasing as shown on the drawings is the required sequence.
1.
2.
The Contractor must submit the schedule, for review, to the Contracting Officer within
15 days after execution of a contract.
Items specified herein are complementary to work items shown on the drawings
schedule.
C.
Beneficial occupancy inspection of finishes only will be made at the end of each work item
to allow early access for fixture installations.
D.
All phases shall be included in the contract performance period.
1.5
BARRIERS
A.
Building areas adjacent to areas to be renovated will not be vacated by the Exchange.
B.
Temporary barriers shall be erected by the Contractor as work progresses as specified in
Section 01500, Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls.
C.
Temporary Barriers shall be construction generally in the locations and type indicated as
required.
1.
2.
3.
1.6
Dust Barriers and Opaque Dust Barriers shall be installed from floor to ceiling, or from
floor to underside of roof deck, to seal operational portions of the retail facility from
areas of construction.
Security Barriers shall be installed similarly and secured up to the bottom of roof deck
without puncturing deck or roofing materials and shall be weather-tight where
separating interior and exterior spaces.
Temporary Opaque and Security barriers exposed to customer view shall be painted
with two coats of color as indicated or required by Contracting Officer or designated
representative.
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Maintain temporary or permanent power, water and HVAC systems in areas under
construction and areas occupied by the Exchange.
B.
Provide all isolation valves and temporary ductwork used to keep system on line in occupied
areas for mechanical systems at no additional cost to AAFES including, but not limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Air-handling units.
Supply piping.
Water lines.
Sprinkler system and other similar items.
Provide all temporary modifications required to existing electrical systems to maintain these
systems in occupied areas at no additional cost to AAFES including, but not limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Power.
Lighting.
Communication.
Data.
Fire Alarm and other special electrical systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END 01140.
PHASING
01140-2
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01210 – SCHEDULE OF VALUES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES:
A.
Preparation of required documents.
B.
Submittal procedures
C.
Review procedures.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Section 01010 – Summary of Work.
Section 01220 – AAFES Progress Meetings.
Section 01230 – Progress Payments.
Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.
Section 01700 – Project Closeout.
DESCRIPTION
A.
Contractor shall submit Schedule of Values (CSV) to Architect-Engineer and Contracting
Officer for review within (15) days after notification of award of Contract.
B.
Contractor, upon request by Architect-Engineer and/or Contracting Officer, shall support any
values given with data that will substantiate value correctness.
C.
Contractor shall use approved CSV as a basis of periodical progress application for
payment.
1.4
FORM OF SUBMITTAL
A.
CSV Submittal format:
1.
2.
B.
1.5
Typewritten, on Application and Certificate for Payment (AIA Form G-702) and
Continuation Sheet for G-702 (AIA Form G-703) available from the AIA Bookstore,
911 Washington Avenue - #225, St. Louis, Missouri 6310, (314) 231-4252.
Contractor’s form, similar to the AIA Forms specified above, may be substituted as
long as all information is formatted identically to AIA format.
Contractor shall use specification index as a basis of example and format for listing and
itemizing costs of work.
PREPARING SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A.
Itemize separate line items for total installed costs.
1.
Itemize so that amounts shown for individual items do not exceed $10,000.00
wherever possible.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Break large items of work into smaller items, groups or phases to achieve
specified amounts.
Individual items of equipment may be itemized in lump sum amounts for each
piece of equipment.
Itemize demolition into separate line item or items.
Labor and materials shall be separate line items if Contractor intends to request
payment for stored materials.
List all subcontractors and supplier contracts that exceed $1,000.00.
Format to indicate separate line items for:
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
01210-1
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
Overhead and profit.
Bonds.
Insurance.
General Requirements and mobilization.
Separate line item cost for all subcontractors and any supplier whose
subcontract exceeds $1,000.00.
Separate line item cost for each section of the Project Manual.
Payment for Stored Materials will not be made unless itemized separately from Labor.
B.
Itemized separate line items shall reflect each phase or scope of Contract Work.
C.
Contractor shall prepare CSV in sequential order of accepted construction practice.
1.6
REVIEW AND SUBMITTAL
A.
If required after review by Architect-Engineer and/or Contracting Officer, revise and resubmit
Schedule of Values in accordance with initial submittal requirements.
B.
Architect-Engineer and Contracting Officer will approve final submittal.
C.
Architect-Engineer will distribute approved copies to AAFES and Contractor for use in
preparing Pay Requests.
END 01210.
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
01210-2
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01220 – AAFES PROGRESS
MEETINGS
1
GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
AAFES Progress Meetings.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 01010 – Summary of Work.
B.
Section 01310 – Project Management & Coordination.
C.
Section 01210 – Schedule of Values.
D.
Section 01230 – Progress Payments.
E.
Section 01320 – Construction Progress Schedule.
F.
Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.
G.
Section 01700 – Project Closeout.
H.
Section 01720 – Project Record Documents.
1.3
PROGRESS MEETINGS
A.
The AAFES representative shall schedule and preside at monthly progress
meetings.
B.
The AAFES representative shall make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda
with copies for participants.
C.
Location of Meetings: Construction office, or as directed in the notice.
D.
Attendance Required:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
AAFES representative (AAFES' option).
Architect-Engineer.
Contractor's project manager.
Contractor's superintendent.
Major sub-contractors and suppliers.
Agenda:
1.
Review minutes of previous meetings.
2.
Review of work progress.
3.
Field observations, problems and decisions.
4.
Identification of problems which impede planned progress.
5.
Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.
6.
Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules.
7.
Maintenance of progress schedule.
8.
Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.
9.
Coordination of projected progress.
AAFES PROGRESS MEETINGS
01220-1
10.
11.
12.
F.
Maintenance of quality and work standards.
Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.
Other business relating to work.
Meeting Minutes: AAFES designated representative or Architect-Engineer shall
record meeting minutes, and distribute copies to the participants and Contracting
Officer within five (5) business days of the meeting.
2
PRODUCTS (Not Used)
3
EXECUTION (Not Used)
END 01220.
AAFES PROGRESS MEETINGS
01220-2
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01230 – PROGRESS PAYMENTS
1
GENERAL
1.1
COST BREAKDOWN
A.
After the Notice to Proceed is issued, the Contractor shall be required to provide a
breakdown of work as indicated in Section 01210, Schedule of Values.
B.
Each item of work must also indicate the subcontractor who will perform this work.
1.2
PREPARATION OF PAY REQUEST
A.
Upon execution of the Notice to Proceed and prior to scheduling the first
Progress/Pay Meeting the Contractor shall prepare and submit a Schedule of Values
(CSV) to the Architect-Engineer and Contracting Officer for review and approval in
accord with requirements of Section 01210.
1.
2.
B.
The CSV shall be submitted in typewritten form on Application and Certificate
for Payment (AIA Form G-702) and Continuation sheets for G-702 (AIA Form
G-703).
Contractor shall use Specification Table of Contents as a basis of example and
format for listing and itemizing costs of work.
Itemize separate line items for total installed costs.
1.
Itemize so that amounts shown for individual items do not exceed specified
maximum amount indicated.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Format to indicate separate line items for:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
Break large items of work into smaller items, groups or phases to achieve
specified amounts.
Individual items of equipment may be itemized in lump sum amounts for
each piece of equipment.
Itemize demolition into separate line item or items.
Labor and materials shall be separate line items if Contractor intends to
request payment for stored materials.
Overhead and profit.
Bonds.
Insurance.
General requirements and mobilization.
Separate line item cost for all subcontractors and any supplier whose
subcontract exceeds limits set forth.
Separate line item cost for each section of the Project Manual.
Payment for Stored Materials will not be made unless itemized separately from
Labor.
C.
Itemized separate line items shall reflect each phase or scope of Contract Work.
D.
Contractor shall prepare Schedule of Values in sequential order of accepted
construction practice.
PROGRESS PAYMENTS
01230-1
1.3
APPLICATION FOR PAYMENTS
A.
Format and Data Required:
1.
2.
B.
Submit pencil copy applications to Architect-Engineer for review at least 4-days
in advance of scheduled Progress/Pay Meeting.
Applications shall be itemized on forms and in format required for CSV with
values broken down as specified above.
Preparation of Pencil Copy Application for Each Progress Payment:
1.
Application form:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Fill in required information, including that for change orders executed prior
to date of submittal of application.
Fill in summary of dollar values to agree with respective totals indicated
on continuation sheets.
Execute certification with signature of a responsible officer of contracting
firm.
Continuation sheets:
a.
b.
Fill in total list of all scheduled component items of work, with item
number and scheduled dollar value for each item.
Fill in dollar value in each column for each scheduled line item when work
has been performed or products stored.
1.)
c.
Round off values to nearest dollar, or as specified for Schedule of
Values.
List each change order executed prior to date of submission at end of
continuation sheets.
1.)
3.
Architect-Engineer will use pencil copy of application for payment as a basis
for evaluating completed work upon arrival to Site for monthly scheduled
Progress/Pay Meetings.
a.
b.
C.
List by change order number and description the same as for an
original component item of work.
Architect-Engineer will review progress of work with Contractor’s on-site
Superintendent and make any changes in amounts requested.
The Architect-Engineer will present reviewed and initialed pencil copy of
pay request to Contractor at Progress/Pay Meeting for formal preparation
and presentation to Contracting Officer for payment.
Preparation of Formal Application for Each Progress Payment:
1.
2.
The Contractor shall prepare formal typewritten copy of application for
payment, edited as determined and agreed to on initialed pencil copy at the
Progress/Pay Meeting.
Submit one (1) signed/notarized copy to Architect-Engineer via e-mail for
formal approval, signature and presentation to the Contracting Officer.
a.
b.
3.
Architect-Engineer will forward approved, signed application to
Contracting Officer via e-mail within two (2) days of receipt from
Contractor.
Upon acceptance of e-mailed application, payment to Contractor will be
processed by AAFES subject to General Provisions of the Contract.
Submit one (1) additional hard copy to Architect-Engineer for formal approval
and transmittal to Contracting Officer.
PROGRESS PAYMENTS
01230-2
a.
b.
c.
Attach current Construction Photos per requirements of Section 01010.
Attach revised Progress Schedule per requirements of Section 01310.
Attach Summary Report of progress since last request for payment and
anticipated progress until next request for payment.
D.
Each request for payment shall be accompanied by the certification contained in
Exhibit A, Clause 45b(2)(b) with Invoice number included.
E.
If requested by AAFES, Contractor shall submit receipts or other vouchers showing
his payments for material and labor, including payments to subcontractors.
1.4
STORED MATERIAL OR EQUIPMENT NOT INCORPORATED IN THE WORK
A.
Progress Payments will be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in the
Work provided that:
1.
Such materials and equipment have been delivered to and suitably stored at
site or some other location approved in writing by the Contracting Officer.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
Provide list of stored materials for which payment is being requested for
Contracting Officer and designated representative.
Store in like lots for ease of inventory by Contracting Officer or designated
representative
All materials stored off-site shall be marked or tagged with identification of
project to which they are assigned and shall be accessible for inspection.
Contractor submits evidence of title to such materials and equipment in the
form of detailed receipts to Contracting Officer.
Care and custody of such materials and equipment and all costs incurred for
movement and storage shall be responsibility of Contractor.
B.
Contractor shall submit a Certificate of Insurance showing AAFES as an additional
insured and showing amount of insurance coverage for the stored items or suitable
proof that material and equipment are stored in a Bonded Warehouse.
C.
Payment for stored materials will be subject to all conditions and approval of
Contracting Officer.
1.5
PAYMENTS WITHHELD
A.
The Contracting Officer may withhold or, on account of subsequently discovered
evidence, nullify the whole or a part of any payment to such extent as may be
necessary to protect AAFES from loss on account of:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Defective work not remedied.
Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims.
Failure of the GC to make payments properly to subcontractors or for materials
or labor.
A reasonable doubt that the contract can be completed for the balance then
unpaid.
Damage to another Contractor or to some third party.
Failure to maintain milestones in accordance with the approved construction
progress schedule specified in Section 01310, Construction Progress
Schedules.
Failure to supply enough skilled workmen or proper materials.
END 01230.
PROGRESS PAYMENTS
01230-3
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01310 – PROJECT MANAGEMENT &
COORDINATION
1
GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Request For Information (RFI’s).
B.
Pre-construction Meeting.
C.
Pre-installation Conferences.
D.
Other Coordination Meetings applicable to work at any given time.
1.2
REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)
A.
RFI Forms: Software-generated form acceptable to Architect-Engineer and AAFES
Project Manager.
B.
Architect-Engineer's Action: Allow seven working days for Architect-Engineer's response
for each RFI.
C.
RFI Log:
1.
2.
1.3
Maintain a tabular log of RFIs.
Submit log weekly.
PROJECT WEB SITE AND ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATIONS
A.
Use AAFES’ Project Web site for project communication and documentation upon
direction of the AAFES Contracting Officer.
1.
2.
Project Web site software package shall be Autodesk, Constructware.
AAFES to provide site user licenses for use by Contractor, Subcontractors,
Architect-Engineer and Architect-Engineer's consultants.
B.
Normal day-to-day communications shall be handled via e-mail.
C.
Shop Drawings, Product Data and Submittals shall be submitted for A-E review and
return to Contractor via A-E ftp site.
1.
1.4
Request ftp site address and log-in credentials from A-E immediately after AAFES
NTP.
PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
A.
The Contracting Officer will schedule and preside at Pre-construction meeting.
B.
Attendance Required:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Contracting Officer, Project Manager and other AAFES HQ representatives.
Local and regional AAFES representatives.
Architect-Engineer
Installation representatives (Engineering, Fire Chief, Security, Environmental, etc.)
Contractor
Major Sub-contractors
PROJECT MANAGEMENT &
COORDINATION
01310-1
C.
Agenda:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Execution of Notice to Proceed.
Distribution of Contract Documents.
Submission of list of sub-contractors.
Review of AAFES checklist of contract requirements.
Discussion of Contractor’s Schedule of Values.
Discussion of Construction Schedule.
Discussion of critical sequencing.
Designation of responsible personnel.
Processing of field decisions and change orders.
Submission of applications for payment.
Submittal of shop drawings.
Procedures for maintaining record documents.
Fire, safety and spill procedures.
Security procedures.
Accident prevention and reports.
Housekeeping procedures.
Use of premises
a.
b.
18.
19.
D.
1.5
Office and storage locations.
Personnel parking.
Major equipment deliveries.
Other issues pertinent to completing the contract.
Meeting minutes: Minutes will be taken by the A/E and distributed to AAFES,
Contractor, and Installation Engineer.
PROJECT MEETINGS
A.
The Contractor shall schedule and preside at other project meetings when required.
B.
Pre-installation Conferences: Conduct a Pre-installation conference at Project Site
before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1.
Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators
involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with
other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend
the meeting.
a.
2.
Advise Contracting Officer and designated representative of scheduled
meeting dates.
Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for
the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Contract Documents.
Options.
Related RFIs.
Related Change Orders.
Purchases.
Deliveries.
Submittals.
Review of mockups.
PROGRESS MANAGEMENT &
COORDINATION
01310-2
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
y.
3.
4.
5.
Record: Significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements,
including required corrective measures and actions.
Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to
other parties requiring information.
Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully
concluded.
a.
C.
Possible conflicts.
Compatibility requirements.
Time schedules.
Weather limitations.
Manufacturer's written instructions.
Warranty requirements.
Compatibility of materials.
Acceptability of substrates.
Temporary facilities and controls.
Space and access limitations.
Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
Testing and inspecting requirements.
Installation procedures.
Coordination with other work.
Required performance results.
Protection of adjacent work.
Protection of construction and personnel.
Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to
performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest
feasible date.
Coordination Meetings: At weekly intervals, in addition to specific meetings held for
other purposes, conduct Project Coordination Meetings to resolve routine issues.
END 01310.
PROGRESS MANAGEMENT &
COORDINATION
01310-3
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01320 – CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS
SCHEDULES
1
GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Format.
B.
Content.
C.
Revisions to schedules.
D.
Submittals.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 01000 – Requirements of Ft. Bragg.
B.
Section 01010 – Summary of Work.
C.
Section 01210 – Schedule of Values.
D.
Section 01230 – Progress Payments.
E.
Section 01310 – Project Management & Coordination.
F.
Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.
1.3
SCOPE
A.
Exhibit "A" - General Provisions of the AAFES Contract for Construction, Article entitled:
"Schedule and Progress"
B.
The Contractor prepared scheduling progress chart system shall serve as a guide in
managing the construction progress and scheduling.
1.4
GENERAL
A.
The scheduling progress chart system shall be prepared by the Contractor and shall
consist of a Critical Path bar chart as described in this section.
B.
In preparing this system, the scheduling of construction shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor and shall be developed in accordance with construction phasing shown on
the construction drawings where applicable.
C.
The requirement for the system is included to assure adequate planning and execution
of the work and to assist the Contracting Officer in appraising the reasonableness of the
proposed schedule and evaluating progress of the work.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit a preliminary scheduling progress chart to the Contracting Officer or designated
representative defining the Contractor's proposed operations for the first thirty (30) of the
contract within ten (10) days after date of Notice to Proceed.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES
01320-1
1.
2.
Indicate the Contractor's general approach for the balance of the project.
Include the cost of the activities expected to be completed or partially completed
before submission and approval of the complete progress schedule.
B.
Upon approval of the preliminary scheduling progress chart by the Contracting Officer or
designated representative, and within thirty (30) calendar days after the Notice to
Proceed, the Contractor shall submit the complete progress chart with copy to the
Architect-Engineer.
C.
Contractor shall also submit a narrative report with the updated bar chart, including a
description of problem areas (current and anticipated) delaying factors and their impact,
and an explanation of corrective actions taken or proposed.
D.
Submit the number of opaque reproductions that Contractor requires plus four (4) copies
that will be retained by Contracting Officer and one (1) copy to be retained by the
Architect-Engineer.
1.6
REVISIONS TO SCHEDULES
A.
Submit revised progress chart system with each monthly Application for Payment.
1.
2.
Copy of the complete bar chart with the current activity progress clearly indicated.
Current cost of each activity completed and each partially completed shall be
updated and included.
B.
Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal and revised projected completion
date of each activity.
C.
Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope and other
identifiable changes that could affect the overall schedule.
D.
Provide revised narrative report with each submittal describing work accomplished
during the previous period, the work scheduled for the next period, anticipated problem
areas and delays and impact on the Schedule.
E.
Report corrective action taken or proposed.
1.7
PROGRESS CHART SYSTEM
A.
The system consists of keeping a record of the time allotted for each activity and the
actual progress of the activity.
B.
Activities shall be listed vertically and shall include the units of work required for the
project.
1.
2.
C.
All activities of AAFES, which affect progress and Contract required dates for
completion shall be shown.
Include activities for AAFES FURNISHED/AAFES INSTALLED and AAFES
FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED ITEMS.
The selection and number of activities shall be subject to the Contracting Officer's
approval.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES
01320-2
1.8
FORMAT
A.
Prepare schedules as a horizontal bar chart with separate bar for each major portion of
Work or operation, identifying first workday of each week.
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.9
A scale of time, from date of the beginning of the contract work to the date of
completion of the contract work, shall be indicated horizontally on the chart.
The units of time indicated shall be days.
Indicate time allotted for each major activity, the actual progress of the activity and
the time spent to date or to the finish of the activity.
The format shall be such to enable the Contracting Officer or designated representative
to evaluate the reasonableness of the proposed schedule and to determine if the actual
construction is on schedule.
CONTENT
A.
Show complete sequence of construction by activity with dates for beginning and
completion of each element of construction.
B.
Identify each item by specification section number.
C.
Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item and total percentage of Work
completed as of the first day of each month.
D.
Indicate delivery dates for AAFES furnished products.
1.10
DISTRIBUTION
A.
Distribute copies of reviewed schedules to project site file, subcontractors, suppliers and
other concerned parties.
B.
Instruct recipients to promptly report in writing, problems anticipated by projections
indicated in schedules.
2
PRODUCTS (Not Used)
3
EXECUTION (Not Used)
END 01320.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES
01320-3
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01331 – AAFES WEATHER TABLE
1
GENERAL
1.1
INFORMATION AND DATA
A.
Information and data furnished or referred to in the weather table is furnished for the
Contractor's information.
B.
The Contractor is responsible for submitting a written request for time extension under
this specification Section.
1.
2.
1.2
The Contractor request shall include backup justification for each written request
for time extension.
Any time extension granted under this specification Section shall be at no cost to
AAFES.
CONTRACT TIME LIMITS
A.
The contract time limits include weather conditions that are shown in the table listed
herein.
1.3
TIME EXTENSIONS FOR UNUSUALLY SEVERE WEATHER
A.
This provision specifies the procedure for the determination of time extensions for
unusually severe weather affecting exterior work in accordance with the Contract.
B.
The following listing defines the monthly anticipated adverse weather for the contract
period and is based on NOAA data for the geographic location of the project.
MONTHLY ANTICIPATED ADVERSE WEATHER CALENDAR DAYS
Ft. Bragg – Fayetteville, North Carolina (Cumberland County)
JAN
FEB
MAR
APR
MAY
JUN
JUL
AUG
SEPT
OCT
NOV
DEC
01
04
03
05
04
03
05
06
01
02
01
05
C.
This listing of anticipated adverse weather will constitute the base line monthly weather
time evaluations.
1.
Throughout the contract each month, actual adverse weather days will be
recorded on a calendar basis (including weekends and holidays) and compared to
the monthly anticipated adverse weather in this listing.
a.
b.
2.
3.
The term "actual adverse weather days" shall include days impacted by
actual adverse weather.
The number of actual adverse weather days affecting exterior work shall be
calculated chronologically from the first to the last day in each month.
Adverse weather days must prevent work for 50 percent or more of the
contractor's work day and delay work critical to the timely completion of the
project.
If the number of actual adverse weather days exceeds the number of days
anticipated in the above listing, then the Contracting Officer will determine the time
extension for the Contractor.
AAFES WEATHER TABLE
01331-1
4.
The Contracting Officer will convert any qualifying delays to calendar days and
issue a modification in accordance with the contract.
2
PRODUCTS (Not Used)
3
EXECUTION (Not Used)
END 01331.
AAFES WEATHER TABLE
01331-2
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01340 – SHOP DRAWINGS,
PRODUCT DATA & SUBMITTALS
1
GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Submittal procedures.
B.
Construction progress schedules.
C.
Shop Drawings.
D.
Samples.
E.
Product Data.
F.
Certificates.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 01000 – Requirements of Ft. Bragg.
B.
Section 01010 – Summary of Work.
C.
Section 01018 – AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed Equipment.
D.
Section 01060 – AAFES Safety Policies & Procedures.
E.
Section 01210 – Schedule of Values.
F.
Section 01320 – Construction Progress Schedules.
G.
Section 01420 – AAFES Environmental Protection.
H.
Section 01700 – Project Closeout.
I.
Technical Sections of the Specifications.
1.3
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A.
Transmit each submittal with AAFES Form 4450-048 as provided by AAFES or
equivalent Contractor generated transmittal form in same format.
B.
Sequentially number the transmittal form.
C.
Revise submittals with original number and a sequential alphabetic suffix.
D.
Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail
number, and specification section number, as appropriate.
SHOP DRAWINGS,
PRODUCT DATA & SUBMITTALS
01340-1
E.
Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification
of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of
information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract
Documents.
1.
Stamp Text shall be as follows:
a.
2.
F.
Transmit submittals to Contracting Officer and Architect-Engineer.
Coordinate submission of related items.
Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may
be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.
1.
2.
3.
H.
A-E nor his Consultants will review Shop Drawings, Product Data or Submittals
unless Contractor’s stamp is affixed to documents submitted, signed and dated.
Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and in accordance with the List of Required
Submittals in this Section.
1.
2.
G.
By approving and submitting these Shop Drawings, Product Data and
Submittals, we represent that we have determined and verified all materials,
field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do
so, and that we have checked and coordinated information contained within
submittal with requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.
CONTRACTOR
DATE
BY
Failure to identify such variations will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility
for completing the work in full accordance with the Contract Documents.
Review/approval by the Contracting Officer does not relieve Contractor of the
responsibility for completing work in full accordance with the Contract Documents.
Review by the Architect-Engineer does not relieve Contractor of the responsibility
for completing work in full compliance with the Contract Documents.
Prior to approval of the material/product submitted:
1.
2.
Contractor shall include with the submittal a written certification that the
material/product contains no asbestos.
This certificate is mandatory before review will be made and/or Contracting Officer
approval issued.
I.
Provide space for Contractor, Contracting Officer and Architect-Engineer review stamps.
J.
When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission.
K.
Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate.
L.
Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements.
1.4
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES
A.
Submit preliminary Scheduling Progress Chart within ten (10) days of the Notice to
Proceed.
B.
Submit complete (final) Scheduling Progress Chart within thirty (30) days of the Notice to
Proceed.
C.
Submit monthly revisions of Scheduling Progress Chart.
D.
Submit monthly revised narrative reports.
SHOP DRAWINGS,
PRODUCT DATA & SUBMITTALS
01340-2
E.
1.5
Refer to Section 01320 - Construction Progress Schedule, for submittal information.
SHOP DRAWINGS
A.
Shop Drawings For Review:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Shop Drawings For Project Close-out:
1.
2.
C.
Submitted for AAFES's benefit during and after project completion.
Retain two (2) reviewed/approved sets of each Shop Drawing and Product
Data sheet for submittal to AAFES at Project Close-out as part of O & M
Manuals per Section 01700.
Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and
location of utility outlets for service and for functional equipment and appliances.
1.
1.6
Submitted to Contracting Officer for review for the limited purpose of checking for
conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the
contract documents.
Shop drawings shall be prepared by a qualified detailer.
Minimum sheet size for shop drawings shall be 8 1/2" x 11".
After review, distribute copies in accordance with Submittal Procedures above and
for record documents purposes described in Section 01700 - Project Closeout.
Submit the number of opaque reproductions that Contractor requires, plus two for
O & M Manuals, plus two (three on civil, structural, mechanical, and electrical
submittals) copies that will be retained by Architect-Engineer.
SAMPLES
A.
Samples For Review:
1.
2.
B.
Samples For Information:
1.
C.
Submit to Architect-Engineer for review for the limited purpose of checking for
conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the
contract documents.
After review, produce duplicates and distribute in accordance with Submittal
Procedures article above and for record documents purposes described in Section
01700, Project Closeout.
Submit for the Architect-Engineer’s review and Contracting Officer's knowledge as
project administrator or for AAFES.
Samples For Selection:
1.
2.
3.
Submit to Architect-Engineer for aesthetic, color, or finish selection.
Submit samples of finishes from the full range of manufacturers' standard colors,
or in custom colors (if so stated in the product specification section), textures, and
patterns for Architect-Engineer selection and Contracting Officer’s approval.
After review, distribute in accordance with Submittal Procedures article above and
for record documents purposes described in Section 01700, Project Closeout.
D.
Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the Product, with
integral parts and attachment devices.
E.
Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.
F.
Include identification on each sample, with full Project information.
SHOP DRAWINGS,
PRODUCT DATA & SUBMITTALS
01340-3
G.
Submit the number of samples specified in individual specification Sections; two of which
will be retained by the Contracting Officer or designated representative.
H.
Reviewed samples that may be used in the work are indicated in individual specification
Sections.
I.
Coordinate sample submittals with respective shop drawings.
1.7
PRODUCT DATA
A.
Submit Manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules, performance
charts, specifications, illustrations, and other descriptive data.
B.
Product data that relates to shop drawings or samples must be submitted with the
respective shop drawings or samples.
1.8
CERTIFICATES
A.
When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the
manufacturer, installation/application subcontractor or the Contractor to ArchitectEngineer in quantities specified for Product Data.
B.
Certify that material or Product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements.
C.
Submit supporting reference data, test results, affidavits, and/or certifications as
appropriate.
D.
Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be
acceptable to Architect/Engineer.
1.9
SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A.
General Construction: (Provide copy of * designated submittals to Ft. Bragg
Environmental Division for review.)
1.
Section 01000, Requirements of Ft. Bragg:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Section 01045, Cutting & Patching:
a.
b.
3.
Schedules.
Documentation.
Section 01060, AAFES Safety Policies & Procedures:
a.
b.
c.
4.
Drawings.
Forms.
Permits.
Documentation.
Schedules.
Documentation.
Hazard, Health/Safety, Response Plans.
Section 01210, Schedule of Values:
a.
b.
Schedules.
Documentation.
SHOP DRAWINGS,
PRODUCT DATA & SUBMITTALS
01340-4
5.
Section 01310 Project Management & Coordination:
a.
b.
6.
Section 01320, Construction Progress Schedule:
a.
b.
c.
d.
7.
Schedules.
Documentation.
Section 01650, Systems Start-up:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
14.
Product Data.
Shop Drawings.
Section 01620, Storage & Protection:
a.
b.
13.
Shop Drawings.
Narrative Report.
Documentation.
Section 01580, Project Identification & Signs:
a.
b.
12.
Notifications.
Schedules.
Test Reports.
Section 01500, Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls:
a.
b.
c.
11.
Notifications.
Schedules.
Test Reports.
Section 01410, Testing Laboratory Services:
a.
b.
c.
10.
Schedules.
Shop Drawings.
Product Data.
Samples.
Section 01400, Quality Control:
a.
b.
c.
9.
Preliminary Schedule.
Complete Schedule.
Revised Schedules.
Revised Narrative Reports.
Section 01340, Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals:
a.
b.
c.
d.
8.
Schedules.
Documentation.
Notifications.
Schedules.
Attendance Records.
Reports.
CD/DVDs.
Section 01700, Project Closeout:
a. Project Record Documents.
b. Operation & Maintenance Manuals.
c.
Approved Shop Drawings, Bound.
d. Warranties.
e. End user agreement(s) and software license(s) where applicable.
SHOP DRAWINGS,
PRODUCT DATA & SUBMITTALS
01340-5
f.
g.
15.
Section 01710, Cleaning:
a.
b.
16.
Test Reports.
Certifications.
Shop Drawings.
Samples.
Section 06400, Architectural Woodwork:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
23.
Test Reports.
Certifications.
Product Data.
Section 06200, Finish Carpentry:
a.
b.
c.
d.
22.
Installer Certifications.
Applicator Certifications.
Product Data.
Samples.
Test Reports.
Maintenance Manual.
Section 06100, Rough Carpentry:
a.
b.
c.
21.
Installer Certifications.
Shop Drawings.
Product Data.
Section 03356, Polished Concrete Floor Finish:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
20.
Schedules.
Section 03354, Interior Concrete Slab Repair & Joint Filler Replacement
a.
b.
c.
19.
* As-built Drawings.
As-built Specifications.
CDs.
Section 02070, Selective Demolition:
a.
18.
Instructions.
Product Data.
Section 01720, Project Record Documents:
a.
b.
c.
17.
DD Form 1354 Quantities and Cost Information.
Other Closeout Submittals.
Test Reports.
Certifications.
Shop Drawings.
Product Data.
Samples.
Section 07270, Firestopping:
a.
b.
c.
Certifications.
Product Data.
Assembly Drawings.
SHOP DRAWINGS,
PRODUCT DATA & SUBMITTALS
01340-6
24.
Section 07920, Building Joint Sealers:
a.
b.
c.
25.
Section 08100, Metal Doors & Frames:
a.
b.
c.
d.
26.
Certifications.
Product Data.
Samples.
Section 09900, Painting:
a.
b.
c.
d.
33.
Certifications.
Product Data.
Samples.
Section 09650, Resilient Tile Flooring:
a.
b.
c.
32.
Certifications.
Instructions.
Product Data.
Section 09510, Acoustical Panel Ceilings:
a.
b.
c.
31.
Test Reports.
Certifications.
Instructions.
Product Data.
Section 09250, Gypsum Drywall Systems:
a.
b.
c.
30.
Templates.
Documentation.
Section 08800, Glass & Glazing:
a.
b.
c.
d.
29.
Templates.
Documentation.
Section 08710, Finish Hardware:
a.
b.
28.
Schedules.
Shop Drawings.
Product Data.
Calculations.
Section 08211, Wood Doors:
a.
b.
27.
Product Data.
Samples.
Documentation.
Instructions.
Certifications.
Product Data.
Samples.
Section 10265, Wall Surface Protection Systems:
a.
b.
c.
Shop Drawings.
Product Data.
Samples.
SHOP DRAWINGS,
PRODUCT DATA & SUBMITTALS
01340-7
34.
Section 10522, Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets & Accessories:
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
Special Construction:
1.
Section 13915, Wet Pipe Sprinkler System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
C.
Certifications.
Shop Drawings.
Product Data.
Hydraulic Calculations.
Test Reports.
Mechanical Construction:
1.
Section 15050, Basic Materials and Methods:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
Certifications.
Shop Drawings.
Product Data.
Section 15890, Ductwork:
a.
b.
c.
Shop Drawings.
Product Data.
Test Reports.
Section 15940, Air Outlets & Inlets:
a.
D.
Instructions.
Certifications.
Shop Drawings.
Product Data.
Product Data.
Electrical Construction:
1.
Section 16060, Electrical Demolition for Remodeling:
a.
2.
Section 16111, Conduit:
a.
3.
Product Data.
Section 16170, Grounding and Bonding:
a.
b.
7.
Product Data.
Section 16141, Wiring Devices:
a.
6.
Product Data.
Manufacturer’s instructions.
Section 16130, Boxes:
a.
5.
Product Data.
Section 16123, Building Wire and Cable:
a.
b.
4.
Schedules.
Product Data.
Manufacturer’s instructions.
Section 16190, Supporting Devices:
SHOP DRAWINGS,
PRODUCT DATA & SUBMITTALS
01340-8
a.
a.
8.
Section 16195, Electrical Identification:
a.
9.
Shop Drawings.
Manufacturer’s instructions.
Section 16510, Interior Luminaires:
a.
b.
c.
13.
Shop Drawings.
Manufacturer’s instructions.
Section 16470, Panelboards:
a.
b.
12.
Shop Drawings.
Maintenance Instructions.
Section 16470, Dry Type Transformers:
a.
b.
11.
Product Data.
Section 16441, Enclosed Switches:
a.
b.
10.
Product Data.
Manufacturer’s instructions.
Shop Drawings.
Product Data.
Manufacturer’s instructions.
Section 16950, Testing:
a.
Test results.
2
PRODUCTS (Not Used)
3
EXECUTION (Not Used)
END 01340.
SHOP DRAWINGS,
PRODUCT DATA & SUBMITTALS
01340-9
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01400 – QUALITY CONTROL
1
GENERAL
1.1
CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE
A.
Contractor shall establish a quality control system to perform sufficient inspection and
tests of all items of work, including that of subcontractor(s), to ensure conformation to
applicable specifications and drawings with respect to the materials, workmanship,
construction, finish and functional performance.
1.
2.
Tests of materials and/or special inspections will be made, when required by these
specifications, by applicable law, rules and regulations in accordance with
respective Sections of the specifications.
Where required by individual specification Sections, the Contractor shall employ
and pay for the services of an independent testing agency, licensed in the State of
North Carolina, to perform specific services and testing.
a.
b.
Examples of professional testing services that shall be provided by the
Contractor include tests during the manufacturing and fabrication processes
that are not performed in the field, but required to assure quality control.
Examples of professional testing services that shall be provided by the
Contractor include field tests during construction to assure quality control.
B.
Contractor shall arrange and pay for all services and testing as specified unless
otherwise specifically indicated to be provided by AAFES.
C.
Testing agencies and tests to be performed shall be approved by AAFES.
D.
If a material is not required to be field tested, the Contracting Officer may require the
supplier to furnish a certificate bearing legal signature of said supplier with each delivery
of such material stating that such material complies with specification requirements.
E.
If any work or materials requiring tests and inspections is executed, enclosed or covered
before tests are made, or test reports distributed, whether the responsibility of the
Contractor or AAFES:
1.
2.
F.
The Contractors testing agency(ies) shall report results of all tests in writing via e-mail
transmittal simultaneously to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
G.
Contractor shall, at his own expense, uncover such part of this work or material
and keep it uncovered until such tests and inspections have been made and test
reports distributed.
If work or material so tested and inspected shall be found not to conform to the
requirements of the Construction Documents, it shall be deemed and construed to
be defective materials or faulty workmanship and the Contractor, at his own
expense, shall replace work or material removed and repair all work disturbed
thereby.
Contracting Officer
Ft. Bragg DPW
Contractor
Architect-Engineer
Reports shall state that tests were made under responsible charge of a Testing
Engineer, holding a license to operate in the state where the project is being
constructed, and that material or materials were tested in accordance with provisions of
these specifications, and that material and/or materials tested, passed or failed to pass
such requirements.
QUALITY CONTROL
01400-1
1.2
CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY
A.
Provide notification to testing agencies and/or testing laboratory and coordinate services
with Construction Schedule, whether provided by Contractor or AAFES.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Notify laboratory sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for its assignment of
personnel and scheduling of tests.
Make arrangements with testing agency for on site inspection services in
conjunction with Construction Schedule.
All costs for ill-timed scheduling of testing agency on-site services shall be borne
by the Contractor.
Cooperate with the Contracting Officer or designated representative and laboratory
personnel and provide access to work and to manufacturer’s operations.
1.
2.
Provide samples of materials to be tested, in required quantities.
Furnish casual labor and facilities required to provide access to work to be tested:
a.
b.
c.
To obtain and handle samples at the site.
To facilitate inspections and tests.
For laboratory’s exclusive use for storage and curing of test samples.
C.
The use of AAFES’s or Contractor's independent testing services, where indicated, shall
in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to furnish materials and construction
in full compliance with the plans and specifications.
D.
Contractor shall coordinate with both AAFES and his own testing laboratories so that the
work will be inspected and tested according to contract requirements including:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Upon completion of the project the Contractor shall submit signed certificates stating
tests for this work were made in accordance with provisions of these specifications.
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Notification of when tests should be taken.
Easy access to the work.
General cooperation in every way to insure proper control of the work.
Certify that all such tests and reports made were reported as required.
These certificates shall list all tests and dates when work was completed.
Submit copies of these certificates bound in the O & M Manuals at Project
Closeout in conjunction with requirements set forth in Section 01700.
CONTRACTOR’S TESTING RESPONSIBILITY
A.
Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an Independent Testing Agency to
perform specified quality control testing during construction including, but not limited to,
those indicated in the following Sections:
1.
B.
Contractor shall, with own forces, provide testing and quality control for other materials
and systems as required by Sections of the Project Manual or by the Installation at no
additional cost to the Government including, but not limited to:
1.
2.
C.
Testing and Balancing of HVAC Equipment and Systems: Section 15993, Air
Systems Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
Electrical testing.
Incidental testing required by the Installation including system testing required by
the Installation Fire Department.
Employment of Independent Testing Agency in no way relieves Contractor of his
responsibilities to deliver Project in full compliance with the Contract Documents.
QUALITY CONTROL
01400-2
1.4
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.
B.
Section 01410 – Testing Laboratory Services.
C.
Section 01700 – Systems Start-up.
D.
Section 01710 – Project Closeout.
E.
Related requirements and tests specified in Technical Sections of Divisions 2 through
16.
2
PRODUCTS (Not Used)
3
EXECUTION (Not Used)
END 01400.
QUALITY CONTROL
01400-3
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01410 – TESTING LABORATORY
SERVICES
1
GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Selection and payment.
B.
Laboratory/Agency responsibilities.
C.
Laboratory/Agency reports.
D.
Limits on testing authority.
E.
Contractor responsibilities.
F.
Schedule of tests.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 01000 – Requirements of Ft. Bragg
B.
Section 01400 – Quality Control.
C.
Section 15993 – Air Systems Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
1.3
SELECTION AND PAYMENT
A.
Subject to approval by AAFES, Contractor shall select, employ and pay for services of an
independent testing agency or laboratory to perform testing as specified in the individual
Sections listed in Article 1.2 above.
B.
Contractor shall provide testing and quality control for systems including, but not limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Contractor shall be responsible for the testing, documentation and certification of the
structural integrity of new cooperage canopy components.
Contractor shall be responsible for the testing, documentation and certification of
pressure tests for piping systems.
Contractor shall be responsible for the testing, adjusting, balancing and
documentation of the building air systems.
Contractor shall be responsible for the documentation and certification of testing for
Special Electrical Construction including, but not limited to:
a.
b.
5.
C.
1.4
Fire alarm system.
Intrusion detection system.
Contractor shall be responsible for the testing, documentation and certification of all
electrical systems.
Employment of testing agency or laboratory in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to
perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
LABORATORY/AGENCY RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor.
B.
Provide qualified personnel at site.
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
01410-1
C.
Cooperate with Contracting Officer or designated representative and Contractor in
performance of services.
D.
Perform specified sampling and testing of Products in accordance with specified standards.
E.
Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.
F.
Promptly notify Contracting Officer or designated representative and Contractor of observed
irregularities or non-conformance of Work or Products.
G.
Perform additional tests required by Contracting Officer or designated representative.
H.
Submit e-mail or server based written test reports within 3-days after test is performed to the
following parties:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
I.
Each report shall include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
J.
1.5
Contracting Officer.
Ft. Bragg DPW.
Contractor.
Architect.
Consulting Engineer where Applicable.
Date issued.
Project title and number.
Testing Laboratory name, address and telephone number.
Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
Date and time of sampling or inspection.
Record of temperature.
Date of test.
Identification of product and specification section.
Location of sample or test in the project.
Type of inspection or test.
Results of tests and compliance with Contract Documents.
Interpretation of test results.
Upon completion of the project, the testing agency shall prepare a certificate, certified in the
presence of a Notary Public, stating testing for this work was conducted in accordance with
the provisions of these specifications, and further, all tests and reports were provided for
this job were reported as required.
LIMITS ON TESTING AUTHORITY
A.
Agency or laboratory may not release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract
Documents.
B.
Agency or laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.
C.
Agency or laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor.
D.
Agency or laboratory has no authority to stop the Work.
1.6
CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
Deliver to agency or laboratory at designated location, adequate samples of materials
proposed to be used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs.
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
01410-2
B.
Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work.
C.
Provide incidental labor and facilities:
1.
2.
3.
4.
To provide access to Work to be tested.
To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested.
To facilitate tests.
To provide storage and curing of test samples.
D.
Notify Contracting Officer, designated representative and field testing agency laboratory 24
hours prior to time for operations requiring testing services.
E.
Employ services of an independent testing laboratory, licensed in the State of North
Carolina, and pay for additional samples and tests required by Contractor beyond specified
requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
For Contractor's convenience.
When initial tests indicate work does not comply with contract documents.
When, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer or designated representative,
additional tests or inspections are required because of the manner in which the
Contractor executes his work, provide and pay for additional testing.
Examples of such tests and inspections are:
a.
b.
c.
5.
1.7
Tests of materials substituted for previously approved or specified materials.
Retests made necessary by failure of materials to comply the requirements of
the specifications.
Load tests made necessary because portions of the structure do not meet
specifications or drawings requirements.
Testing specified in Section 01400, Quality Control and other Sections of the Project
Manual that are identified to be provided by the Contractor.
SCHEDULE OF TESTS
A.
Test required and standards for testing are specified in the individual specification Sections .
B.
Inspection, sampling and testing is required to be performed by professional engineers,
licensed int he State in which this Project is constructed, for the following individual
components or systems of Work as arranged, coordinated and paid for by Contractor:
1.
C.
Testing and balancing of heating and ventilation equipment is specified in Section
15993.
Contractor shall be responsible for inspection, testing and provision of written certification of
the following individual components or systems of Work:
1.
2.
3.
Special Construction systems as specified in Division 13 related to intrusion detection,
fire alarm, mass notification and sprinkler systems.
Testing of electrical components and systems as specified in Division 16.
Other utility services testing as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
2
PRODUCTS (Not Used)
3
EXECUTION (Not Used)
END 01410.
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
01410-3
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01420 – AAFES ENVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTION
1
GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and performing all work required for the
prevention of environmental degradation during and as a result of construction operations
under this contract.
B.
These requirements are in addition to any environmental protection requirements elsewhere
in these specifications.
C.
For the purpose of this specification, environmental pollution is defined as the presence of
chemical, physical, or biological elements or agents, not naturally occurring at the site,
which adversely affect:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Human health or welfare.
Unfavorably alter ecological balances important to human life.
Other species of importance to humans.
Degrade the utility of the environment for aesthetic and recreational purposes.
D.
The control of environmental pollution by the Contractor requires consideration of air, water,
and land, and involves noise control, solid waste management and management of radiant
energy and radioactive materials, as well as other pollutants.
E.
This section also requires the protection of cultural and historic resources.
F.
Contractor shall coordinate the work of this section with the work called for under the
various sections of Division 2.
1.2
CONTRACTOR’S GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE OBLIGATIONS
A.
Work under this contract is to be performed on a government facility.
B.
All environmental rules applying to Contractor operations elsewhere will also apply on the
government facility.
C.
Contractor (and any subcontractor, agent or representative) shall comply with all applicable
Federal, State, and local laws and regulations providing for environmental protection and
pollution control and abatement.
D.
Contractor has the duty to determine for himself where such laws and regulations apply.
E.
These regulations include but are not limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Clean Air Act.
Clean Water Act.
Resource Conservation and Recovery Act.
Comprehensive Environmental Response Compensation and Liability Act (CERCLA).
Toxic Substances Control Act.
Federal Insecticide Fungicide and Rodenticide Act.
Coastal Zone Management Act.
AAFES ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
01420-1
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
F.
1.3
Endangered Species Act.
National Historic Preservation Act.
Safe Drinking Water Act.
Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act.
Oil Pollution Act.
Archeological Resources Protection Act.
Pollution Prevention Act.
National Environmental Policy Act.
Although the Contractor may request assistance from the Contracting Officer in delineating
applicable environmental laws and regulations, Contractor has an independent
responsibility to make its own determination and to do so in a timely fashion.
FINES OR PENALTIES FOR ENVIRONMENTAL NON-COMPLIANCE
A.
The Contractor shall be responsible for paying any fines or penalties assessed against
AAFES or the installation or the Army or the Air Force for violations of environmental laws or
regulation resulting from acts or omissions of the Contractor or its employees,
subcontractors, or agents.
B.
This obligation is in addition to any fines or penalties that may be assessed against the
Contractor for the same conduct.
C.
Contractor may either reimburse these fines or penalties through the Contracting Officer, or
with the consent of the Contracting Officer, the Contractor may pay such fines or penalties
directly to the regulatory agency or agencies concerned.
CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY FOR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGES
1.4
A.
Contractor agrees to hold harmless and indemnify AAFES (which includes the Army, Air
Force, or other Department of Defense component, as appropriate) for any and all damages
of any kind resulting from environmentally harmful activities by the Contractor, Contractor’s
employees or agents or subcontractors.
B.
“Damages” includes but are not limited to personal injury, property damage (including
diminution of value) or death, environmental restoration and response costs, natural
resource damages, expert witness and attorney’s fees, and reimbursement of any and all
expenses incurred to obtain permits as a result of Contractor’s failure to identify or obtain
permits for itself or AAFES.
1.5
CONTACTS WITH ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATORY OFFICIALS
A.
Contractor shall immediately advise the Contracting Officer and the installation
environmental office of the content of all contacts with Federal, State, or local environmental
regulators, before, during, and after the performance of this contract concerning the
performance of this contract.
2
PERMITS
2.1
PERMITS FOR EQUIPMENT USED BY CONTRACTOR IN PERFORMING AAFES
CONTRACTS
AAFES ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
01420-2
A.
For equipment used in the performance of this contract, Contractor shall obtain in
Contractor’s name and at no additional expense to AAFES, all permits, coordination,
certifications or other regulatory authorization necessary to perform and complete the work
required by this contract under applicable environmental laws and regulations.
B.
“Applicable environmental laws and regulations” includes but is not limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
2.2
Clean Air Act.
Clean Water Act.
Resource Conservation and Recovery Act.
Comprehensive Environmental Response Compensation and Liability Act (CERCLA).
Toxic Substances Control Act.
Federal Insecticide Fungicide and Rodenticide Act.
Coastal Zone Management Act.
Endangered Species Act.
National Historic Preservation Act.
Safe Drinking Water Act.
Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act.
Oil Pollution Act.
Pollution Prevention Act.
State, County, and Local laws and regulations on the same subjects.
National Environmental Policy Act.
PERMITS NEEDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, EXCAVATION, MODIFICATION,
RENOVATION, DEMOLITION, INSTALLATION, OR OTHER ALTERATION OF
BUILDINGS, STRUCTURES, EQUIPMENT, INSTALLATIONS, REAL PROPERTY OR
SYSTEMS
A.
Contractor shall identify all Federal, State, County, or local, permits, coordination,
certifications or other regulatory authorization requirements under all applicable
environmental laws and regulations as defined in (A.) above.
B.
Contractor shall then prepare and submit in draft all applicable permit applications,
coordination, notices, or other required filings, together with all supporting data to the
Contracting Officer for review.
C.
Permit applications or notifications or other documents that must be submitted by AAFES
will be submitted by AAFES, and any documents that must be submitted by the Contractor
will be returned after review to the Contractor for submission.
D.
No work requiring permit or other written authorization shall proceed before the Contractor
has the permit or authorization or a copy thereof in its possession.
3
MATERIALS
3.1
RECYCLED MATERIALS
A.
Materials used in this contract shall be, to the greatest extent practicable and consistent
with financial prudence, made of recycled materials or of materials that are recyclable.
B.
Where construction debris such as concrete or asphalt or wood can be recycled, this
alternative will be considered.
AAFES ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
01420-3
3.2
ASBESTOS
A.
3.3
Asbestos will not be used or included in this project.
POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYL’S (PCBS)
A.
3.4
PCBs will not be used or included in this project.
LEAD-BASED PAINT
A.
3.5
Lead-based paint will not be used or included in this project.
OZONE-DEPLETING SUBSTANCES
A.
“Class I substance,” as used in this clause, means any substance designated as class I by
the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) (40 CFR Part 82), including but not limited to
chlorofluorocarbons, halons, carbon tetrachloride, and methyl chloroform.
B.
“Class II substance,” as used in this clause, means any substance designated as class II by
EPA (40 CFR Part 82), including but not limited to hydorchlorofluorocarbons.
C.
As required by 42 USC 7671j(b), c, and (d) and 40 CFR Part 82, Subpart E, the Contractor
shall label products which contain class I or class II ozone-depleting substances or are
manufactured with a process that uses class I or class II ozone-depleting substances, or
containers of class I or class II ozone-depleting substances, as follows:
“WARNING: Contains (or manufactured with, if applicable) _________*_________, (a)
substance(s) which harm(s) public health and the environment by destroying ozone in
the upper atmosphere.”
(*The Contractor shall insert the name of the substance(s).)
D.
3.6
The Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Sections 608 and 609 of
the Clean Air Act (42 USC 7671g, National Recycling Emission Reduction Program and
7671h, Servicing of Motor Vehicle Air Conditioners) as each or both apply to the contract.
PESTICIDES
A.
Except as may be specified elsewhere in this contract, Contractor will not use or apply
pesticides (such as herbicides or weed-killers, insecticides, or rodenticides) without the
specific written prior approval of the Contracting Officer.
4
EXECUTION
4.1
GENERAL: SITE DISTURBANCE DURING CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITES
A.
Contractor shall use industry-recognized best management practices to avoid creation of
fugitive dust emissions and to avoid and control storm water runoff from the construction
site and any temporary roads that may be used for access to it.
1.
B.
Water sprinkling may be used to control dust.
Contractor shall perform all work under this contract in such a manner that no pollutants of
any kind are released into ditches, storm drains, streams, lakes, or other surface waters on
or connected to the site.
AAFES ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
01420-4
4.2
PROTECTION OF WATER RESOURCES
A.
General:
1.
2.
B.
Spillage:
1.
2.
C.
The Contractor shall take special measures to prevent chemicals, fuels, oils, greases,
bituminous materials, waste washings, herbicides, cement, and surface drainage from
entering public waters.
In the event of a spill, the Contractor must make all required notifications to Federal,
State or local authorities and will notify the Contracting Officer immediately.
Washing and Curing Water:
1.
4.3
The Contractor shall not pollute storm drainage, streams, lakes, or reservoirs with
fuels, oils, bitumens, calcium chloride, acids, construction wastes or other harmful
materials or pollutants.
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine and comply with all applicable
Federal, State, Regional, Municipal, and other regulations.
Water used in aggregate processing, concrete curing, foundation, and concrete lift
clean-up and other waste water shall not be allowed to enter the storm drainage
system.
PROTECTION OF LAND RESOURCES
A.
General:
1.
2.
B.
Prevention of Landscape Defacement:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
It is intended that the land resources within the project boundaries and outside the
limits of permanent work performed under this contract be preserved in their present
condition or be restored to a condition after completion of construction that will appear
to the natural and not detract from the appearance of the project.
The Contractor shall limit his construction activities to areas defined by the Drawings
or Specifications.
Except in areas marked on the plans to be cleared, the Contractor shall not deface,
remove, cut, injure or destroy trees or shrubs without specific written authority.
Trees designated to be saved shall be protected from either excavation or filling within
the root zone.
No ropes, cables, or guys shall be fastened or attached to any existing trees for
anchorage unless specifically authorized by the Contracting Officer.
The Contractor shall in any event be responsible for any damage resulting from such
use.
Restoration of Landscape Damage:
1.
2.
3.
Any trees or other landscape features scarred or damaged by the Contractor’s
equipment or operations shall be restored as nearly as possible to the original
condition at the Contractor’s expense.
The Contracting Officer will decide what method of restoration shall be used, and
whether damaged trees shall be treated and healed or removed and disposed of
under requirements for clearing and grubbing (Section 02102).
All scars made on trees not designated on the plans to be removed by equipment
construction operations, or by the removal of limbs larger than 1-inch in diameter shall
be coated immediately with an approved tree wound dressing.
AAFES ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
01420-5
4.
5.
6.
4.4
All trimming or pruning shall be performed in an approved manner by experienced
landscape personnel.
Tree trimming with axes shall not be permitted.
Trees that are to remain, either within or outside established clearing limits, that are
subsequently damaged by the Contractor and are beyond saving in the opinion of the
Contracting Officer, shall be immediately removed and replaced with a nursery-grown
tree of the same species.
CONTROL OF AIR EMISSIONS
A.
Contractor’s actions shall conform to all Federal, State, and local requirements for the
control of air emissions during work under this contract.
B.
Trucks leaving the site will be brushed or washed to remove all practicable amounts of dust
or other material that may become airborne.
C.
Contractor will ensure that all internal construction vehicles and equipment used will have
the lowest practicable emissions characteristics and be maintained in optimum operating
condition for the reduction of air emissions.
D.
Where use of electric motors instead of internal combustion engines is feasible, electric
motors will be used during construction.
5
WASTE DISPOSAL
5.1
POLLUTION PREVENTION & WASTE DISPOSAL
A.
The Contractor should use prior planning to find those materials that will minimize the
creation of waste in general and hazardous waste in particular.
B.
Recycling shall be implemented at every practicable stage of the project.
5.2
WASTE DISPOSAL
A.
Pollution Prevention:
1.
B.
The Contractor should use prior planning to find those materials and work practices
that will minimize the creation of waste in general and hazardous waste in particular.
Hazardous Waste Generation, Handling, and Disposal.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Work done under this contract is to be performed on a government facility.
According to rules and procedures of the United States Environmental Protection
Agency, the federal facility is required to have a generator identification number under
the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) and to be responsible for
wastes (as defined under RCRA) produced, managed, stored, disposed on, or
transported from the facility.
Accordingly, Contractor will, to the greatest extent practicable, use materials,
processes, and techniques that will avoid the creation of hazardous waste.
Contractor shall prepare and follow a written waste management and disposal plan
for all hazardous wastes generated on the site.
Prior to generation of any hazardous wastes, Contractor will coordinate planned
activities regarding hazardous materials and hazardous waste with the Contracting
Officer.
Contractor shall submit a written waste management plan, through the Contracting
Officer, to installation environmental office.
AAFES ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
01420-6
a.
7.
8.
C.
Under no circumstances will Contractor bring onto the site hazardous waste that has
been generated elsewhere.
All hazardous waste will be properly disposed of by the Contractor in accordance with
all Federal, State, and local requirements.
Disposal of Non-RCRA Wastes.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
All non-hazardous wastes generated on the site as a result of this contract must be
disposed of properly, in accordance with all Federal, State, and local requirements.
Materials will be recycled whenever practicable.
Prior to creation of such wastes, the Contractor shall submit to the installation
environmental management function, through the Contracting Officer, a plan for
disposal of wastes. Such plan shall include the types of waste to be created, how
they shall be stored, managed and disposed. Contractor shall follow this plan once it
has been approved by the installation and Contracting Officer.
Such wastes will not be created until approved by the Contracting Officer.
Construction Debris.
1.
2.
3.
Debris from demolition of existing structures will ordinarily be removed to a location on
the installation or as designated by the installation authorities.
If a location on the installation is not available, other sections in this contract may
require the Contactor to remove clean construction debris from the site to a location of
the Contractor’s choosing off the installation. (Site soil or other site media are not
covered by this paragraph.)
Debris will be recycled or disposed of in accordance with Ft. Bragg DPW and all
applicable Federal, State and local rules.
a.
4.
b.
c.
5.
6.
To expedite work, this may be accomplished by e-mail or other suitable
electronic means, however, the original certification form must be provided to the
Contracting Officer.
No form is prescribed for this certification so long as all necessary information is
provided and the document is signed by an authorized installation
representative.
However, an example is provided at page 01420-9 and this form may be used.
All construction debris removed from the Installation must be covered by a
certification.
The Contractor must arrange with the Installation POC whether all debris will be
covered by one certification or if several certifications will be required.
Consolidated Waste Disposal Plans:
1.
F.
Such debris must be free of all contamination, including but not limited to, lead
paint, asbestos, and insecticides.
Prior to removal of any construction debris, that debris must be certified by the
Installation to be free of contamination and of no value to the United States, and this
certification must be provided to the Contracting Officer.
a.
E.
Contractor shall follow this plan after approval by the Contracting Officer.
Contractor may, at Contractor’s option, submit for approval as specified above one
consolidated plan for handling hazardous and non-hazardous wastes.
Earthwork and Removal of Potentially Contaminated Media:
AAFES ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
01420-7
1.
Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this contract, the site has been inspected
and is, consistent with best professional judgment, free of environmental
contamination or pollution.
a.
b.
2.
Notwithstanding any other clause in this contract, including but not limited to all
standard site work general provisions (02010-02900); no media by-product resulting
from site preparation, construction or excavation shall be moved off the Post, Base, or
Installation where the construction is occurring.
a.
3.
If the construction is off the Post, Base or Installation, no media by-product shall
be moved off the construction site.
The Contractor shall:
a.
b.
c.
4.
However, work under this contract will be performed on a military installation,
where the history of prior military and industrial activities is not necessarily
completely known.
The following provisions prohibit the removal from the installation of soil or other
materials found on site and are included, in an abundance of caution, for the
protection of AAFES, the installation, and the Contractor.
Leave the media in place at the site, subject to appropriate erosion control or;
Haul the media to and place it at a location on the installation that has been
designated either in this contract or in writing by the Contracting Officer; and
If unforeseen difficulties arise, such as excessive quantity of media is generated,
the Contractor shall advise the Contracting Officer and shall not remove media
from the site without written authorization from the Contracting Officer.
Definitions.
a.
b.
Media – Any soil, water, or air, moved, disturbed or released from a site.
The terms hazardous, waste, pollutant, contaminate, substance have the same
meanings and usage here as they commonly do in CERCLA, RCRA, FWPCA,
CAA, TSCA, and SDWA respectively.
AAFES ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
01420-8
INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION FOR CLEAN CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS TO BE REMOVED
FROM AAFES PROJECT SITE
As representative of ___________________________ (insert name of installation), I am authorized
to certify, and hereby do so certify, that the construction debris to be removed from the AAFES
project site at ______________________ ____________________________________________
(describe project and list address, for example Main Exchange Project, 111 Road A, X installation)
has been inspected and is of no value to the United States and is free of all contamination,
including but not limited to: lead paint, asbestos, PCBs, and pesticides.
CERTIFICATION:
Signed: ______________________________________________ Date: ____________________
Printed Name, Rank or Grade, and Duty Title:
___________________________________________
ORIGINAL OF THIS FORM MUST BE PROVIDED TO CONTRACTING OFFICER
AAFES ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
01420-9
6
UNEXPECTED SITE CONDITIONS
6.1
CONTAMINATED SOIL OR GROUNDWATER
A.
Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this contract, site has been inspected and is,
consistent with best professional judgment, free of environmental contamination or pollution.
However, unexpected conditions can always arise.
B.
Contractor or subcontractor personnel may encounter soil or groundwater that is suspected
to be contaminated, either because of odors, colors, free liquids, unexpected construction
debris, or other suspicious conditions.
C.
Should this occur, Contractor will immediately notify the Contracting Officer and the
installation environmental office and take necessary initial measures to protect workers, the
site, and other personnel.
6.2
UNEXPECTED ARTIFACTS OR RELICS
A.
Should Contractor employees in the course of site preparation or other work on this contract
find unexpected historic or archeological remains, such as bones, arrow points, pottery
remnants, foundations, or other evidence of previous uses of the site, Contractor will cease
further site-disturbing activity and immediately notify the Contracting Officer and installation
environmental office.
END 01420.
AAFES ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
01420-10
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01500 – TEMPORARY FACILITIES,
BARRIERS & CONTROLS
1
GENERAL
1.1
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE.
A.
Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary facilities and controls, including
construction aids and equipment for common use and to facilitate execution of the work:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Chutes.
Cranes.
Hoists.
Platforms.
Railings.
Ramps.
Runways.
Stairs.
B.
Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary barriers and enclosures to separate
phased construction areas and areas occupied for use by AAFES.
C.
Contractor provide and submit for approval a detailed Traffic Control Plan.
D.
Contractor shall provide all other construction aids required to complete work:
1.
2.
E.
Contractor shall provide Site security program at mobilization:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.2
Temporary devices and equipment.
Temporary protection coverings.
Enforce site security program.
Implement installation rules and regulations for all work at Ft. Bragg DPW.
Enforce supplemental security program specified in the Section.
Coordinate and cooperate with Ft. Bragg DPW in establishing, maintaining and
enforcing security program during construction.
Protect work, stored materials and construction equipment from theft and
vandalism.
Prevent access to construction areas by unauthorized persons.
Protect Installation and AAFES property at site from theft, vandalism or damage
from Contractor’s work or employees.
RELATED WORK
A.
Specified elsewhere:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Section 01010 – Project Summary.
Section 01060 – AAFES Safety Policies & Procedures.
Section 01510 – Temporary Utilities.
Section 01590 – Field Offices and Storage Sheds.
Installed but specified elsewhere:
1.
2.
Wood framing, plywood, fasteners and other wood materials related to work under
this Section are specified in Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.
Hollow metal doors frames and hardware requirements related to work under this
Section are specified in Section 08100, Metal Doors & Frames and Section 08710,
Finish Hardware.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES,
BARRIERS & CONTROLS
01500-1
3.
4.
C.
1.3
Non-structural cold-formed metal drywall framing members and gypsum drywall
are specified in Section 09250, Gypsum Drywall Systems.
Other technical Sections of the specifications as related to work under this
Section.
Temporary facilities, barriers and controls must comply with NFPA 241, EM-385-1-1 and
UFC 3-600-1, Sections 1-7.
REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A.
Coordinate and comply with requirements established by Ft. Bragg DPW.
B.
Obtain all permits and inspections required.
C.
Comply with specified codes and regulations: Latest editions in effect as of date of
bidding documents.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
1.4
International Building Code.
National Fire Protection Agency, NFPA 241.
Engineer’s Manual, Safety-Safety & Health Requirements, EM-385-1-1.
Uniform Facilities Criteria, UFC 3-600-1, Sections 1-7.
National Electric Code (ANSI C1).
National Electrical Safety Code.
Federal and State Requirements.
Comply with applicable provisions of ADA and UFAS to maintain accessible paths of
travel and means of egress during construction.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls Plan for coordination that indicates
dust/debris control measures, security measures, proposed locations and proposed time
frame of necessity for such items.
1.
2.
Submit Plan(s) at a minimum scale of 1/8” = 1’-0”.
For each Phase of work indicate:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
Schematically indicate temporary isolation of HVAC system on plan if permanent
system is to be used after installation.
a.
b.
4.
5.
Locations of temporary partitions.
Proposed partition types.
Door locations and door types to be provided.
Other information to describe means of protecting occupied areas of the
building from dust, debris and personal injury.
Indicate location of proposed air filtration system, make-up air and air
filtration discharge.
Other dust control measures.
Schematically indicate temporary isolation of building sprinkler system zones and
duration of isolation during construction.
Schematically indicate waste management plan.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES,
BARRIERS & CONTROLS
01500-2
B.
Provide narrative to accompany Drawing(s) that briefly describes procedures to be
followed, regulatory requirement compliance and special provisions for items not
specifically addressed in Drawing.
C.
Prior to the start of work, submit a site plan showing the locations and dimensions of
temporary facilities (including layouts and details, equipment and material storage area
(onsite and offsite), access and haul routes, avenues of ingress/egress to the fenced
area and details of the fence installation.
1.
2.
3.
Identify any areas that may have to be graveled to prevent the tracking of mud.
Indicate if the use of a supplemental or other staging area is desired.
Show locations of safety and construction fences, site trailers, construction
entrances, trash dumpsters, temporary sanitary facilities, and worker parking
areas.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
TEMPORARY INTERIOR BARRIERS
A.
Provide the following under the Work of this Section:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 6-mil minimum thickness, with
flame spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84.
Dust Barrier Tape: Pressure sensitive tape of type recommended by polyethylene
sheet manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations.
Dust Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats of 36” x 60” minimum
size at exits from work areas and wherever necessary to control the spread of dust
from foot traffic.
Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool or
rock wool with maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke developed of 50.
B.
Material may be new or used.
C.
Materials shall be adequate for purposes intended,
D.
Materials shall not create unsafe or unsanitary conditions.
E.
Materials shall be furnished in compliance with specified codes and standards.
2.2
EQUIPMENT
A.
Provide the following minimum equipment items under work of this Section:
1.
2.
3.
Spring-Loaded Poles, Ceiling and Wall Rails and Side Wall Clamps: Dust barrier
system for fast setup and breakdown dust barrier systems that consist of springloaded support poles that extend from 4’-7” to 12’-0” or 6’-9” to 21’-0” and hold
plastic sheet in position as a curtain barrier equal to system manufactured by
Zipwall, 37 Broadway, Arlington, MA 02474, (800) 718-2255, (www.zipwall.com).
Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated with class and extinguishing agent as
required by specified Code and Ft. Bragg Fire Department for locations and
classes of fire exposure.
Air Filtration Units: HEPA primary and secondary filter equipped portable units with
four stage filtration.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES,
BARRIERS & CONTROLS
01500-3
a.
b.
2.3
Provide single switch for emergency shutoff.
Configure to run continuously.
TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES
A.
Temporary Walls, Closures, Security Enclosures and Barricades:
1.
2.
Provide and maintain all barricades or enclosures required to protect the work in
progress and the existing building from outside elements, dust, construction dust
and noise, and other disturbances as a result of work under this Contract.
Such protection shall be positive, shall meet the approval of the Contracting Officer
or designated representative, and shall be maintained for the duration of the
construction period, or as required to provide for the protection as specified.
B.
Provide weather protection for materials and allow for effective construction heating and
to prevent entry of unauthorized personnel.
C.
Maintain site and work areas in secure, enclosed condition at end of each workday.
1.
2.
3.
2.4
Provide temporary site, office and storage area fencing.
Provide temporary enclosures or barriers of substantial construction.
Provide temporary opening protections where areas cannot be closed and secured
at the end of each workday.
TEMPORARY PROTECTIVE COVERINGS
A.
Contractor coordinate installation of temporary protective coverings with work of various
trades.
B.
Contractor provide temporary protective coverings over finishes that could be damaged
by construction activities.
C.
Protective coverings shall be maintained throughout the duration when construction
activities require surface protection or until the Contracting Officer authorizes removal.
D.
Regularly clean areas and protective coverings as construction activities require to
prevent damage to new finishes and substrates.
E.
Upon completion of work remove temporary protective coverings, clean and repair any
damage to new construction surfaces.
2.5
TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION, EQUIPMENT AND PROTECTION
A.
Provide, maintain, and remove upon completion of the work, all temporary rigging,
scaffolding, hoisting equipment, ladders to roof, barricades around openings, and all
other temporary work as required to complete all work of the Contract.
B.
Contractor shall coordinate the use and furnishing of scaffolds with his subcontractors.
C.
Provide, maintain and remove upon completion of the work, or sooner if authorized by
the Contracting Officer, all fences, barricades, lights, shoring, pedestrian walkways, and
other protective structures or devices necessary for the safety of workmen, AAFES
employees, equipment, the public, and property.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES,
BARRIERS & CONTROLS
01500-4
D.
All temporary construction and equipment shall conform to all regulations, ordinances,
laws and other requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction, including insurance
companies, with regards to safety precautions, operation and fire hazard.
E.
Pumping: Provide and maintain pumping facilities, including power, for keeping the site,
excavations and structures free of accumulations of water at all times, whether from
underground seepage, rainfall, drainage or broken lines.
2.6
MAINTENANCE OF SECURITY
A.
Initiate security program in compliance with Installation’s directions prior to mobilization.
B.
Maintain security program throughout construction period until AAFES acceptance
precludes need for Contractor security.
C.
Vehicle use shall be enforced as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
2.7
Keep all vehicles, mechanized or motorized equipment locked at all times when
parked or unattended on site.
Do not leave vehicle unattended with engine running or with ignition key in place.
Parking will be permitted only in areas designated by Ft. Bragg DPW.
All traffic control shall be subject to Ft. Bragg DPW approval.
Comply with requirements set forth in Paragraphs 2.3 and 2.4 for secure closure of all
window openings during window replacement operations.
ENTRANCE CONTROL
A.
Provide control of all construction personnel and vehicles entering and leaving project
site and building.
B.
Unauthorized Entry:
1.
2.
C.
Damage or Theft:
1.
2.
2.8
Maintain provision for closing and locking the building as soon as possible.
When exterior work is in process such as concrete finish work the Contractor shall
maintain a night watchman until such time that the work and property cannot be
harmed or damaged.
Protect the work and material to be used on the project, from damages or loss due
to the elements, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, or other causes.
Contractor shall be held responsible for such damages, or loss, which he shall
remedy at his expense.
TOOL AND EQUIPMENT SECURITY
A.
Contractor shall be responsible for implementation of tool and equipment storage
security program prior to commencement of work.
B.
Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with tool and equipment security program
and shall inform all workers of specific requirements affecting each craft.
C.
Storage of tools and equipment will be allowed within the facility.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES,
BARRIERS & CONTROLS
01500-5
2.9
PROJECT BULLETIN BOARD
A.
The Contractor shall furnish, install, and maintain, during the life of the project, a
weathertight bulletin board approximately 3 feet high by 5 feet wide, having not less than
two hinged or sliding glass doors with provisions for locking.
1.
2.
B.
The bulletin board shall be mounted where, and as approved by the Contracting
Officer, in a prominent place, accessible to employees of the Contractor and
Subcontractors, and to applicants for employment.
The bulletin board shall remain the property of the Contractor, and shall be
removed by him upon completion of the contract work.
The following information, which will be furnished by AAFES to the Contractor (except
safety posters), shall be posted on the bulletin board, and shall be maintained by the
Contractor in an easily readable condition at all times for the duration of the Contract:
1.
2.
3.
The Equal Employment Opportunity Poster and Notice of Nondiscrimination of
Employment (Standard Form 38).
Wage Rate Information Poster (Form SOL 155), with the contract schedule of
minimum rates as required by the Davis-Bacon Act.
Safety posters.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Consult with Contracting Officer, review site conditions and factors that affect
construction procedures and construction aids, which may be affected by execution of
the work.
B.
Coordinate requirements for enclosures and installation procedures with Ft. Bragg DPW
Environmental and Safety representative(s).
3.2
INSTALLATION-GENERAL
A.
Provide temporary facilities, barriers and controls for use when necessary to avoid delay
in performance of Contract and maintain until no longer necessary or are replaced by
authorized use of completed permanent construction.
B.
Locate temporary facilities, barriers and controls where they will suitably serve Project,
result in minimum interference with performance of Work and least interfere with AAFES
operations.
C.
Relocate and modify temporary facilities, barriers and controls as Work progresses to
maintain criteria set forth above.
3.3
SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with the following:
1.
2.
Maintain support facilities until Contracting Officer schedules Substantial
Completion inspection.
Remove before Substantial Completion.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES,
BARRIERS & CONTROLS
01500-6
3.
B.
Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use
permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to the Contracting Officer.
Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and
utilities.
Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
C.
Parking: Use designated areas of existing parking areas for construction personnel.
D.
Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction and maintain Project site, excavations and construction free of water.
1.
2.
Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or
adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.
E.
Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Sections for
requirements pertaining to waste disposal and recycling, including disposal of materials
controlled by Ft Bragg.
F.
Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.
3.4
SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed
new opening cuts in exterior of existing building.
1.
2.
Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft,
and similar violations of security.
Lock entrances at end of each work day.
B.
Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and
lighting.
C.
Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as
indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Covered Walkway: Erect protective, covered walkway for passage of individuals through
or adjacent to areas of Work where overhead hazard exists.
1.
2.
3.
E.
Coordinate with entrances, other temporary facilities, barriers, controls and
obstructions.
Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and requirements
indicated on Drawings.
Provide overhead decking, protective enclosure walls, handrails, barricades,
warning signs, exit signs, lights, safe and well-drained walkways, and similar
provisions for protection and safe passage.
Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in
progress and after completion from the following:
TEMPORARY FACILITIES,
BARRIERS & CONTROLS
01500-7
1.
2.
F.
Exposure, inclement weather, other construction operations and similar activities.
Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
Temporary Barriers: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof barriers to limit dust and dirt
migration and to separate areas occupied by AAFES and tenants from fumes and noise.
1.
Dust Barrier: Where dust barriers are required, provide a single layer of 6 mil fire
resistant clear polyethylene fiberglass reinforced sheet.
a.
b.
Tape all joints and provide fire resistive treated 2 x 4 wood or metal stud top
and bottom runners and verticals 4 foot o.c. with polyethylene sheet wrapped
and taped to the runners.
Seal Joints and Perimeter:
1.)
2.)
c.
2.
At Contractor’s option the specified Zipwall temporary barrier system may be
used in lieu of field constructed temporary dust barriers.
Opaque Dust Barrier: Where dust barriers are required and where indicated for
long duration separation of construction operations from AAFES and tenant
spaces, provide braced metal stud framing:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Cover framing on construction side with 6-mil fire resistant clear polyethylene
fiberglass reinforced sheet with taped joints and perimeter.
Provide ½ inch gypsum board, fire taped on the AAFES/tenant side from floor
to ceiling.
Provide R-11 fiberglass batt insulation for thermal separation from
unconditioned construction areas and noise reduction adjacent to sales, food
service or office areas.
Seal Joints and Perimeter:
1.)
2.)
3.
Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security locks
where openings are required.
Where practical, locate doors in or towards back of house areas to
avoid tracking dust in areas open to the public while maintaining
specified exiting requirements.
Security Weather-tight Barrier: Where a secure weather-tight barrier is required
and where a temporary exit enclosure through surrounding and overhead
construction is indicated, provide braced metal stud framing:
a.
b.
c.
d.
G.
Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security locks
where openings are required.
Where practical, locate doors in or towards back of house areas to
avoid tracking dust in areas open to the public while maintaining
specified exiting requirements.
Cover framing on construction or exterior side with ½ inch plywood.
Provide ½ inch gypsum board, fire-taped on the AAFES/public side on entire
enclosure.
Provide R-11 fiberglass batt insulation for thermal separation from the
exterior, unconditioned construction areas and noise reduction adjacent to
sales, food service or office areas.
Panelize framing for ease of removal and relocation.
Temporary Opening Protection: Provide temporary rated an non-rated hollow metal
doors and frames or suitable equivalent of substantial construction as approved by the
Contracting Officer or designated representative.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES,
BARRIERS & CONTROLS
01500-8
1.
Dust Barriers and Opaque Dust Barrier Doors:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Security Barrier Doors:
a.
b.
c.
d.
H.
Construct at each exterior opening through barrier.
Doors and frames shall be hollow metal and of substantial gauge and
anchorage to provide secure enclosure.
Set doors and frames to swing in the direction of exit.
Provide hinges, exit devices and closers with exit devices always operable in
the direction of exiting and locked on the opposite side.
Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of
types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses and
in compliance with NFPA 241.
1.
2.
3.
Prohibit smoking in construction areas.
Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and
similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and protection program for
personnel at Project site.
a.
b.
3.5
Construct at each access through the barrier.
Doors shall be hinged with latches and provided with double high security
padlocks in accordance with AAFES security.
Maintain adhesive surfaced foot mats in door locations.
Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be
followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures.
Post warnings and information.
REMOVAL
A.
Upon Contracting Officer's prior written authorization, completely remove temporary
materials and equipment.
B.
Clean and repair all damage caused by installation.
C.
Restore to original conditions.
END 01500.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES,
BARRIERS & CONTROLS
01500-9
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01510 – TEMPORARY UTILITIES
1
GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Contractor provide and/or maintain during construction period:
1.
All temporary utilities for construction:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
Electricity.
Lighting.
Heat.
Ventilation.
Telephone service.
Water.
Sanitary facilities.
All temporary utilities listed above for temporary field offices and storage sheds.
Pay utility fees and use charges.
All temporary utilities in excess of those specified, or exceeding capacity of
existing or permanent systems.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 01000 – Requirements of Ft. Bragg.
B.
Section 01010 – Summary of Work.
C.
Section 01510 – Field Offices and Sheds.
D.
Section 01620 – Storage & Protection.
E.
Division 15 – Mechanical.
F.
Division 16 – Electrical.
1.3
UTILITY PROVIDERS
A.
AAFES will pay for utilities consumed for this Project (gas and electricity) as related to
building construction.
B.
Contractor shall pay prevailing rates to utility owner for utilities used for temporary
offices, construction trailers and storage sheds.
C.
Ft. Bragg utilities information:
1.
Water/Sewer:
a.
Old North Utility Services, Inc. (ONUS):
1.)
2.)
3.)
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
POC: Jimmy Coats.
E-mail: jcoats@onus.asusinc.com.
Phone: (910) 237-8745.
01510-1
2.
Natural gas:
a.
Ft. Bragg:
1.)
2.)
3.)
3.
Electrical power:
a.
Sandhills Utility Services:
1.)
2.)
3.)
4.
Ft. Bragg:
1.)
2.)
3.)
POC: Janet Gresham.
E-mail: janet.l.gresham2.civ@mail.mil.
Phone: (910) 643-2720.
Data/LAN:
a.
Ft. Bragg:
1.)
2.)
3.)
1.4
POC: John Myers.
E-mail: johnmyers@sandhillsutility.com.
Phone: (910) 818-1769.
Communications:
a.
5.
POC: Robert Mullen.
E-mail: Robert.p.mullen10.civ@mail.mil.
Phone: (910) 432-9760.
POC: Janet Gresham.
E-mail: janet.l.gresham2.civ@mail.mil.
Phone: (910) 643-2720.
REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A.
Obtain and pay for permits and inspections required by governing authorities.
B.
Comply with specified codes and regulations: Latest editions in effect as of date of
bidding documents.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.5
National Fire Protection Agency, NFPA 241.
Engineer’s Manual, Safety-Safety & Health Requirements, EM-385-1-1.
Uniform Facilities Criteria, UFC 3-600-1, Sections 1-7.
National Electric Code (ANSI C1).
National Electrical Safety Code.
Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) Standards.
Federal and State Requirements.
TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE
A.
AAFES will furnish source for temporary water from existing water service within the
building.
B.
Contractor shall obtain water from designated source to be used for construction needs,
fire protection, cleaning and miscellaneous use throughout the construction period.
1.
2.
3.
Coordinate source for water with Contracting Officer or designated representative
and Store Manager.
Provide certified reduced pressure zone (RPZ) backflow protection as required by
the Ft. Bragg DPW.
Provide water hoses from source if needed for construction purposes.
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
01510-2
C.
Provide drip pans under each temporary water connection where damage to new or
existing materials could result.
D.
Contractor shall be held responsible for monitoring conservation of water usage during
construction.
E.
AAFES will pay for the cost of water consumed during construction and after beneficial
occupancy by AAFES.
F.
Contractor shall pay all additional costs for service extensions and water used for
temporary field offices, construction trailers and storage sheds.
1.6
TEMPORARY ELECTRIC FOR PROJECT CONSTRUCTION
A.
AAFES will furnish source for temporary power from existing power panel in the building.
B.
Contractor shall furnish and install a temporary secondary electric load center for
construction needs throughout the construction period per Ft. Bragg DPW standards.
1.
2.
The temporary electric service shall be a 120/208 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 200 amp
minimum service for construction operations.
Provide a power center temporarily mounted to the building consisting of the
following:
a.
b.
Main disconnect.
20 amp, 120/208 volt circuits as necessary, each protected by a circuit
breaker, for use by all trades.
1.)
2.)
3.
All outlets shall be grounded.
Outlets shall be located so that no extensions are more than 100 feet
in length.
Users shall provide grounded, Underwriters’ Laboratories approved extension
cords from power center to point of operations.
C.
The temporary electric service or extension of existing service shall comply with the
National Electric Code.
D.
Contractor shall be held responsible for monitoring conservation of power usage during
construction.
E.
Provide and maintain incandescent lighting for construction operations to achieve a
minimum lighting level of five (5) foot candles in all work areas.
1.
2.
Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting
conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required.
Provide guarded lighting sockets and lamps.
a.
b.
3.
4.
F.
Use 100 watt lamps, minimum.
Maintain socket voltage of 100 volts minimum in lighting system.
Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs.
Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction.
AAFES will pay for the cost of electricity consumed during construction, including power
consumed after installation of permanent service where required, and after beneficial
occupancy by AAFES.
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
01510-3
G.
1.7
Contractor shall pay all additional costs for service or service extensions and electricity
used for temporary field offices, construction trailers and storage sheds per requirements
listed in Section 01590 – AAFES Field Offices and Sheds.
TEMPORARY HEATING, COOLING AND VENTILATION
A.
Contractor shall maintain temporary heat, cooling and ventilation in the construction
areas throughout the construction period to facilitate the progress of work, protect work
against cold, dampness, condensation, and to provide suitable ambient temperatures
and humidity levels for proper installation and curing of materials.
B.
Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary heat, cooling and ventilation meeting
the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
As required under each individual specification Section for each product or
material during storage.
As required under each individual specification Section for proper placement,
setting, and curing of materials.
Maintain a minimum temperature of 65 degrees F. (28 degrees C.) for twenty four
(24) hours a day, seven day prior to and during placing of interior finishes,
including but not limited to:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
4.
C.
Gypsum drywall.
Painting.
Resilient flooring and base.
Tile work.
Acoustic ceilings.
Finish carpentry.
Maintain specified temperatures from the time of placement until beneficial
occupancy, for installation all finish materials.
Contractor may use the permanent heating, cooling and ventilation system for
construction purposes under the following conditions:
1.
2.
Contractor shall obtain approval for use and operation of the system from the
Contracting Officer and verify proper filters are in place.
Contractor shall provide and pay for maintenance and shall provide new filters and
replace any damaged or worn parts immediately and until final acceptance by
AAFES.
D.
Contractor shall be held responsible for monitoring conservation of energy usage during
construction.
E.
AAFES will pay for natural gas and electricity consumed by the permanent heating,
cooling and ventilation equipment.
F.
Contractor shall pay all additional costs for consumables used during temporary heating,
cooling and ventilation of construction areas and those required for temporary field
offices, construction trailers and storage sheds per requirements listed in Section 01590
– AAFES Field Offices and Sheds.
1.8
TELEPHONE SERVICE
A.
Provide, maintain, and pay for telephone service to field office at time of project
mobilization.
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
01510-4
B.
1.9
Refer to Section 01590 - Field Offices and Sheds.
TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A.
Phasing of Project shall be accomplished to maintain one functional toilet facility within
the building at all times for use by customers and employees but not for use by
construction personnel.
B.
Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary toilet facilities and enclosures for use
by construction personnel and authorized parties throughout construction period.
1.
2.
Existing facility use in this or nearby buildings is not permitted.
Provide at time of project mobilization.
C.
Furnish, install, and maintain adequate portable chemical toilets.
D.
Provide regular maintenance service to maintain clean and sanitary conditions.
2
PRODUCTS (Not Used)
3
EXECUTION (Not Used)
END 01510.
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
01510-5
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01590 – FIELD OFFICES & SHEDS
1
GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Temporary field offices, construction trailers and sheds.
B.
Maintenance and cleaning.
C.
Removal.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 01000 – Requirements of Ft. Bragg.
B.
Section 01010 – Summary of Work.
C.
Section 01420 – AAFES Environmental Protection.
D.
Section 01500 – Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls.
E.
Section 01510 – Temporary Utilities.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, FURNISHINGS
A.
2.2
Materials, Equipment, Furnishings: Serviceable, new or used, adequate for required
purpose.
CONSTRUCTION
A.
Portable or mobile buildings, or buildings constructed with floors raised above ground,
securely fixed to foundations, with steps and landings at entrance doors.
B.
Construction: Structurally sound, secure, weather tight enclosures for office and storage
spaces. Maintain during progress of Work; remove at completion of Work.
C.
Temperature Transmission Resistance of Floors, Walls, and Ceilings: Compatible with
occupancy and storage requirements.
D.
Exterior Materials: Weather resistant, finished in one color acceptable to Contracting
Officer.
E.
Interior Materials in Offices: Sheet type materials for walls and ceilings, pre-finished or
painted; resilient floors and bases.
F.
Lighting for Offices: 50 ft-C (538 lx) at desk top height, exterior lighting at entrance
doors.
G.
Fire Extinguishers: One 10# standard dry chemical (ABC) type fire extinguisher at each
office and each storage area.
H.
Interior Materials in Storage Sheds:
storage of products.
FIELD OFFICES & SHEDS
As required to provide specified conditions for
01590-1
2.3
ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL
A.
Heating, Cooling, and Ventilating for Offices: Automatic equipment to maintain 68
degrees F (20 degrees C) heating and 76 degrees F (23 degrees C) cooling.
B.
Storage Spaces: Heating and ventilation as needed to maintain Products in accordance
with Contract Documents; adequate lighting for maintenance and inspection of Products.
2.4
CONTRACTOR OFFICE AND FACILITIES
A.
Size: For Contractor's needs at Contractor's option.
B.
Telephone: The Contractor shall install, maintain and pay for telephone service for the
Contractor's field office including an answering device and outside bell.
C.
Fax: Install, maintain and pay for facsimile service for the Contractor's Field Office.
D.
Other Furnishings: Contractor's option.
E.
Equipment: Six (6) adjustable band protective helmets for visitors, one 10 inch (250
mm) outdoor weather thermometer and a weather protected bulletin board for posting
information required by the contract.
2.5
STORAGE AREAS AND SHEDS
A.
Size to storage requirements for products of individual Sections, allowing for access and
orderly provision for maintenance and for inspection of products.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Fill and grade sites for temporary structures to provide drainage away from buildings.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install office spaces ready for occupancy 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed.
B.
Employee Residential Occupancy: Not permitted on Installation property.
3.3
MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING
A.
Weekly cleaning services for offices; periodic cleaning and maintenance for office and
storage areas.
B.
Maintain approach walks free of mud, water, and snow.
3.4
REMOVAL
A.
At completion of Work remove buildings, foundations, utility services, and debris.
Restore areas.
END 01590.
FIELD OFFICES & SHEDS
01590-2
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01600 – MATERIAL & EQUIPMENT
1
GENERAL
1.1
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE
A.
Contractor provide:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Specified materials and equipment.
Transportation and delivery.
Equipment and personnel at site.
Coordination of delivery for Materials and Equipment.
Coordination of space allocation to receive Materials and Equipment.
Coordinate and provide space allocation to receive Materials and Equipment
delivered by AAFES and AAFES Vendors.
Related work specified elsewhere:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
1.2
Section 01010 – Summary of Work.
Section 01030 – Substitution Procedures.
Section 01320 – Construction Progress Schedule.
Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.
Section 01500 – Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls.
Section 01510 – Temporary Utilities.
Section 01590 – Field Offices & Sheds.
Section 01620 – Storage and Protection.
Section 01710 – Cleaning.
Section 01720 – Project Record Documents.
Technical Sections of the Project Manual.
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A.
When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with manufacturer's
printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in
installation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Provide three (3) copies to the Contracting Officer.
Transmit one (1) copy to the Architect-Engineer.
Maintain one (1) set of complete instructions at job site during installation and until
completion.
Retain an additional three (3) sets of complete instructions for insertion in Operation
and Maintenance Manuals to be submitted at Final Completion.
Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accord with such
instructions and in conformity with specified requirements.
1.
2.
Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's
instructions, consult with Contracting Officer for further instructions.
Do not proceed with work without clear instructions.
C.
Perform work in accord with manufacturer's instructions.
D.
Do not omit any preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or
exempted by Contract Documents.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT INCORPORATED INTO THE WORK
A.
Conform to applicable specifications and standards.
B.
Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically approved in writing by
Contracting Officer.
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600-1
C.
Manufactured and fabricated products:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Design, fabricate and assemble in accord with best engineering and shop practices.
Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gauges, to be
interchangeable.
Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical, by the same manufacturer.
Products shall be suitable for service conditions.
Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered to
unless variations are specifically approved in writing.
D.
Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is designed or
is specified.
E.
Do not incorporate any materials or equipment into the work that contain asbestos, lead
paint, PCB's or other hazardous materials.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A.
Arrange deliveries of products in accord with construction schedules, coordinate to avoid
conflict with work and conditions at site.
1.
2.
Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original containers or
packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible.
Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with requirements of
contract documents and approved submittals, and that products are properly
protected and undamaged.
B.
Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or
damage to products or packaging.
C.
Clearly mark partial deliveries of component parts of assemblies or equipment to permit
easy identification of parts and to facilitate assembly.
D.
Provide additional protection during handling to prevent scraping, marring or other damage
to products, equipment or surrounding surfaces.
3.2
STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A.
In accord with Section 01620.
END 01600.
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600-2
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01620 – STORAGE & PROTECTION
1
GENERAL
1.1
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE
A.
Contractor provide and maintain:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2
Coordination of location for storage of materials with Ft. Bragg DPW.
Storage for materials and equipment to be installed in project.
Protection and security for stored materials and equipment, on and off site.
Maintenance and protection for products, materials and equipment after installation
and until completion of project.
Cooperate and assist AAFES in storage and protection of equipment.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Related work specified elsewhere:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Section 01010 – Summary of Work.
Section 01320 – Construction Progress Schedule.
Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.
Section 01510 – Temporary Utilities.
Section 01600 – Materials & Equipment.
Section 01710 – Cleaning.
Section 01720 – Project Closeout.
Technical Sections of the Project Manual.
1.3
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
In accord with 01340, submit:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.5
Request for allocation of storage space, if applicable.
List of materials and equipment to be stored.
Proposed location for storage.
Special storage requirements.
Schedule of anticipated storage dates.
STORAGE
A.
Obtain permission from Ft. Bragg DPW and coordinate with appropriate authorities for
suitable storage area on Project Site or in the vicinity of the Project Site and as indicated.
B.
Store products immediately on delivery, and protect until installed in the work.
C.
Store in accord with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible.
D.
Store products subject to damage by elements in substantial weathertight enclosures.
1.
2.
3.
E.
Maintain temperatures within ranges required by manufacturer's instructions.
Provide humidity control for sensitive products, as required by manufacturer's
instructions.
Store unpacked products on shelves, in bins or in neat piles, accessible for
inspection.
Exterior Storage:
1.
Provide substantial platforms, blocking or skids to support fabricated products above
ground.
a.
Prevent soiling or staining.
STORAGE & PROTECTION
01620-1
b.
c.
2.
Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces such as paved areas, or provide
plywood or sheet materials to prevent mixing with foreign matter.
a.
b.
F.
Do not inhibit use of:
a.
b.
c.
1.6
Provide surface drainage to prevent flow or ponding of rainwater.
Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious material or liquids.
Arrange storage in manner to provide easy access for inspection.
1.
G.
Cover products, subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to the
elements, with impervious sheet coverings.
Provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation.
Fire lanes and exits.
Roadways.
Adjacent properties.
Store combustible materials in accordance with applicable regulations.
MAINTENANCE OF STORAGE
A.
Maintain periodic system of inspection of stored products on scheduled basis to assure that:
1.
2.
3.
4.
State of storage facilities is adequate to provide required conditions.
Required environmental conditions are maintained on continuing basis.
Surfaces of products exposed to elements are not adversely affected.
Any weathering of products, coatings and finishes is not acceptable under
requirements of Contract Documents.
B.
Provide continuous maintenance for all temporary structures.
C.
Repair or refinish damaged or weathered portions of structure as required to maintain in
specified condition.
D.
Repair or replace defective utility connections required for temporary utilities.
E.
Clean storage areas at least once a week.
1.7
PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
A.
Provide protection of installed products to prevent damage from subsequent operations and
remove when no longer needed, prior to completion of work.
B.
Control traffic to prevent damage to equipment and surfaces.
C.
Provide coverings to protect finished surfaces from damage.
1.
2.
Cover projections, wall corners, and jambs, sills and soffits of openings, in areas used
for traffic and for passage of products in subsequent work.
Protect finished floors and stairs from dirt and damage:
a.
b.
c.
D.
In areas subject to foot traffic, secure heavy paper, sheet goods, or other
materials in place.
For movement of heavy products, lay planking or similar materials in place.
For storage of products, lay tight wood sheathing in place.
Waterproofed and roofing surfaces:
1.
2.
Prohibit use of surfaces for traffic of any kind, and for storage of any products.
When some activity must take place in order to carry out the contract, obtain
recommendations of installer for protection of surface.
STORAGE & PROTECTION
01620-2
a.
b.
E.
Install recommended protection and remove on completion of that activity.
Restrict use of adjacent unprotected areas.
Landscaping:
1.
2.
Protect and prohibit activities that could damage new landscaping.
Prohibit traffic of any kind across newly planted areas.
2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
3
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END 01620.
STORAGE & PROTECTION
01620-3
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01650 – SYSTEMS START-UP
1
GENERAL
1.1
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE
A.
Contractor provide:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Start-up of all systems and equipment modified by construction.
Demonstration and instructions to operational and maintenance personnel.
Assistance and coordination of testing, adjusting and balancing.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Specified elsewhere:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
1.3
Section 01017 – AFFES Furnished & Installed Equipment.
Section 01018 – AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed Equipment.
Section 01400 – Quality Control: Manufacturers field reports.
Section 01720 – Project Closeout: System operation and maintenance data and
extra materials.
Section 11400 – Food Service Equipment.
Division 15 – Mechanical.
Division 16 – Electrical.
Contractor shall be responsible for start-up of all equipment and systems required to be
shut down and/or modified for construction of this Project.
STARTING SYSTEMS
A.
Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.
B.
Notify Contracting Officer and designated representative seven (7) days prior to start-up
of each item.
C.
Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication,
drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause
damage.
D.
Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those
required by the equipment or system manufacturer.
E.
Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.
F.
Execute start-up under supervision of applicable manufacturer's representative and/or
Contractors' personnel in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
G.
When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide
authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment
or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in
operation.
H.
Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01340 that equipment or system has
been properly installed and is functioning correctly.
SYSTEMS START-UP
01650-1
1.4
DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
A.
Provide sign-in log sheets and written meeting minutes for each unit or group of units
demonstrated.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Obtain contact information and signature for each demonstration attendee.
Provide written minutes of each demonstration conducted.
Submit dated written record of each demonstration, along with sign-in log sheet
and meeting minutes as part of Project Closeout submittals and specifically
include with Operation and Maintenance Manuals submitted under Section 01720.
Provide videotaped CD/DVD in four (4) copies of each equipment demonstration session
for submittal to AAFES and Ft. Bragg DPW at Final Closeout in compliance with
requirements for Section 01700, Project Closeout.
1.
Training and demonstration of Fire Protection, Fire Alarm, Mass Notification,
Intrusion Detection, HVAC, Electrical and Communications equipment items.
C.
Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to AAFES and Installation
personnel two weeks prior to date of final inspection.
D.
Demonstrate project equipment by a qualified representative who is knowledgeable
about the project.
E.
For equipment of systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other
season within six months.
F.
Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction.
G.
Review contents of operation and maintenance manuals with AFFES and Installation
personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.
H.
Demonstrate start-up, operation, control adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing,
maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time at designated
location.
I.
Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need
for additional data becomes apparent during instruction.
J.
The amount of time required for instruction on each item of equipment and system is that
specified in individual Sections but in no case less than 1-hour for each unit or group of
units demonstrated.
1.5
TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING
A.
AAFES will appoint, employ and pay for services of an independent firm to perform
testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B.
The independent firm will perform services specified in Section 15993.
C.
Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Contracting Officer and
designated representative indicating observations and results of tests and indicating
compliance or non-compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
2
PRODUCTS (Not Used)
3
EXECUTION (Not Used)
END 01650.
SYSTEMS START-UP
01650-2
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01700 – PROJECT CLOSEOUT
1
GENERAL
1.1
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDES:
A.
Contractor provide:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Substantial Completion.
Final Inspections.
Closeout Submittals.
RELATED SECTIONS:
A.
Specified elsewhere:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
General Provisions of the Contract: Final Acceptance and Payment.
Section 01340 – Submittals.
Section 01710 – Cleaning.
Section 01720 – Project Record Documents.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A.
Contractor:
1.
2.
Submit written certification to Contracting Officer and designated representative that
project, or designated portion of Project, is substantially complete.
Submit list of major items to be completed or corrected.
B.
Contracting Officer will make an inspection after receipt of certification.
C.
Should Contracting Officer consider that work is substantially complete:
1.
2.
Contractor shall prepare, and submit to Contracting Officer, a list of items to be
completed or corrected, as determined by the inspection.
Contracting Officer will prepare and issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion,
containing:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Date of Substantial Completion.
Contractor's list of items to be completed or corrected, verified, and amended by
Contracting Officer.
The time within which Contractor shall complete or correct work of listed items.
Time and date AAFES will assume possession of work or designated portion
thereof.
Responsibilities of AAFES and Contractor for:
1.)
2.)
3.)
4.)
f.
Signatures of:
1.)
2.)
3.
Utilities.
Operation of mechanical, electrical, and other systems.
Maintenance and cleaning.
Security.
Contracting Officer.
Contractor.
AAFES occupancy of project or designated portion of project:
a.
b.
Contractor shall perform final cleaning in accordance with Section 01710.
AAFES will occupy project, under provisions stated in Certificate of Substantial
Completion.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
01700-1
4.
D.
Should Contracting Officer consider that work is not substantially complete:
1.
2.
3.
1.4
Contractor: Complete work listed for completion or correction, within designated time.
He will immediately notify Contractor, in writing, stating reasons.
Contractor: Shall complete work, and send second written notice to contracting
officer and designated representative, certifying that project, or designated portion of
project, is substantially complete.
Contracting Officer will reinspect work.
FINAL INSPECTION
A.
Contractor shall submit written certification that:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Contract documents have been reviewed.
Project has been inspected for compliance with contract documents.
Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents.
Equipment and systems have been tested in presence of AAFES and Installation
personnel are operational.
Project is completed and ready for final inspection.
B.
Contracting Officer will make final inspection after receipt of certification.
C.
Should the Contracting Officer consider that work is finally complete in accordance with
requirements of contract documents, he shall request Contractor to make project closeout
submittals.
D.
Should the Contracting Officer consider that work is not finally complete:
1.
2.
3.
1.5
He shall notify Contractor, in writing, stating reasons.
Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies, and send
second written notice to the Contracting Officer certifying that work is complete.
The Contracting Officer will reinspect work.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS:
A.
1.6
Project Record Documents: Specified requirements of Section 01720.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:
A.
Submit data bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages, three D side ring binders with durable
plastic covers.
B.
Prepare binder cover with printed title "Operation and Maintenance Manuals", title of project,
and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required.
C.
Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized
as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.
D.
Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system
description identified, typed on 20 pound white paper, in three parts as follows:
1.
2.
Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Contractor,
Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.
Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided
by specification section.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
01700-2
a.
b.
For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
Subcontractors and suppliers.
Identify the following:
1.)
2.)
3.)
4.)
5.)
6.)
7.)
8.)
3.
Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
E.
All approved shop drawings and product data.
Air and water balance reports.
Certificates.
Photocopies of warranties.
Training Sessions attendance roster.
Submit six (6) copies of the operation and maintenance manuals as follows:
1.
2.
1.7
Significant design criteria.
List of equipment.
Parts list for each component.
Operating instructions.
Value chart.
Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.
Maintenance instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning
methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental
agents.
End user agreement(s) and software license(s) where applicable.
Contracting Officer: Four (4) copies.
Ft. Bragg DPW: Two (2) copies.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION:
A.
The Contractor shall provide, at his expense, manufacturer's representatives to completely
check out all mechanical and electrical systems and items covered by the drawings and
specifications.
B.
This requirement shall be scheduled just prior to, and during the initial start up.
C.
After all systems are functioning properly, the representatives shall instruct Facility
Maintenance Personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of each item.
D.
In addition to instructions given at the project, the Facility Maintenance Personnel shall be
given a classroom instruction course on operation and maintenance of the systems.
1.
2.
E.
1.8
Training sessions shall be limited to four (4) continuous hours where practical.
Schedule additional four (4) hour sessions as required.
Submit videotaped CD/DVD in six (6) copies as indicated of each training session and each
equipment demonstration session along with O & M Manuals.
WARRANTY AND EXTENDED WARRANTIES:
A.
Upon completion of project and prior to final payment Contractor shall furnish warranties as
required by Contract and technical Sections of Specifications.
1.
Contractor shall fully warrant all labor and materials for a full year following
Substantial Completion and Final Acceptance of the Project by the Contracting Officer
as required by the Contract for Construction in compliance with requirements set forth
in Exhibit F of the Solicitation Package.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
01700-3
2.
3.
All applicable products, materials, systems and equipment entering into the Work
shall be warranted by the manufacturer’s standard commercial warranty for a period
of not less that one (1) year.
In addition to the standard warranty there are products, materials, systems and
equipment designated in the Technical Sections of the specifications that shall be
warranted beyond one (1) year.
a.
b.
4.
Refer to Technical Sections for extended warranties beyond one (1) year.
Provide manufacturer’s fully executed warranty for specified period,
commencing on date of Substantial Completion and Final Acceptance, covering
items listed.
All warranties shall be properly executed in four copies (1 original and 3 copies) by
Contractor and submitted in conjunction with the O & M Manuals at Project Closeout
for distribution to AAFES and Ft. Bragg DPW.
B.
Delivery of guarantees shall not relieve Contractor from any obligation assumed under
contract.
C.
Submit guarantee covering entire project for one year.
D.
Submit separate extended warranties and guarantees for portions of work where Technical
Sections of the specifications require longer periods of time.
1.
Contractor's guarantee shall be extended to cover such longer periods on these
items.
E.
Guarantees shall become valid and operative upon issuance of Certificate of Inspection and
Acceptance by AAFES.
F.
Guarantees shall not apply to work where damage is a result of abuse, neglect by AAFES,
or his successor(s) in interest.
1.9
DD FORM 1354:
A.
Preparation of DD Form 1354 "Transfer and Acceptance of Military Real Property":
1.
2.
At the conclusion of the project the Contractor will compile and furnish to the
Architect-Engineer and Contracting Officer cost information and quantity data of
materials and systems furnished and installed.
A list of items for which the costs and quantity data are required will be furnished to
the Contractor.
B.
Such information shall be returned to the Architect-Engineer and Contracting Officer within
10 days from the receipt of the list.
C.
Architect-Engineer will prepare and submit a copy of DD Form 1354 to the Contracting
Officer for transmittal to Ft. Bragg Real Property office at completion of Project.
D.
DD Form 1354 Attachments:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Department of Defense Instruction, Form 4165.40.
Suggested Instructions for Preparing DD Form 1354.
Checklist for Buildings Info for DD Form 1354 & Real Property Card.
Transfer and Acceptance of Military Real Property, DD Form 1354.
2
PRODUCTS (Not Used)
3
EXECUTION (Not Used)
END 01700.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
01700-4
HQ Army & Air Force Exchange Service
Design Criteria Manual
EXHIBIT J
1
HQ Army & Air Force Exchange Service
Design Criteria Manual
EXHIBIT J
2
HQ Army & Air Force Exchange Service
Design Criteria Manual
EXHIBIT J
SUGGESTED INSTRUCTIONS FOR PREPARING DD FORM 1354
(TRANSFER AND ACCEPTANCE OF MILITARY REAL PROPERTY)
1.
The page number and the total number of pages comprising each transfer shall be shown in the space provided at the top
right-hand part of the form.
2.
When two or more pages are required, Items 27 through 29 shall be completed only on the final page. In such cases, the
bottom portion of the form shall be torn off of all pages, except the final page, at the line above Items 27 and 28.
ITEM 1 - Self – explanatory
ITEM 2 - Primarily for Navy use, the district number will be assigned by area or district public works office in accordance with
coding pattern set forth in NAVEXOS P-1570, par. 3805-7, Item 6. For Army use, enter appropriate Army Engineer district
where construction is performed and/or from which the transfer is made. For transfer of construction to the Air Force, enter
appropriate Army Engineer district or the district number assigned by area, or Naval district public works office from which the
construction transfer is made.
ITEM 4 - For Navy use only, see NAVEXOS P-1570, par. 3805-7, Item 5.
ITEM 5 - Enter date of preparation.
ITEM 6 – For Army use, enter appropriate Army job and directive number. For Air Force use, enter base job number, as
appropriate, when form is used for transfer within the Air Force.
ITEM 7 – For Army use, or for transfer of construction to the Air Force, enter separate series of numbers, by fiscal year, for each
installation to which real property is transferred; e.g., for FY 1962 show 62-1, 62-2, etc. For Navy use, this serial number will be
assigned by respective area or district public works office and will represent the numerical sequence of submissions by respective
contract number.
ITEM 8 – Insert appropriate contract number.
ITEM 9 – Self-explanatory.
ITEM 10 – 12: Instructions for Items 2,3 and 4 apply. (not applicable for Air For Use.)
ITEM 13 – For Navy use only. Insert the accounting number assigned to or used by the activity named in accordance with Item
9. See NAVEXOS P-1570, par. 3805-7, Item 10.
ITEM 14 – For Navy use only. Insert the accounting number assigned to the activity performing the official property accounting
for the activity shown in Item 9. See NAVCompt Manual, Vol. 2, Chapter 5, for accounting numbers.
ITEM 15 – Insert an “X” in the appropriate box of block (A) to indicate whether the transfer involves new construction, existing
facilities or capital improvements to existing facilities. If the “other” category is used, explain in remarks, Item 31. Additionally,
insert an “X” in the appropriate box of block (B) to indicate whether transfer is being made at time of beneficial occupancy,
physical completion or financial completion (with respect to new construction). If the “other” category is used, explain in
remarks, Item 31.
ITEM 16 – Enter the code number assigned to identify the project with the appropriate construction authorization law.
ITEM 17 – Each single entry will be identified as an item number and this item number will be shown in this column.
ITEM 18 – 19: Category Code and Description. Enter the category code and description (see DoD Instruction 4165.3 (reference
(a) ) or attachment 1 to enclosure 1 to DoD Instruction 4165.14 (reference (b)) that appropriately describes the primary use for
which the facility (buildings, structures, utilities) is designed. Not more than one category code (Item 18) will be listed as a line
item (Item 17).
3
HQ Army & Air Force Exchange Service
Design Criteria Manual
EXHIBIT J
ITEM 20 – Number of Units in terms of buildings or other structures.
ITEM 21 – Type – enter type of construction; i.e., “P” for permanent, “S” for semipermanent or “T” for temporary.
ITEM 22 – Enter the unit of measure abbreviation, such as “SF” for square feet, etc. (see attachment 2 to enclosure 1 to DoD
Instruction 4165.14 (reference (b)).
ITEM 23 – Enter total quantity as described In Item 22.
ITEM 24 –Indicate by item number, category code, and description the appropriate cost. In those instances where a document
is prepared which lists items carrying costs which, in some cases, may be final and in others may be preliminary, each cost
figure by line item will carry an alphabetical suffix of (P) for preliminary or (F) for final.
ITEM 25 – 31: Self-explanatory.
#First amendment (Ch 1, 7/28/67)
4
19
FACILITY
(category description)
20
NO. OF
UNITS
21
TYPE
OPERATING
UNIT
22
UNIT
OF
MEAS
11. DISTRICT
CODE
5 of 11
DD FORM 1 N0V 61 1354
Title (Area Engr./Base Engr/ DPWO)
16.
PROJECT
NUMBER
29. PROPERTY
VOUCHER NUMBER
TITLE (Post Engr./Base Engr./Navy Rep.)
26
REMARKS
(SPECIFY)
BENF/O
PHYSICAL
COM
FIN. COM
OTHER
4165
‰
‰
‰
‰
7. CONTRACT
NUMBER
PAGES
DATE
25
DRAWING
NUMBERS
‰ NEW CONSTR
‰ EXISTING FAC
‰ CAPITAL IMP
‰ OTHER (SPECIFY)
15. TYPE OF TRANSACTION
6. JOB NUMBER
OF
28. ACCEPTED BY (Signature)
24
23
14. AC
COUNTOFFICE
NUMBER
COST
13. AC
COUNTING
NUMBER
TOTAL QUANTITY
12. OPER
ATING
AGENCY
SUPERSEDES ENG FORMS 290 AND 290B
AND NAVDOCKS FORM 2317
STATEMENT OF COMPLETION: The facilites listed hereon are in accordance with maps, drawings,
and specifications and change orders approved by the authorized representative of the using agency except
for the deficiencies listed on the reverse side.
TRANSFERRED BY (Signature)
DATE
18
17
27.
CATEGORTY
CODE
ITEM
NO.
2.
5. DATE
FROM: (Installation/Activity/Service)
4. OPER
ATING
AGENCY
1.
3. DIS
TRICT
CODE
7. SERIAL
NUMBER
OPERATING
UNIT
FROM: (Installation/Activity/Service)
1.
2.
PAGE
Design Criteria Manual
EXHIBIT J
TRANSFER AND ACCEPTANCE OF MILITARY REAL PROPERTY
HQ Army & Air Force Exchange Service
4165.40 (Encl 1)
Nov 14, 61
HQ Army & Air Force Exchange Service
30.
Design Criteria Manual
EXHIBIT J
CONSTRUCTION DEFICIENCIES
31. REMARKS
This form has been designed and issued for use in connection with
the transfer of military real property between the military
departments and to or form other government agencies. It
supersedes ENG Forms 290 and 290B (formerly used by the Army
and Air Force) and NAVDOCKS Form 2317 (formerly used by the
Navy).
Existing instruction issued by the military departments relative to
the preparation of the three superseded forms are applicable to this
form to the extent that the various items and
columns on the superseded forms have been retained. Additional
instructions, as appropriate, will be promulgated by the military
departments in connection with any new items appearing hereon.
With the issuance of this DD form, it is not intended that the
department shall revise and reprint manuals and directives simply to
show the number of this DD form. Such action can be accomplished
through the normal course of revision for other reasons.
Page 6 of 11
HQ Army & Air Force Exchange Service
Design Criteria Manual
EXHIBIT J
ITEMS FOR DD FORM 1354
CATEGORY CODES: VERIFY FOR ARMY FACILITIES AND AIR FORCE FACILITIES OF THE SAME
DESCRIPTION • • • (ABBREVIATION-NOMENCLATURE)
*
DESCRIPTION:
ARMY
AIR FORCE
SHOPPING CENTER: (EXCH MAIN RETL)
: 740-53 (EXCH SALES STORE)
740111
SHOPPETTE
(EXCHANGE BRANCH)
:740-50 (EXCH BRANCH)
740382
CLASS SIX
(CLASS VI)
:740-84 (BSE PACKAGE STORE) 740269
CAR CARE CENTER (EXCH SVC STA)
:740-52 (EXCH SVC STN)
740383
BURGER KING (POST RESTAURANT)
:740-64 (EXCH CAFE SNK BAR) 722345
CATEGORY CODE
DESCRIPTION
1. BUILDING SQUARE FOOTAGE:
A.RETAIL AREAS:___________SF
C. MPA:___________SF
E. FOOD ACTIVITIES________SF.
G. MERCH. EQUIP. RM______SF
COST
B. ADMIN/EMPLOYEE AREA_________SF
D. SERVICES ACTIVITIES: ____________________SF
F. MALL/PUBLIC TOILETS: ___________________SF
H. TOTAL BLDG:___________SF
2. BUILDING
$ _____________________
(TOTAL CONTRACT PRICE LESS THE SUM OF THE FOLLOWING)
3. HEATING, VENTILATION & AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
$ _____________________
TOTAL:_________________TONS
(AR)826-11
(AF)826123
(AR)826-12
(AF)826122
(AR)826-13
(AF)890121
OVER 100 TONS
OVER 100 TONS
26-100 TONS
25-100 TONS
6-25 TONS
5-25 TONS
(AC PL OV 110 TN)
(A/C PLT OVET 100 TN)
(AC PL-26-100 TN)
(A/C PLT 25<100 TN)
(AC PL 6-25- TN)
(A/C PL 5 TO 25 TN)
4. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM (FIRE ALARM SYS)
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM
(AR)880-50
(AUTO SPNLKR SYS)
(AF)880221
(AUTO FR DTECTN SYS)
TOTAL:NUMBER OF HEADS______________
FOAM FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
(AR)880-60
(AUTO SPNKLR SYS)
(AF)980235
(DRY CHEM SYS)
TOTAL:NUMBER OF HEADS______________
(AR)843-11
FIRE HYDRANTS
(AF)843315
(FR HYDR)
$ ______________________
$ ______________________
$ ______________________
5. UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (INCLUDE. METER
$ ______________________
(AR)812-42
UNGD ELEC DISTR)
(AF)
(SEC DISTR LNE UG)
(AF)890181
(UTIL LNE DUCTS)
TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING:___________L.F OF____IN. CONDUIT
AND_____________CONDUCTOR
Page 7 of 11
HQ Army & Air Force Exchange Service
Design Criteria Manual
EXHIBIT J
ITEMS FOR DD FORM 1354
CATEGORY CODE
(CONTINUED)
DESCRIPTION
6. ELECTRICAL TRANSFORMER
(AR)813-60
(TRANSFORMER)
(AF)812225
(PRIM DISTR LNE UG)
PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMER____________KVA
COST
$ ______________________
7. NATURAL GAS LINE TO BUILDING (INC. METER)
$ ______________________
(AR)824-10
(GAS PIPE LIBE)
(AF)824464
(GAS MAINS)
TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING:____________L.F. OF________IN. PIPE
(MATERIAL:_________________)
8. UNDERGROUND TELEPHONE
$ ______________________
(AR).....
(UNDG TELEPHONE)
(AF)135583
(TEL DUCT FCLTY)
(AF)890181
(UTIL LNE DUCTS)
TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING: ___________L.F. OF________IN. CONDUIT
9. SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM
$ ______________________
(AR)832-10
(SANITARY SEWER)
(AF)932267
(SAN SEWAGE MAIN)
TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING: ___________L.F. OF________IN. PIPE
(MATERIAL: _________________)
10. GREASE INTERCEPTOR
(AR)833-90
(LOCAL DESCRIPTION)
CAPACITY ___________GALLONS
$ ______________________
11. STORM SEWER SYSTEM
(AR)871-10
(AF)871183
(STORM SEWER)
(STRM DRN DSPL)
TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING:____________L.F. OF________IN. PIPE
(MATERIAL:_________________) TOTAL NUMBER OF DROP INLETS:___________
12. DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM
$ ______________________
(AR)842-10
(WATER PIPE LN P)
(AF)842245
(WTR DISTR MAINS)
TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING :____________L.F. OF________IN. PIPE
(MATERIAL:_________________) (INCLUDING METER & BACK FLOW PREVENTER)
13. LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM
(INCLUDING METER & BACK FLOW PREVENTER)
(AR)871-30
(IRRIGATION FAC)
TOTAL NUMBET OF HEADS_________________
$ ______________________
14. DUMPSTER ENCLOSURE
(AR)833-12
(REFUSE COLL BLD)
TOTAL AREA:_____________S.F.
$ ______________________
Page 8 of 11
HQ Army & Air Force Exchange Service
Design Criteria Manual
EXHIBIT J
ITEMS FOR DD FORM 1354 (CONTINUED)
CATEGORY CODE
DESCRIPTION
COST
15. PAVING (NON ORGANIZATION VEHICLE PARKING)
$ ______________________
(AR)852-15
(NON ORG VEH PRK)
(AF)852262
(VEH PKING N/ORGN)
TOTAL ASPHALT PAVING:___________S.Y. OF __________IN. THICK W/_______IN.
________________BASE MATERIAL
TOTAL CONCRETE PAVING:_________ S.Y. OF __________IN. THICK W/_______IN.
________________BASE MATERIAL
16. CONCRETE WALKS, SLABS & PADS
$ ______________________
(AR)852-20
(SIDEWALK)
(AF)852289
(SIDEWALK) PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC
TOTAL AREA:____________S.F. (EXCLUDING PAVER TILES)
17. CONCRETE CURBS & GUTTERS
(AR)851-10
(ROADS PAVED)
(AF)851143
(CURBS & GUTTERS)
TOTAL AREA:____________L.F.
$ ______________________
18. EXTERIOR SITE LIGHTING (EXT LIGHTING)
(AR)812-30
(EXT LIGHTING)
(AF)812926
(EXTERIOR AREA LTG)
TOTAL NUMBER OF POLES______________________
$ ______________________
19. LANDSCAPING (RELATED LAND IMPROV NB)
(AR)871-75
(RELATED LAND INPROV NB)
$ ______________________
20. GASOLINE DISPENSING SYSTEMS
(AR)411-90
(LOCAL DESCRIPTION)
UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANKS:
NUMBER OF TANKS:_____ SIZE:______ GALLONS
NUMBER OF DISPENSERS:__________
NUMBER OF HOSES:_______________
CANOPY SIZE:______ SF $_________________
KIOSKS: NUMBER________MGFR____________ COST
$ ______________________
21. CHAIN LINK FENCING (FENCE OR WALLS)
(AR)872-10
(FENCE OR WALLS)
(AF)872248
(FENCE INTERIOR)
TOTAL LINEAR FEET:_______________L.F.
$ ______________________
22. TOTAL CONSTRUCTION COSTS:
$ ____________________
$ ______________________
Page 9 of 11
HQ Army & Air Force Exchange Service
Design Criteria Manual
EXHIBIT J
ITEMS FOR DD FORM 1354 (CONTINUED)
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REQUIRED
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
H.V.A.C. UNITS
#
1.
2.
3.
4.
MANUFACTURER
EXHAUST FANS
#
MANUFACTURER
1.
2.
3.
4.
SUPPLY FANS
#
MANUFACTURER
1.
2.
3.
4.
MODEL #
CAPACITY
SERIAL # ___
MODEL #
CAPACITY
SERIAL # ___
MODEL #
CAPACITY
SERIAL # ___
CHILLER
BOILER
HEAT PUMP
ROOFTOP A/C UNITS
DOCK LEVELERS
DOCK SHELTERS
ELECTRICAL
DISTRIBUTION PANELS / LIGHT FIXTURES
ITEM NO
MANUFACTURER
MODEL NUMBER QUANTITY
PLUMBING
#
MANUFACTURER
WATER HEATER
WATER CLOSET
WATER CLOSET (H.C.)
URINAL
LAVATORY
LAVATORY (H.C.)
FLOOR SINKS(___#)
FLOOR DRAINS(___#)
MOP SINK
ROOF DRAINS (___#)
MODEL #
Page 10 of 11
CAPACITY
DESCRIPTION
SERIAL # ___
HQ Army & Air Force Exchange Service
Design Criteria Manual
EXHIBIT J
ITEMS FOR DD FORM 1354 (CONTINUED)
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REQUIRED
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS FOR FOOD ACTIVITIES
ANSUL CHEMICAL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
TYPE OF SYSTEM:____________
TOTAL NUMBER OF:
HEADS_________ AUTOMAN RELEASE_________
REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATIONS___________
SNAP ACTION ASSEMBLIES__________________
MECHANICAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES________’
ITEMS REQUIRED IN CLOSE OUT DOCUMENTS
1. GENERAL CONTRACTOR’S TESTING / TRAINING REPORTS:
A. TEST AND BALANCE REPORT ON MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
B. CERTIFICATION OF GROUNDING (RESISTANCE) POWER
TRANSMISSION
C. INSTRUCTION / TRAINING SESSIONS ON ALL
MECH/ELEC/EQUIPMENT (INCLUDING PARTICIPANTS’ ROSTER)
2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR’S WARRANTY
3. ROOF(S) WARRANTY
4. ELECTRIC WARRANTY
5. HVAC WARRANTY
6. GREENHOUSE WARRANTY
7. TERMITE PROTECTION GUARANTEE
8. GENERAL CONTRACTOR’S STATEMENT ON “NO ASBESTOS BEARING
MATERIALS” USED IN CONSTRUCTION
Page 11 of 11
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01710 – CLEANING
1
GENERAL
1.1
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE
A.
Contractor provide:
1.
2.
1.2
Progress Cleaning.
Final Cleaning.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Specified Elsewhere:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
General Provisions of the Contract.
Section 01010 – Summary of Work.
Section 01045 – Cutting and Patching.
Section 01590 – Field Office & Sheds.
Technical Sections of the Specifications – Cleaning Requirements.
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Standards:
standards:
1.
B.
3.
The Contractor shall be required to comply with OSHA Standards.
The OSHA Standards are subject to change, and such changes may affect the
Contractor in his performance under the contract.
It is the Contractor's responsibility to know such changes, effective dates of changes,
and comply with all requirements.
Hazards Control:
1.
2.
3.
D.
The Corps of Engineers Manual, EM 385-1-1, latest edition, entitled: "General Safety
Requirements", as referred to in General Provisions, Paragraph: Accident
Prevention.
O.S.H.A. Standards:
1.
2.
C.
Maintain project in accordance with the following safety and insurance
Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers and remove from premises daily.
Prevent accumulation of wastes that create hazardous conditions.
Provide adequate ventilation during the use of volatile or noxious substances.
Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-pollution
laws.
1.
2.
3.
Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on the installation.
Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner in storm
or sanitary drains.
Do not dispose of wastes into streams or waterways.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Use only cleaning materials recommended by the manufacturer of the surface to be
cleaned.
B.
Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.
CLEANING
01710-1
3
EXECUTION
3.1
PROGRESS CLEANING
A.
Execute cleaning to ensure that the building, grounds, and public properties are maintained
free from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish.
B.
Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition.
C.
Wet down dry materials and rubbish to lay dust and prevent blowing dust.
D.
Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site and legally dispose of at public or
private dumping areas off of Government property in accordance with Sections 01420.
E.
Vacuum clean interior building areas when ready to receive finish painting, and continue
cleaning to eliminate dust.
F.
Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible.
1.
2.
G.
3.2
Do not drop or throw materials from heights.
Open free-fall chutes are not permitted.
Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from the
cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
FINAL CLEANING
A.
Employ professional cleaners for final cleaning.
B.
In preparation for substantial completion or occupancy, conduct final inspection of sightexposed interior and exterior surfaces and of concealed spaces.
C.
Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, temporary labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials
from sight-exposed interior and exterior finished surfaces; polish surfaces so designated to
shine; finish vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.
D.
Repair, patch, and touch-up marred surfaces to specified finish, to match adjacent surfaces.
E.
Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.
F.
Broom clean paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of grounds.
G.
Clean all glass.
H.
Replace air conditioning filters if units were operated during construction.
I.
Clean ducts, blowers, and coils, if air H.V.A.C. units were operated without filters during
construction.
J.
Maintain cleaning until project, or portion thereof, is occupied by AAFES.
END 01710.
CLEANING
01710-2
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01720 – PROJECT RECORD
DOCUMENTS
1
GENERAL
1.1
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE
A.
Contractor provide:
1.
2.
1.2
Record as-built Drawing mark-ups.
Record as-built Project Manual mark-ups.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Specified elsewhere:
1.
2.
1.3
Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.
Section 01700 – Project Closeout.
MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS
A.
Maintain at job site, one copy of:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Contract Drawings.
Specifications.
Addenda.
Reviewed Shop Drawings.
Change Orders.
Other Modifications to Contract.
Field Test Records.
B.
Store documents in field office apart from documents used for construction.
C.
Provide files and racks for storage of documents.
D.
File documents in accordance with Project Filing Format of Uniform Construction Index.
E.
Maintain documents in clean, dry, legible condition.
F.
Do not use record documents for construction purposes.
G.
Make documents available at all times for inspection by Contracting Officer or designated
representative.
1.4
MARKING DEVICES
A.
1.5
Provide red colored pencils for all marking.
RECORDING
A.
Label each document "PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENT" in 2-inch high printed letters.
B.
Keep record documents current.
C.
Do not permanently conceal any work until required information has been recorded.
D.
Contract Drawings: Legibly mark to record actual construction.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01720-1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
Specifications and Amendments: Legibly mark up each Section to record:
1.
2.
1.6
Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to first floor level.
Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities and appurtenances referenced
to permanent surface improvements.
Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction referenced
to visible and accessible features of structure.
Field changes of dimension and detail.
Changes made by change order or field order.
Details not on original contract drawings.
Changes made by Change Order or Field Order.
Other matters not originally specified.
SUBMITTAL
A.
At completion of Project, transmit one (1) complete edited set of As-Built Record Document
mark-ups to the Architect-Engineer for preparation of formal record documents.
B.
Architect-Engineer will correct original Drawing and Project Manual files using Contractor
furnished mark-ups.
C.
Accompany submittal with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Date.
Project title and number.
Contractor's name and address.
Title and number of each record document.
Certification that each document as submitted is complete and accurate.
Signature of Contractor, or his authorized representative.
Architect-Engineer will deliver corrected As-Build Record Documents to Contracting Officer
and Ft. Bragg DPW after Project Closeout.
1.
AAFES:
a.
b.
2.
Two (2) sets.
One (1) CD.
Ft. Bragg DPW: Two (2) sets.
END 01720.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01720-2
DIVISION 2 – SITE WORK
Section 02070 – Selective Demolition
1.
GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDES
A.
Base Bid:
1.
Contractor provide selective demolition of designated existing interior Building
elements indicated:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
2.
Architectural casework, countertops and pass-through counter.
Hollow metal pass-through counter window frame and glazing.
Hollow metal door frames.
Aluminum storefront framing and glazing.
Acoustical tile ceiling grid and suspension systems.
Gypsum drywall bulkhead soffit and metal drywall stud framing.
HVAC, sprinkler, fire alarm and electrical construction commensurate with
demolition of original Customer Service area.
Floor finishes, base trim, corner guards and adhesives.
Wall finishes, gypsum drywall and metal drywall stud partitions.
Polished concrete slab-on-grade floor finishes in preparation to receive new
floor finishes.
Dyed black accent banding finish at polished concrete floor slab-on-grade in
preparation to receive new floor finishes.
Contractor provide temporary removal and protection of designated existing
interior Building elements for salvage and installation in new construction:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Wood doors and door hardware.
Wall mounted signage.
Lighting fixtures.
Power poles.
Sprinkler heads.
Modular cash vault and vault door.
1.)
2.)
3.)
3.
Contractor provide permanent removal of existing interior Building elements for
salvage and delivery to AAFES for storage:
a.
b.
B.
AAFES will assign a designated contractor to disassemble, move and
reconstruct cash vault and vault door in new location.
Contractor shall use AAFES designated contractor to accomplish this
work.
Contractor shall include in his proposal the cost for all work performed
by the AAFES designated contractor.
24" x 24" acoustical tile ceiling pads.
24" x 48" acoustical tile ceiling pads.
AAFES will provide temporary removal of the following existing interior Building elements
for reuse in new construction:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Office furnishings.
POS/Customer Service casework.
POS/Checkout station and Tobacco corral.
Retail shelving units and gondolas.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02070-1
C.
Each Subcontractor:
a.
b.
1.2
Provide temporary shoring, bracing, underpinning and other means
necessary to protect existing structure and building elements to remain during
demolition of their respective parts.
Coordinate phasing of Work with Contracting Officer or designated
representative and AAFES Store Manager to minimize disturbance of normal
operation.
RELATED WORK
A.
Specified elsewhere:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
1.3
Section 01010 – Summary of Work.
Section 01051 – Grades, Lines & Levels.
Section 01060 – AAFES Safety Policies & Procedures.
Section 01090 – AAFES Safety Regulations & Codes.
Section 01140 – Phasing.
Section 01310 – Project Management & Coordination.
Section 01320 – Construction Progress Schedules.
Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.
Section 01420 – Environmental Protection.
Section 01500 – Temporary Facilities, Barriers and Controls.
Section 01720 – Project Record Drawings.
Section 03356 – Polished Concrete Floor Finish.
Section 08100 – Metal Doors & Frames.
Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall Systems.
Division 13 – Special Construction.
Division 15 – Mechanical.
Division 16 – Electrical.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit demolition and removal procedures and schedule in accord with Sections 01310
and 01340.
B.
Submit record drawings in accord with 01720.
1.4
EXISTING CONDITIONS
A.
This Project will be constructed at an occupied Military retail facility:
1.
2.
B.
AAFES will occupy the entire facility for the purpose of normal operations during
construction of Work.
Contractor shall be required to phase construction in order to maintain normal
operations at all times during construction activities.
Hazardous Materials (HazMats):
1.
2.
No HazMats are anticipated to be encountered in the construction of this Work.
AAFES has been provided documentation confirming the Work area to be free of
any known controlled HazMats.
a.
b.
Contractor shall confirm all materials to be disturbed during construction of
this Project and obtain clearance from Ft. Bragg DPW Environmental.
Contractor shall also refer to Section 01420, Environmental Protection prior to
commencement of demolition operations.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02070-2
C.
Environmentally Controlled Materials:
1.
It is not anticipated that environmentally controlled materials will be encountered in
construction of this work such as:
a.
b.
c.
2.
D.
Polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) lighting ballasts.
Mercury containing lamps.
Ozone depleting refrigerants.
If encountered Contractor shall handle environmentally controlled materials as
indicated in Sections 01010 and 01420 and deliver to Ft. Bragg DPW
Environmental for disposal on Post.
Should the Contractor encounter other suspect hazardous materials not identified above
during performance of the Work, including asbestos or lead based paint materials, stop
Work immediately.
1.
2.
Make immediate notifications to Ft. Bragg DPW Environmental and the
Contracting Officer.
Refer to Sections 01010 and 01420 for information pertaining to encounter of
potentially hazardous materials.
E.
Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent building areas.
F.
Maintain protected and secure egress and access to site and building at all times.
G.
Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices in accord with
Sections 01420 and 01500.
2.
PRODUCTS (Not applicable.)
3.
EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Locate all feeder wiring, branch circuits, piping, conduit and other mechanical and
electrical runs prior to commencement of Construction activities.
B.
Execute cutting and patching in accordance with these Specifications.
C.
Protect existing items not indicated to be demolished.
D.
Disconnect and remove designated mechanical and electrical runs within demolition
areas and permanently cap services shown on drawings to be abandoned in place.
E.
Mark location of disconnected utility and branch services and indicate capping locations
on Project Record Documents in accord with Section 01720.
3.2
SALVAGED ITEMS
A.
Temporarily removed items scheduled for reuse shall be salvaged, stored and protected
from damage prior to restoration work.
1.
B.
Salvaged items shall be free from damage due to removal and storage operations
at time of reinstallation in Work.
Permanently removed items scheduled to be salvaged shall be delivered to AAFES and
loaded on site for AAFES transportation to storage facility.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02070-3
3.3
EXECUTION
A.
Demolish in an orderly and careful manner.
1.
2.
B.
Except where noted otherwise, immediately remove demolished materials from site.
1.
2.
C.
Protect supporting structural members and existing construction to remain.
Coordinate patching with requirements of Section 01045 and technical Sections of
the Project Manual.
Deliver any PCB containing lighting ballasts to Installation for disposal.
Deliver mercury containing lamps to Installation for disposal.
Remove materials to be salvaged and reinstalled or retained in manner to prevent
damage.
1.
2.
Protect in a manner to maintain in original condition at time of construction.
Store salvaged items in accord with Section 01620.
D.
Remove and promptly dispose of contaminated, vermin infested, or dangerous materials
encountered in compliance with all regulatory requirements and laws, whether
referenced herein or not.
E.
Do not burn or bury materials on site.
F.
Upon completion of work:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove demolished materials from site as work progresses.
Leave areas in clean condition.
Reinstall salvaged items as indicated.
Prepare existing surfaces and materials to remain to receive new construction.
END 02070.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02070-4
DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE
Section 03354 – INTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB
REPAIR & JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT
1
GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDES
A.
Base Bid:
1.
Contractor provide repair work to designated portion of existing concrete slab
scheduled to receive new polished surface finish including:
a.
Joint filler removal and replacement, with or without metal keyway.
1.)
Contractor is to provide unit price per linear foot, as indicated in
Section 01026, Unit Prices, for joint filler removal and replacement
based on the following formula:
a)
b.
Spalled joint repair or joint with metal keyway (less than ¾”).
1.)
Contractor is to provide unit price per linear foot, as indicated in
Section 01026, Unit Prices, for keyway segment removal and filler
installation based on the following formula:
a)
c.
Contractor is to provide unit price per linear foot, as indicated in
Section 01026, Unit Prices, for keyway segment and self leveling
component removal and repair material installation based on the
following formula:
a)
Total Polished Area x 0.08 = Total Projected Square Feet of
keyway segment and self leveling compound removal and repair
material installation to be Included and Broken Out in Bid.
Crack repair.
1.)
Contractor is to provide unit price per linear foot, as indicated in
Section 01026, Unit Prices, for crack cleaning and filling based on the
following formula:
a)
e.
Total Polished Area x 0.08 = Total Projected Linear Feet of
keyway segment removal to be Included and Broken Out in Bid.
Spalled joint repair, joint with metal keyway or self leveling compound
removal (greater than ¾”)
1.)
d.
Total Polished Area x 0.14 = Total Projected Linear Feet of Joint
Filler Removal and Replacement to be Included and Broken Out
in Bid.
Total Polished Area x 0.03 = Total Projected Linear Feet of
Crack Repair to be Included and Broken Out in Bid.
Surface defect repair, including pop-outs, spalls and gouges.
1.)
Contractor is to provide unit price per occurrence, as indicated in
Section 01026, Unit Prices, for pop-out and spall repair based on the
following formula.
INTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB
REPAIR & JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT
03354-1
a)
b)
f.
Surface embed repair including cleanouts, in-floor electrical outlets and
Walker Duct access holes.
1.)
Contractor is to provide unit price per occurrence, as indicated in
Section 01026, Unit Prices, for over-coring cleanouts, in-floor
electrical outlets and Walker Duct access holes based on the
following formula:
a)
g.
Contractor is to provide unit price per square foot, as indicated in
Section 01026, Unit Prices, for large area surface repair of rough
surface, or removal and replacement of existing underlayments > ¼”
in thickness.
a)
Contractor is to provide unit price per square foot, as indicated in
Section 01026, Unit Prices, for grout coat surface enhancement
based on the following formula:
a)
Total Polished Area x 0.10 = Total Projected Square Feet of
Grout Coat to be Included and Broken Out in Bid.
Full grind, densify and polish portions of the project not currently indicated on
the drawings.
1.)
Contractor is to provide unit price per square foot, as indicated in
Section 01026, Unit Prices, to provide a Full Grind, Densify and Polish
for portions of the project not currently indicated on the drawings.
a)
1.2
¼” Minimum Thick Self-leveling Topping shall be included as a
Unit Cost.
Grout coat surface enhancement, including micro-pin holes, pitting and other
shallow surface deficiencies.
1.)
i.
Total Polished Area x 0.001 = Total Projected Occurrences of 4”
average diameter x ½” Deep Pop-Outs or Spalls to be Included
and Broken Out in the Bid.
Large area surface repair, existing underlayment removal and replacement.
1.)
h.
Total Polished Area x 0.025 = Total Projected Occurrences of ¾”
to 1 ½” Diameter x ½” Deep Pop-Outs or Spalls to be Included
and Broken Out in the Bid.
Total Polished Area x 0.025 = Total Projected Occurrences of 1
½” to 3” Diameter x ½” Deep Pop-Outs or Spalls to be Included
and Broken Out in the Bid.
Full Grind, Densify and Polish to be Included as a Unit Cost.
RELATED WORK
A.
Specified Elsewhere:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Section 01026 – Unit Prices.
Section 01500 – Temporary Facilities & Controls.
Section 01710 – Cleaning.
Section 02070 – Selective Demolition.
Section 03356 – Polished Concrete Floor Finish.
Division 15 – Mechanical.
Division 16 – Electrical.
INTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB
REPAIR & JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT
03354-2
B.
Related work specified elsewhere:
1.
2.
1.3
Joint sealant installation, coloration with dye, surface finishing and polishing of
existing and new concrete slabs exposed to view are specified in Section 03356.
Standard joint sealants are specified in Section 07920, Building and Paving Joint
Sealers.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 01340 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for Submittals.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Provide scaled layout drawing of all existing control and expansion joints.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
C.
Show walls, columns and other elements in dimensional relationship to control and
expansion joints.
Joint Filler Installer Qualification Certification:
1.
Company branch or regional office shall provide a list of five projects.
a.
b.
c.
2.
D.
1.4
Minimum Scale: 1/8” = 1’-0”
Indicate expansion or control joint type.
Indicate perimeter and condition of unforeseen patches in existing floor slab.
In phased construction, estimate probable locations for joints that are covered
by finish materials and update drawing as project progresses.
Resubmit for review with each phased update.
Successful completion shall have been within the last three years for projects
of similar type, size and complexity as this contract.
Provide project names, addresses, contact names and phone numbers for
each project.
General Contractor shall validate the abilities of the subcontractor prior to
submitting a bid for this project.
Submit letter of certification, identifying specific individuals that are currently
certified installers of the specified materials and are familiar with proper
procedures and installation methods as required by the specified product
manufacturers.
Product data for: All products and primary equipment used for repair of existing
concrete slab defects.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
AAFES reserves the right to engage the services of a Concrete Consultant to review,
observe and inspect the work in progress.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Limit and control damage from excessive dust caused by demolition, preparation, and
installation of all Work.
B.
Limit and control damage from moisture.
C.
All replaced concrete shall be cured a minimum of 8 days prior to joint filler installation.
INTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB
REPAIR & JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT
03354-3
D.
Concrete repair area shall be closed to traffic during preparation and repair for a time as
recommended by manufacturer.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Polyurea Joint Filler: Rapid setting, two-component polyurea polymer liquid of 100%
solids content, Shore hardness 60-65, compatible with construction materials in contact:
1.
2.
3.
Products shall be provided in a complementary color to match Polished Concrete
finish after polishing.
Colors shall be reviewed and approved by AAFES Project Manager in Mock-up.
Acceptable products:
a.
b.
c.
B.
Joint Filler Stain Preventing Film:
1.
C.
SPF, Metzger/McGuire.
Low Viscosity Crack and Spall Repair:
1.
2.
3.
Provided crack and spall repair products in color in order to attain color match
Polished Concrete finish after polishing.
Colors shall be reviewed and approved by AAFES Project Manager in Mock-up.
Acceptable products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
D.
SL/60 Polyurea, VersaFlex Incorporated.
RS65 Polyurea, Metzger/McGuire.
HT-PE65 Polyurea, Hi-Tech Systems.
Quick-Mender, VersaFlex Incorporated.
Rapid ReFloor, Metzger/McGuire.
HT Spall-FX2, Hi-Tech Systems.
10 Minute Mender or Matchcrete, Roadware.
Wide Area Surface Repair:
1.
2.
Color shall be reviewed and approved by AAFES Project Manager in Mock-up.
Acceptable products:
1.)
2.)
E.
Pin Hole and Surface Pitting Grout Coat:
1.
2.
Color shall be reviewed and approved by AAFES Project Manager in Mock-up.
Acceptable products:
1.)
2.)
3.)
2.2
TRU Self Leveling, CTS Cement Manufacturing Corporation.
Diama-Top, Ardex Engineered Cements.
GM 3000, Husqvarna Construction Products.
StarSeal Fusion, Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.
Diama-Fill, Ardex Engineered Cements.
EQUIPMENT
A.
Dust extraction system for grinding/sawing:
1.
2.
HEPA filtration vacuum, designed for use with all hand tools when grinding or
sawing concrete (minimum 125CFM air flow).
Provide one of the following:
INTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB
REPAIR & JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT
03354-4
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
Joint Filler Removal and Preparation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Humpback Cutter Complete, Joe Due.
Dust Buggy, U.S. Saws.
The Mongoose, Egrave-a-Crete.
Approved equal.
Crack Repair:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
26D, HTC.
S2400, Pullman-Ermator.
Bull 50, SASE Company, Inc.
Approved equal.
5” Dustmizer 007, Joe Due.
5” Crack Attacker, Joe Due.
7” Handheld Crack Chaser, Joe Due.
SawTec 5” Tile Vac, U.S. Saws.
SawTec 7” Crac-Vac, U.S. Saws.
Approved equal.
Surface Grinder:
1.
2.
Handheld 4”-7” electric surface grinder with dustless shroud/housing.
Acceptable equipment:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Dust Avenger 5, Joe Due.
Dust Avenger 7, Joe Due.
SawTec 5” Grinder Vac, U.S. Saws.
SawTec 7” Grinder Vac, U.S. Saws.
Approved equal.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
An evaluation of the existing floor slab shall be conducted, identifying all defects.
1.
2.
Scope of repairs shall be confirmed by the AAFES Project Manager, Architect of
Record, or AAFES Concrete Consultant prior to commencement of work.
Identify scope of work on Floor Polishing Plan as required by Section 03356,
Polished Concrete Floor Finish.
B.
Repairs shall not be conducted until Unit Price in attached Worksheet has been
reviewed and approved by the AAFES Contracting Officer.
C.
Repairs exceeding the Estimated Scope of Repairs developed in the attached
Worksheet and included in the Base Bid must be approved by the AAFES Contracting
Officer prior to executing the work in any new Phase.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Protect surface of slab immediately adjacent to defect under repair.
INTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB
REPAIR & JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT
03354-5
3.3
JOINT MILLING AND CAP FILLER REPLACEMENT (Refer to Associated Detail on
Drawings)
A.
If existing joint filler is sound and resting on top of saw cut shelf, mill top 1/2" of material
and refill with specified Polyurea joint filler.
B.
Re-saw the joint to a minimum depth of 1/2” with a dry-cut, vacuum-equipped saw using
a slightly oversized blade.
1.
2.
The blade width should be sufficient to encapsulate the widest spall along a given
contraction joint segment.
Produce a sharp corner on each side of the joint with a minimum of two passes
through the joint.
C.
Refill with Polyurea joint filler material from the bottom up, taking care not to entrap large
air bubbles per manufacturer’s recommendation.
D.
Slightly overfill and shave flush to the surface, prior to grinding process.
E.
Ensure that after grinding, the joint is cut smooth and flush with the finish floor surface,
without concave or intermittent, darkened profile.
3.4
FULL DEPTH JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT (Refer to Associated Detail on Drawings)
A.
If existing joint filler is loose, easily removed, or able to be forced downward with a hand
tool, remove all filler material from joint and refill.
B.
Re-saw joint full depth with a dry-cut, vacuum-equipped saw using a slightly oversized
blade.
1.
2.
The blade width should be sufficient to encapsulate the widest spall along a given
contraction joint segment to produce a sharp corner on each side of the joint with a
minimum of two passes through the joint.
Remove all filler material, debris, and laitance.
C.
Refill with Polyurea joint filler material from the bottom up, taking care not to entrap large
air bubbles per manufacturer’s recommendation.
D.
Slightly overfill and shave flush to the surface prior to grinding process.
E.
Ensure that after grinding, the joint is cut smooth and flush with the finish floor surface,
without concave or intermittent, darkened profile.
3.5
NARROW SPALLED JOINT REPAIR OR JOINT WITH METAL KEYWAY (LESS THAN
¾”) (Refer to Associated Detail on Drawings)
A.
For joints that are spalled, are constructed with metal keys, or have radius tooled edges
not exceeding ¾” in width at slab surface.
1.
Re-saw the joint edge to a minimum depth of ¾” with a dry-cut, vacuum-equipped
saw allowing removal of the widest spall (or top of radius) along a given joint
segment to produce a sharp corner on each side of the joint with a minimum of two
passes through joint.
2.
Clean joint of loose concrete, metal key fragments, joint filler, laitance, dirt, debris,
backer rod, etc.
INTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB
REPAIR & JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT
03354-6
3.
4.
Joints must be free of all visible moisture.
Ensure filler penetrates the irregular aggregate interlock portion of the sawn
contraction joint as indicated on drawing detail, re-establishing the aggregate
interlock that may have been lost due to shrinkage, curling, and lack of
reinforcement.
B.
Fill joint cavity with specified Polyurea joint filler per manufacturer’s instructions, taking
care not to entrap large air bubbles.
C.
Overfill joint slightly and shave flush to slab surface prior to grinding process.
3.6
WIDE SPALLED JOINT REPAIR (GREATER THAN ¾”) (Refer to Associated Detail on
Drawings)
A.
For joints that are spalled, contain metal key or self-leveling floor material that exceeds
¾” in width at slab surface.
B.
Re-saw the joint edge to a minimum depth of 1/4” with a dry-cut, vacuum-equipped
shaver/leveler allowing removal of the widest spall or non-linear keyway along a given
joint segment.
1.
2.
Produce a sharp corner on each side of the joint with a minimum of two passes
through joint.
Maintain consistent width of repair to within 1/2 inch in 10 feet.
C.
Overfill repair cavity with overlay material per manufacturer’s instructions and grind flush
to slab surface.
D.
After repair has cured, and prior to any traffic on patched surface, re-saw original slab
joint(s) ¾” in depth to honor joint and fill full depth with Polyurea joint filler per
manufacturer’s instructions.
3.7
CRACK REPAIR (Refer to Associated Detail on Drawings)
A.
Crack width less than 1/32” without surface spalling.
1.
2.
B.
Do not repair.
Grout coat may be used to fill thin hairline deficiencies.
Cracks from 1/32” to ¼” in width.
1.
Clean crack cavity.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove loose concrete, dirt and debris from crack with a wire brush or hand
grinder with twisted wire wheel attachment, 1/2'” minimum depth, ensuring
crack sidewall is clean.
Remove any loose segments, including islands formed by crack, with sharp
tool.
Use methods that will not widen existing crack.
Vacuum crack to remove all dirt, debris and other laitance.
Mask slab surface along crack as necessary to minimize overfill.
Choose material color that closely matches the adjacent floor.
Install low viscosity crack and spall repair material in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
Repeat until all voids are filled and material crowns slab surface.
INTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB
REPAIR & JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT
03354-7
a.
b.
c.
6.
3.8
Do not flood area around crack.
Watch for bubble formation and out gassing.
Do not allow material to gel before adding additional material.
Shave or grind material flush to surface as stipulated by manufacturer.
SURFACE SPALLING REPAIR (Refer to Associated Detail on Drawings)
A.
For slab surface that is chipped and spalled, where the deficiency is ½” in length or width
up to 3” in length or width, by ½” in depth.
1.
Route edge of spall to provide 1/8” deep square edge or 30° edge (consult
manufacturer’s data sheet for specific surface preparation instructions).
a.
b.
B.
Use small hand grinder with maximum 5” diameter dry diamond blade and
vacuum system attachment.
Do not overcut slots into existing slab surface.
Clean and prep spalled cavity.
1.
2.
Wire brush spalled surface to remove all dirt and laitance.
Mask slab at perimeter of spall with tape.
C.
Install low viscosity crack and spall repair material.
D.
Polish over repair area with diamond disks to blend surface.
1.
2.
E.
NOTE:
1.
2.
F.
For inconsistent, varying spalled joints that comply with the measurements in this
Section, a form material may be needed to temporarily form and support the
vertical face of spalled joint edge.
Ensure that the repair material will not adhere to the form and the rigid repair
material does not fuse the joint together.
For cleanouts, in-floor electric outlets and Walker Duct access plates:
1.
2.
3.9
Feather filler material into the adjacent concrete floor surface.
With 2000 grit disk and firm pressure, add a few burn marks to mottle surface to
blend with adjacent floor surface.
Over-core around perimeter of existing embed by ½” in width and depth.
Install low viscosity crack and spall repair materials.
BOLT HOLE/CONDUIT REPAIR
A.
For slab surfaces containing surface or sub-surface bolts, bolt-hole voids, conduit or
subsurface conduit.
1.
Recess steel bolt or conduit a minimum of ½” below finish floor by either punching
or cutting.
a.
B.
Verify with General Contractor prior to cutting into active electrical or
communication conduit.
For spall fractured edges less than 30 degrees, square edge to a minimum 1/8” depth
with either a drill bit, chisel or edge grinder.
1.
2.
Clean cavity of all debris and laitance with drill activated, brass wire wheel.
Vacuum hole to remove all dirt, debris and other laitance.
INTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB
REPAIR & JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT
03354-8
3.
4.
5.
3.10
Dispense low viscosity crack and spall repair at moderate pace using steady
pressure.
Dispense material into void, refilling as necessary to produce slight crown.
Grind material flush to slab surface per manufacturer’s instructions.
LARGE SURFACE REPAIR, UNDERLAYMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
A.
For slab surfaces containing wide-area irregular rough surfaces greater than 3” in width
and length such as irregular coarse aggregate surfaces or surfaces with existing tile or
carpet underlayments > ¼” in thickness.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Mix and install overlay material in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
1.
2.
C.
3.11
Define edge perimeter with diamond masonry wheel or shaver/leveler to produce
sharp edge, at least 1/8” deep.
Roughen base surface using shaver/leveler to ICRI CSP 3 – 5 and vacuum clean.
Wire brush to remove any small loose material and vacuum again.
Place repair material in floor surface defect, float level or leave slightly proud of
existing floor.
Grind, densify and polish to match adjacent concrete.
Re-establish original concrete slab joints by sawing completely through patch and refilling with Polyurea joint filler prior to exposure to traffic.
SMALL SURFACE PITTING, PINHOLE REPAIR, GROUT COAT (Refer to Associated
Detail on Drawings)
A.
For surfaces consisting of micro-deficiencies, pin holes, hairline cracks and other surface
clutter that impedes the achievement of the specified overall gloss values.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Clean pitted sections with 90-degree angle grinder equipped with wire wheel to
remove all dirt/laitance.
Wheel should be run over defect in multiple directions to ensure proper cleaning.
Vacuum prepared pitted sections.
Install and disperse grout coat using GM 3000, StarSeal Fusion, or Diama-Fill in
accordance with manufacturer’s directions.
1.
2.
Ensure a thin, uniform layer of repair material covers the pitted areas.
Refill any low spots as needed.
C.
Grind or polish flush with metal or resin-bond diamonds, ensuring repair material is flush
with slab surface.
D.
Repeat repairs in areas as required if repair material pulls out of defects.
E.
Apply required applications and polish smooth to meet specified overall gloss values.
3.12
PROTECTION
A.
Protect surfaces of finished floor.
B.
Prohibit traffic until floor repairs have received final approval by Owner.
INTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB
REPAIR & JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT
03354-9
WORKSHEET
INTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB ENHANCEMENT, REPAIR AND JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT
(To Be Turned in with Sub-Contractor’s Bid Behind Form 4450-024, Page 2)
ENTER TOTAL AREA TO BE POLISHED:
AREA FROM
ABOVE
ITEM
MULTIPLIER
SQUARE FEET
UNIT RATE TOTAL COST
TOTAL FROM
INCLUDED IN INCLUDED IN
MULTIPLIER
BID
BID
…..SAMPLE CALCULATION…..NOT PART OF BID…..
Joint Filler Removal
and Replacement
36,000
0.14
5014 LF
$2.75 / LF
$13,788.50
…..DO NOT INCLUDE SAMPLE CALCULATION COST IN BID…..
1. Joint Filler
Removal and
Replacement
2. Spalled joint repair
or joint with metal
keyway (less than ¾”)
3. Spalled joint repair,
joint with metal keyway
or self-leveling
compound removal
(greater than ¾”)
4. Crack repair
5a. Surface defect
repair, including popouts, spalls, and
gouges ¾” – 1 ½” DIA
5b. Surface defect
repair, including popouts, spalls, and
gouges 1 ½” – 3” DIA
6. Surface embed
repair, including
cleanouts, in-floor
electrical outlets and
Walker Duct access
holes
7. Large surface
repair, existing
underlayment removal
and replacement with
¼” Polished Overlay
__________
0.14
_________LF
$ _______ /LF
$ _________
__________
0.08
_________LF
$ _______ /LF
$ _________
$ _______ /LF
__________
0.03
_________LF
$ _______ /LF
$ _________
__________
0.025
_____ UNITS
$ _______ /EA
$ _________
__________
0.025
_____ UNITS
$ _______ /EA
$ _________
__________
0.001
_____ UNITS
$ _______ /EA
$ _________
INTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB
REPAIR & JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT
$ _______ /SF
03354-10
8. Grout coat surface
enhancement,
including micro-pin
holes, pitting and other
shallow surface
deficiencies
9. Full Grind, Densify
and Polish portions of
the project not
currently indicated on
the drawings
__________
0.10
_________SF
$ _______ /SF
END 03354
INTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB
REPAIR & JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT
$ _______ /SF
03354-11
$ _________
DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE
Section 03356 – POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR
FINISH
1
GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDES
A.
Base Bid:
1.
Contractor provide:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Final preparation of existing concrete surface including removal of original
floor finish materials and adhesives.
Removal of previously dyed black accent banding indicated.
Removal of curing compounds, wax, sealers and other protective surface
treatments to facilitate final surface finishing and polishing.
Installation of polished concrete floor system for existing interior concrete
floors by dry grinding.
1.)
2.)
3.)
4.)
e.
1.2
Application of concrete densifier.
Polishing with various size grit metal-bonded and resin-bonded
diamonds to the scheduled specified minimum local and overall gloss
values.
Dying of black accent banding indicated.
Application of final stain guard sealer.
Installation of joint sealants.
RELATED WORK
A.
Specified Elsewhere:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
Installed but specified elsewhere:
1.
1.3
Section 01340 – Submittals.
Section 01440 – Testing Laboratory Services.
Section 01550 – Temporary Facilities & Controls.
Section 01740 – Cleaning.
Section 02070 – Selective Demolition.
Section 03354 – Interior Concrete Slab Repair & Joint Filler Replacement.
Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers.
Division 9 – Finishes.
Division 15 – Mechanical.
Division 16 – Electrical.
Joint sealants are specified in this Section and Section 07920, Building and Paving
Joint Sealers for installation under this Section.
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI/NFSI – Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of
hard surface flooring, including polished concrete, by the Horizontal Dynamometer PullMeter Method.
B.
ASTM D 523 – Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss.
C.
NFSI - National Floor Safety Institute; Test Method 101A; current edition.
POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH
03356-1
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Comply with Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.
B.
Product Data:
1.
Provide manufacturer's product data for polishing equipment including, but not
limited to:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
Provide manufacturer’s chemical and product data sheets including, but not limited
to:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
C.
2.
3.
1.5
Provide list of 5 projects performed with last three years of similar type, size and
complexity.
Submit project names, addresses, contacts and phone numbers for each project.
Contractor shall validate references and polisher’s capabilities prior to submitting
proposal to AAFES.
Applicator Qualifications: Submit letter of certification from each of the following
manufacturers of all products and equipment specified herein, stating that the applicator
is a certified applicator of the system and is familiar with proper procedures and
installation methods as required by the manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
E.
Liquid reactive surface densifier.
Liquid stain guard treatment.
Joint filler.
Crack and spall repair product.
Self leveling polishable overlay product.
Grout coat, pin hole and small defect surface treatment.
Installer’s Certification:
1.
D.
Planetary grinder polishing equipment.
Planetary grinder HEPA dust collection equipment.
Hand tools.
Hand tool dust collection equipment.
Diamond tooling.
High speed propane burnisher.
Polyurea pump.
Joint cutting saw.
Planetary grinder system.
Liquid reactive surface densifier and stain guard treatment.
Joint filler, crack and spall repair products.
Maintenance Manual: Submit installer’s maintenance manual, including maintenance
and cleaning instructions for polished concrete floor system in Operation and
Maintenance Manuals upon Final Completion of work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Regulatory Requirements:
1.
Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of the Americans
with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAGs) for Buildings and Facilities;
Final Guidelines, revisions, and updates for static coefficient of friction for walkway
surfaces.
POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH
03356-2
2.
Environmental Requirements:
a.
b.
B.
Comply with current Federal and local toxicity and air quality regulations and
with Federal requirements on content of lead, mercury, and other heavy
metals.
Do not use solvents in floor polish products that contribute to air pollution or
impact food quality.
Pre-installation Meeting:
1.
Contractor shall schedule and convene a pre-installation meeting at the project site
before start of installation of polished concrete floor system.
a.
b.
Meeting to occur only after review and approval of required Sub-contractor
submittals and completion of test panel mock-up including specified grinding,
polishing, joint filling, spall and crack repairs and specified overall gloss
values are achieved.
Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this Section, including:
1.)
2.)
3.)
4.)
5.)
6.)
2.
Meeting agenda to include, but not limited to:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
1.6
AAFES Project Manager.
AAFES Store Manager or Assistant Manager.
Architect-Engineer.
AAFES’ Polishing Consultant.
General Contractor.
Polishing Subcontractor including Project Manager and Foreman.
Review of existing conditions.
Surface preparation.
System installations.
Field quality control.
Protection.
Environmental requirements.
Coordination with other work.
Controls to limit damage from dust.
Field quality control methods and reporting.
MOCK-UP
A.
Provide polished concrete floor finish mock-up, 250 square foot minimum size,
illustrating completed finish, all specified liquid surface treatments and specified gloss
levels.
B.
Mock-up will include properly repaired surface spalls, slab joints and slab edge
treatments per Section 03354.
C.
Locate mock-up
representative.
D.
Accepted mock-up will serve as standard to judge quality and workmanship of
completed polished concrete floor finish.
E.
Accepted mock-up of existing concrete slab may remain as part of finished floor system
subject to compliance with specified requirements and approval.
where
directed by
POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH
AAFES
03356-3
Project
Manager
or
designated
F.
Mock-up shall be approved by AAFES Contracting Officer or designated representative
and AAFES Concrete Finish Consultant.
G.
Non-compliant work shall be corrected and approved before Contractor continues with
work.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Sequence application of concrete polishing after completion of other construction
activities that would be damaging to completed polished finish.
B.
Close areas to traffic during and after floor application for time period recommended in
writing by manufacturer.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
INSTALLERS
A.
All bidding Contractors shall have completed AAFES in-house certification for this
Project.
PRE-APPROVED APPLICATOR LIST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
Phone Number
Region Covered
American Concrete Inc.
Ardor Solutions
Bomanite of North Texas
Budget Maintenance Concrete
Diama-Shield
Jeffco Concrete Contractors
K & J Concrete Polishing
Pacific Decorative Concrete
Perfect Polish Inc
Stone Care of Texas
877.775.0030
843.900.1100
800.492.2524
610.323.7702
888.730.4075
800.226.2668
865.971.1760
916.725.9269
877.917.4463
210.656.8019
U.S.A.
Southwest
Northeast
North
Southeast
Southeast
West
U.S.A.
South
Refer to specifications Division 1 for substitution qualifications.
1.
2.2
Company Name
Substitutions must be submitted to Contracting Officer in writing a minimum of 10days prior to Solicitation closing date.
EQUIPMENT TO BE USED FOR INSTALLATION
A.
Floor Grinder:
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
HTC.
SASE.
Concrete Polishing Solutions.
Husqvarna.
Diamatic.
PrepMaster.
Type: Multi-orbital, planetary-action, opposing-rotational, 3 or 4 diamond-headed
floor grinders.
3.
Weight: 850 pounds or more.
4.
Grinding Pressure: 600 pounds minimum.
POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH
03356-4
B.
Dust Extraction System and pre-separator for grinding/polishing: Heavy-duty industrial
HEPA filtration vacuum system, suitable for extracting and containing large quantities of
fine concrete dust (minimum 350 CFM air flow) in conjunction with manufacturer
recommended pre-separator:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
HTC 86D.
Pullman-Ermator T8600.
SASE Bull 1250.
Equal approved in advance.
Diamond Tooling for Coating Removal, Initial Grinding, and Preparing Floor for
Polishing:
1.
Metal Bonded Diamonds:
a.
D.
Diamond Tooling for Polishing Concrete:
1.
Resin Bonded, Phenolic Diamonds:
a.
E.
Grit Size: 40, 80 and 150.
Grit Size: 100, 200, 400, 800 and 1500 or equivalent.
Grinding / Polishing Pads for Edges:
1.
Grit Size: 80, 100, 120, 200, 400, 800, 1500 and 3000.
F.
Hand Grinder with dust extraction attachment and pads.
G.
Joint Cutting Saw with dust extraction attachment:
1.
2.
3.
H.
Self-propelled Shaver/Leveler for slab surface demolition and leveling:
1.
2.
I.
Minimum 27 inch head generating pad speeds of 2,500 RPM or higher.
Diamond Impregnated Burnisher Pads:
1.
2.
3.
2.3
SuperShaver, CPS.
BMC 335 Shaver, Diamatic.
High speed propane burnisher:
1.
J.
Hump Back, Joe Due.
Dust Buggy, US Saws.
The Mongoose, Engrave-a-Crete.
Twister Diamond Cleaning System Pads, HTC.
Diamond Polishing Pads, Norton.
SpinFlex Diamond Polishing Pads, CPS.
MATERIALS
A.
Penetrating Hardener/Densifier: Clear liquid reactive lithium-silicate based:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
RetroPlate 99, Advanced Floor Products.
FGS Permashine, L & M Construction Chemicals.
Consolideck LS, Prosoco.
SureLock Densifier, Ameripolish.
No substitutions will be accepted.
Protective Surface Treatment (Stain Guard):
POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH
03356-5
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
SureLock Stain Protector, Ameripolish.
Consolideck LS Guard, Prosoco.
RetroGuard, Advanced Floor Products.
FGS Stain Protection, L & M Construction Chemicals.
No substitutions will be accepted.
C.
Solvent-base dye color: AmeriPolish Solvent-based Dye – "Midnight Black".
D.
Joint Filler: Products shall be provided in a complementary darker color to match
Polished Concrete finish after polishing.
1.
2.
3.
4.
RS65 Polyurea, Metzger McGuire.
HT-PE65 Polyurea, Hi-Tech Systems.
SL/65 Polyurea, VersaFlex Incorporated.
Colors shall be matched as closely as possible using Sherwin-Williams paint color
chart.
a.
E.
Crack and Spall Repair: Products shall be provided in a complementary color to match
Polished Concrete finish after polishing.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
Rapid Refloor, Metzger McGuire.
HT Spall-FX2, Hi-Tech Systems.
Quick-Mender, VersaFlex Incorporated.
10 Minute Mender or Matchcrete, Roadware
Colors shall be reviewed and approved by Contracting Officer or designated
representative in Mock-up.
Wide Area Surface Repairs:
1.
2.
3.
G.
Manufacturer shall produce product to match this color selection.
TRU Self Leveling, CTS Cement Manufacturing Corporation.
Diama-Top, Ardex Engineered Cements.
Colors shall be reviewed and approved by Contracting Officer or designated
representative in Mock-up.
Pin Hole and Surface Pitting Grout Coat:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
GM 3000, Husqvarna Construction Products.
StarSeal Fusion, Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.
Diama-Fill, Ardex Engineered Cements.
Equal approved in advance.
Colors shall be reviewed and approved by Contracting Officer or designated
representative in Mock-up.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine floor to receive polished concrete floor system.
B.
Notify the Contracting Officer of conditions that would adversely affect installation or
subsequent use prior to commencement of polishing.
C.
Do not begin surface preparation or installation until conditions are corrected and
approved.
D.
Verify the Following for new floor slabs:
POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH
03356-6
1.
2.
Floor Finish: Wide channel floated, smooth, pan, combination blade and plastic
blade finished floor from edge to edge, with no rough areas.
Floor and Joints:
a.
b.
3.
Concrete Curing:
a.
b.
4.
3.2
Free of debris and excessive dirt, dust, clay, and mud.
Dry.
Minimum 7 days disposable wet curing blankets or removable dissipating
curing compound applied.
Concrete shall be cured for 14-days minimum before start of grinding
process.
Concrete Adjacent to Floor Penetrations: Troweled flat and level with surrounding
concrete.
SURFACE PREPARATION
A.
Protection: Protect surrounding areas and adjacent surfaces from the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Minimal accumulation of dust from grinding and polishing.
Contact with overspray of penetrating hardener / densifier.
Contact with overspray of protective surface treatment (stain guard).
Contact with joint filler, crack or spall repair materials.
B.
On existing concrete floors, completely remove existing flooring, mastics, adhesives,
self-leveling underlayment fillers and other foreign matter.
C.
On existing concrete floors, remove the top half of an inch of existing joint material and
replace with approved joint filler and crack repair products.
D.
Completely remove cure/seal compounds on new concrete floor slabs installed under
Section 03300.
E.
Clean Surfaces: Remove dirt, dust, debris, oil, grease, curing agents, bond breakers,
paint, coatings, and other surface contaminants that could adversely affect installation of
polished concrete floor system.
F.
Fill concrete joints in accordance with Section 07920.
G.
Repair all slab defects and joints in accordance with Section 03354.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Install polished concrete floor system in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions at
locations indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Aggregate Exposure:
1.
C.
Fine Aggregate: Mottled salt-and-pepper aggregate exposure.
Polished Concrete Floor System
1.
Open Slab Surface:
a.
As required to provide a uniform final polish or removal of existing floor
coatings.
POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH
03356-7
1.)
2.)
3.)
b.
Review condition of floor with AAFES Project Manager.
1.)
2.)
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Progressive edge grinding will be necessary to within ½” of all vertical
abutments, including walls, cases, columns, posts and racking systems.
Joint filler and spall repairs shall be flush with surface after grinding and
polishing steps.
Additional passes along curled joints may be necessary to even the surfaces
and remove joint filler chatter.
Remove 150-grit metal-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with a
transitional diamond per manufacturer’s recommendations.
Remove transitional resin-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with 100grit resin-bonded diamonds.
Remove 100-grit resin-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with 200-grit
resin-bonded diamonds.
Remove 200-grit resin-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with 400-grit
resin-bonded diamonds.
Remove 400-grit resin-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with 800-grit
resin-bonded diamonds.
Remove 800-grit resin-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with 1500-grit
resin-bonded diamonds.
Apply Stain Guard:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
6.
Obtain approval from AAFES Project Manager if large coarse
aggregate is required to be exposed to remove existing coatings, floor
underlayment or slab deficiencies.
Variations to the precise grinding, densifying, polishing and stain
guard application are anticipated, but shall be discussed and
approved in writing by the AAFES Project Manager prior to executing
the work.
Remove metal-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with progressively finer
metal-bonded diamonds up to metal bond 150-grit.
Apply densifier per manufacturer’s written instructions and based on acceptance of
the product by the concrete.
Floor Polishing:
a.
5.
Begin grinding with 40 or 80-grit metal-bonded diamonds.
For new concrete floor slabs, open up concrete by grinding with 80grit metal-bonded diamonds.
Expose coarse concrete aggregate only when required to level low
spots within floor surface.
Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions.
Apply first coat per manufacturer’s recommendation (DO NOT OVER
APPLY).
Use applicator pad, pre-wetted with stain guard, to pull material out to create
a thin film prior to drying.
Remove product completely from areas of over application, as evidenced by
surface streaking, and replace with unused stain guard.
Apply second coat of stain guard at all areas per manufacturer’s instructions.
High speed burnish:
a.
After each application of stain guard is dry, burnish surface.
POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH
03356-8
b.
c.
Burnish using approved pads at a slow movement pace using high-speed
machine with 400 or 800 grit diamond impregnated pads as required to
achieve specified gloss requirements.
Burnish with several passes.
1.)
d.
D.
Burnishing, pad type, and pace of forward movement shall combine to
develop a minimum floor surface temperature of 91-degrees F directly below
the burnishing pad as continuously measured by the operator during
installation.
Penetrating Dye:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.4
Make each progressive pass at 90 degrees from previous pass.
Mix dye in accordance with installer’s instructions.
Apply penetrating dye to borders and logo as indicated after 200 or 400-grit resinbonded
diamond-grinding
step
in
accordance
with
manufacturer’s
recommendations and approved mock-up.
Do not apply dye to areas indicated for “Natural Concrete” finish.
Thoroughly auto-scrub surface clean of excess dye residue in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
Repeat application of penetrating dye if acceptable color is not achieved due to
porosity of floor or darker color is desired.
Apply AmeriPolish “Midnight Blackcolor where indicated prior to sealing and in
coordination with floor polishing specified.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect completed polished concrete floor system with the Contracting Officer or
designated representative, Contractor and Installer.
B.
Review procedures with Contracting Officer or designated representative to correct
unacceptable areas of completed polished concrete floor system.
C.
Specular Gloss/Reflectance, ASTM D 523:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Perform polishing and burnishing work necessary to produce a Specified Overall
Gloss Value (SOGV) ≥ 50 prior to applying protective surface treatment, SOGV ≥
60 after applying protective surface treatment and Minimum Local Gloss Value
(MLGV) ≥ 40 after applying protective surface treatment as measured using a
Horiba IG-320, 60 Degree Gloss Checker.
Gloss shall be considered as a quantitative value that expresses the degree of
reflection when light hits the concrete floor surface.
Gloss measurements will be taken independent of ambient lighting and will be
taken within a sealed measurement window located beneath the test unit.
A minimum of 12 readings will be collected.
a.
b.
c.
3.5
High and low measurements will be discarded and the remaining
measurements averaged.
Average calculated value shall exceed specified SOGV.
No single measurement value less than the specified MLGV will be accepted.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect completed polished concrete floor system from damage until Substantial
Completion.
POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH
03356-9
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Do not allow vehicle and pedestrian traffic on unprotected floor.
Do not allow construction materials, equipment, and tools on unprotected floor.
Prohibit parking of vehicles on concrete slab.
If construction equipment must be used for application, diaper components that
might drip oil, hydraulic fluid, or other liquids.
No tire embedments (rocks, nails, screws, etc.) that will scratch or pit slab surface.
Prohibit pipe cutting using pipe cutting machinery on concrete slab.
Prohibit temporary placement and storage of steel members on concrete slab.
Prohibit acids and acidic detergents from contacting concrete surfaces.
Cover concrete floors with drop cloths or use breathable drop cloths during
painting.
If paint is spilled on concrete floor, remove paint immediately.
Protect slab surface from moisture for 72 hours to prevent re-emulsification of
surface treatment prior to cure.
B.
Immediately remove mortar splatter, spilled liquids, oil, grease, paint, coatings, and other
surface contaminants, which could adversely affect completed polished concrete floor
system.
C.
Repair damaged areas of completed polished concrete floor system to satisfaction of
Contracting Officer.
END 03356
POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH
03356-10
DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS
Section 06100 –ROUGH CARPENTRY
1
GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDES
A.
Base Bid:
1.
Contractor provide:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
1.2
All performance rated and non-rated wood construction panels.
All wood backup for anchoring wall hung/supported fixtures, accessories and
specialties.
All wood blocking, nailers, grounds and supports.
Rough hardware needed for proper installation of all carpentry.
All labor to complete installation of normal rough carpentry items furnished
under this and other Sections of the Project Manual.
RELATED WORK
A.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Installed but furnished and specified elsewhere:
1.
1.3
Division 1 – General Requirements.
Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry.
Section 06400 – Architectural Woodwork.
Section 07270 – Firestopping.
Section 08100 – Metal Doors & Frames.
Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall Systems.
Division 10 – Specialties.
Blocking and backing for AF/AI and AF/CI shelving, equipment and accessory
items indicated on drawings shall be installed under this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Lumber grading rules and wood species to conform to Voluntary Product Standard PS
20-70; Grading rules of the following associations apply to materials furnished under this
section.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Plywood grading rules:
1.
C.
Northeastern Lumber Manufacturer's Association, Inc.(NELMA).
Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB).
West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB).
Western Wood Products Association (WWPA).
Northern Hardwood and Pine Manufacturer's Association (NHPMA).
Softwood Plywood - Construction and Industrial: Product Standard PSI-66.
Grade Marks: Identify all lumber and plywood by official grade marks:
1.
Lumber: Grade stamp to contain symbol of grading agency, mill number or name,
grade of lumber, species or species grouping or combination designation, rules
under which graded, where applicable and condition of seasoning at time of
manufacture.
a.
b.
S-GRN: Unseasoned.
S-DRY: Maximum 19% moisture content.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100-1
c.
d.
2.
Softwood Plywood - Appropriate grade trademark of the American Plywood
Association.
a.
b.
1.4
MC-15 or KD: Maximum of 15% moisture content.
Dense.
Type, grade, class and identification index.
Inspection and testing agency mark.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials with grade marks and labels intact and legible.
B.
Store materials under cover and in dry location in accord with Section 01620.
a.
b.
c.
1.5
Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces.
Stack lumber and plywood to provide for air circulation within and around
stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar
materials.
Take special precautions to place spacers between each bundle of lumber
and plywood that has been pressure treated with waterborne chemicals to
facilitate air circulation.
WORKMANSHIP QUALITY
A.
Workmanship for rough carpentry shall be in accordance with requirements of National
Lumber Manufacturer's Association.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2
Cut members square on bearings and fit closely.
Set accurately to lines, levels and plumb.
Secure rigidly in place at bearings and connections.
Provide expansion anchors, sleeve anchors and masonry screw anchors for
fastening into concrete or masonry substrates.
PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIAL
A.
Lumber:
1.
Dimensions:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
Specified lumber dimensions are nominal.
Actual dimensions conform to industry standards established by American
Lumber Standards Committee and rules writing agencies.
Moisture Content: Kiln dried to 15% maximum at time of installation.
Surfacing: Surface four sides (S4S) unless specified otherwise.
All framing lumber and blocking, 2 inches to 4 inches thick, 2 inches to 12 inches
wide, Douglas Fir/Larch or Southern Pine:
a.
b.
c.
Economy grade shall not be used.
Plates, blocking, bracing, bulk heads, nailers, and general utility purposes:
Construction grade or better.
Strength of materials:
1.)
Light framing/blocking, “Construction” grade, 2” to 4” thick, 2” to 4”
wide.
a)
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Allowable extreme fiber stress in bending (Fb): 1250 psi.
06100-2
b)
c)
2.)
Structural framing, “No. 2” grade, 2” to 4” thick, 5” and wider.
a)
b)
c)
B.
Allowable extreme fiber stress in bending (Fb): 1500 psi.
Modulus of Elasticity (E): 1,600,000 psi.
Compression ** to grain (Fc): 1200 psi.
Plywood:
1.
Concealed APA performance rated construction panels to support shelving and
other equipment and accessory items:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Thickness: 23/32” (3/4" nominal).
Exposure durability classification: EXPOSURE 1.
Span rating: 48/24.
Edge configuration: Square.
Exposed construction panels for backing, APA rated (C/D) plugged and painted:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.2
Modulus of Elasticity (E): 1,500,000 psi.
Compression ** to grain (Fc): 1300 psi.
Thickness: 23/32” (3/4” nominal).
Exposure durability classification: EXTERIOR.
Span rating: 48/24.
Edge configuration: Square.
BOARDS
A.
Exposed Boards: Where boards will be exposed in the finished work, provide the
following:
1.
2.
B.
Moisture Content: 15 percent maximum, (S-DRY or KD-15).
Provide Western Red Cedar, “C Select/A all Heart” grade per WWPA rules for all
exposed installations.
Concealed Boards: Where boards will be concealed by other work, provide the following:
1.
2.
Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum, (S-DRY or KD-19).
Provide the following species and grades:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
C.
2.3
Redwood “Construction Common” per RIS rules.
Southern Pine “No. 2 Boards” per SPIB rules.
Any species graded “Construction Boards” or “No. 3 Common” per WCLIB or
WWPA rules.
Redwood “Merchantable” per RIS rules.
Southern Pine “No. 2 Boards” per SPIB rules.
Any species graded “Standard” or “No. 3 Common Boards” per WCLIB or
WWPA rules.
Board Sizes: Provide nominal or actual sizes as indicated.
MISCELLANEOUS FASTENERS AND HARDWARE
A.
Rough hardware needed for proper installation of all carpentry items shall be provided.
B.
Nails, Spikes and Staples: Hot-dipped galvanized, stainless steel or aluminum for
exterior locations and high humidity locations; size and type to suit application; staples
shall not be used for fastening wood structurally.
C.
Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Medium carbon-steel; sized to suit
application; galvanized for exterior locations and high humidity locations.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100-3
D.
Expansion Type Anchors: Plastic or non-ferrous metal type plug inserts designed to
expand when screw and lag bolt type anchors are secured shall be used for fastening
light-duty installations to solid or hollow masonry or concrete.
E.
Drill-In Screw Anchors: Self-tapping screw type anchors, flat head TORX or Phillips
driving recess, ¼” nominal diameter, triobular cold formed thread design, stainless steel
(exterior) or zinc plated/coated (interior) in length and material as indicated.
F.
Drill-In Adhesive Anchor Systems: Hybrid adhesive consisting of a methacrylate resin,
hardener, cement and water designed for fast curing in a wide range of solid base
material temperatures from 104º F. to 23º F. developed as a system in conjunction with
various bolt, threaded rod and deformed rod anchors.
G.
Drill-In Expansion Anchors: Expansion anchors complying with FS FF-S-325, Group VIII
(anchors, expansion, (non-drilling), Type I (internally threaded tubular expansion
anchor); and machine bolts complying with FS FF-B-575, Grade 5, stainless steel
(exterior) or zinc plated (interior) in embedment length and material as indicated.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Blocking and all other carpentry items shall be laid out as called for by drawings and
shall be cut and fitted as necessitated by conditions encountered.
B.
All work shall be plumbed, leveled and braced with sufficient nails, spikes, bolts, etc., to
ensure rigidity.
1.
2.
C.
Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as
indicated.
Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.
Use galvanized wire nails, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side with
be exposed.
Make tight connections between members.
Install fasteners without splitting of wood; pre-drill as required.
D.
All pieces of wood or other carpentry material with a defect or defects that prevent it from
serving its intended purpose satisfactorily, including crooked, warped, bowed, or
otherwise defective material, even if within the limits of grade specified, will be rejected
and shall be replaced with an acceptable piece.
E.
Verify that surfaces to receive rough carpentry materials are prepared to exact
requirements, dimensions and as detailed since installation of rough carpentry materials
constitutes acceptance of surface conditions.
F.
Frame wood members to a close fit.
1.
2.
G.
Set accurately to required lines and levels and secure rigidly in place in
accordance with details.
Cut and fit framing, blocking, and furring to accommodate other work as required.
Coordinate requirements for connecting wood blocking and framing with structural steel
fabricator to ensure the holes are properly punched at designated or adequate spacing
to support and attach rough carpentry items.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100-4
H.
3.2
Coordinate requirements for connecting wood blocking and plating with requirements for
setting anchor bolts specified under Section 05500, Metal Fabrications and installed
under Sections 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete and 04200, Unit Masonry.
WOOD BLOCKING, PLATES, NAILERS, GROUNDS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Blocking shall be sizes and shapes indicated on details and as required by conditions
encountered.
B.
Install wood blocking, plates, nailers, grounds and supports where shown and where
required for attachment of other work.
1.
2.
C.
Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading.
1.
2.
3.
3.3
Provide and form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of
work to be attached.
Coordinate location with other work involved in systems.
Countersink screw anchors, bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise
indicated.
Hooked anchor bolts shall be used as indicated to attach wood plates to concrete
or masonry structure.
Provide wedge type sleeve anchors only where indicated or to attach
miscellaneous blocking and plating to concrete or masonry.
INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A.
General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in Form No. E30, “APA
Design/Construction Guide – Residential & Commercial,” for types of construction
panels and application indicated.
B.
Fastening Methods: fasten panels as indicated below:
1.
Backing Panels: #10 TEK screws to metal drywall stud framing.
a.
b.
3.4
Provide wood or light gauge steel angle support for backing panels securely
fastened to sides of light gauge metal framing with screws to allow backing
panels to nest between studs.
Fasten backer panels to support at edges using screws at maximum spacing
of 8” centers or as necessary to support applied loads.
ADJUST AND CLEAN
A.
Remove from site all rubbish, debris and packaging produced by operations and leave
site in a "broom-clean" condition.
B.
Adjust all working items to fit snugly yet work freely.
C.
Confirm blocking heights and locations and make adjustments as required for proper
installation of other items of work.
3.5
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed items of other trades from damage during construction.
B.
Protect completed work from damage until project is completed and accepted.
END 06100.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100-5
DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS
Section 06200 – FINISH CARPENTRY
1
GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDES
A.
Base Bid:
1.
Contractor provide:
a.
b.
c.
d.
1.2
Installation of Contractor furnished casework items indicated.
Installation of AAFES furnished ViraWall shelving indicated.
Installation of all miscellaneous items and wood trim associated with finish
carpentry.
Rough hardware needed for proper installation of finish carpentry items.
RELATED WORK
A.
Specified elsewhere:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Installed but furnished and specified elsewhere:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Division 1 – General Requirements.
Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry.
Section 06400 – Architectural Woodwork.
Division 8 – Doors & Windows.
Division 9 – Finishes.
Division 10 - Specialties.
AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed items and requirements are specified in
Section 01018 and indicated on Drawings.
Casework items to be installed under this Section are specified in Section 06400,
Architectural Woodwork and indicated on Drawings.
Other items normally associated with finish carpentry installation are specified in
Divisions 8, 9 and 10.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Lumber grading rules and wood species shall conform to Voluntary Product Standard PS
20-70: Grading rules of the following associations apply to materials furnished.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Northeastern Lumber Manufacturer’s Association, Inc. (NELMA).
Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB).
West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB).
Western Wood Products Association (WWPA).
Redwood Inspection Service (RIS).
Northern Hardwood and Pine Manufacturer’s Association (NHPMA).
B.
Hardwood lumber to comply with: National Hardwood Lumber Association (NHLA)
Rules.
C.
Plywood Grading Rules:
1.
2.
D.
Softwood Plywood – Construction and Industrial: Product Standard PS 1/ANSI
A199.1.
Hardwood Plywood: Product Standard PS 51.
Grade Marks: Identify all lumber and plywood by official grade mark:
FINISH CARPENTRY
06200-1
1.
Lumber: Grade stamp to contain symbol of grading agency, mill number or name,
grade of lumber, species or species grouping or combination designation, rules
under which graded, where applicable, and condition of seasoning at time of
manufacture.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
E.
Softwood Plywood: Appropriate grade-mark of the American Plywood Association.
Hardwood Plywood: Appropriate grade-mark of qualified inspection, testing or
grading agency.
Quality Standards of Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) shall apply and by
reference are hereby made a part of this specification.
1.
2.
F.
S-GRN: Unseasoned.
S-DRY: Maximum 19% moisture content.
MC-15 or KD: Maximum 15% moisture content.
Dense.
Any reference to Premium, Custom or Economy, in this specification shall be as
defined in the latest edition of AWI “Quality Standards”.
Any item not given a specific quality grade in this specification shall be Custom
Grade as defined in the latest edition of AWI “Quality Standards”.
Finish Carpentry item manufacturer must have a reputation for doing satisfactory work
on time and shall have successfully completed comparable work.
1.
2.
Regularly and actively engaged in manufacture of this type of work for a period of
10 years.
In addition, manufacturer shall have fabricated work of a similar character and
magnitude, which has been in satisfactory use for at least 7 years.
G.
Finish Carpentry item manufacturer shall be responsible for all details and dimensions
not controlled by job conditions and shall show on his shop drawings all millwork profiles
required.
H.
Contractor and Finish Carpentry item manufacturer shall coordinate to establish and
maintain field dimensions.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
In accord with 01340:
1.
Product data: Submit manufacturer’s product data for each product and process
specified as work of this Section and/or incorporated into finish carpentry items
including:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
Wood species, grade and moisture content.
Fabrication techniques as related to AWI standards.
Finishing techniques.
Installation procedures.
Hardware items.
Certifications: Submit manufacturer’s/fabricator’s certification stating that
fabricated wood items complies with quality grades and AWI requirements
indicated.
Shop drawings:
a.
b.
FINISH CARPENTRY
Miscellaneous trim profiles and quantities.
Other miscellaneous custom fabricated finish carpentry items indicated.
06200-2
4.
Samples:
a.
Miscellaneous Finish Wood Trim:
1.)
2.)
1.5
Three 12-inch long sections of each trim profile.
Submit trim profile samples finished to match other manufacturer
finished wood items.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver and store products in accord with Sections 01600 and 01620.
B.
Protect finish carpentry items during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent
damage, soiling and deterioration.
C.
Do not deliver finish carpentry items until taping, wet work, grinding and similar
operations that could damage, soil or deteriorate items have been completed.
D.
Finish carpentry items shall only be stored in installation areas or areas meeting
requirements specified for installation areas.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Conditioning: Finish carpentry woodwork manufacturer and installer shall advise
Contractor of temperature and humidity requirements for installation of finish carpentry
items.
1.
2.
B.
Requirements shall be identical for storage areas if items are stored prior to
installation.
Do not install finish carpentry items until required temperature and relative
humidity can be established, stabilized and maintained in installation areas.
Maintain temperature and humidity in installation area as required to maintain moisture
content of installed finish carpentry within 1 percent tolerance of optimum moisture
content.
1.
2.
Maintain from date of installation through remainder of construction period.
Contractor shall require finish carpentry woodwork manufacturer to provide written
documentation of optimum moisture content and required temperature and
humidity conditions.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for
moisture content of lumber at time of fabrication and for relative humidity conditions in
the installation areas.
B.
Fabrication: Fabricate wood finish carpentry items to dimensions, profiles and details
indicated with openings and mortises precut, where applicable, to receive hardware and
other items and work.
C.
Finish Edges: Unless indicated otherwise, ease edges of all solid wood or plastic finish
carpentry items as follows:
FINISH CARPENTRY
06200-3
1.
2.
D.
Assembly: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware mortising/fitting and
other work before shipment to project site to maximum extent possible.
1.
2.
E.
2.
2.2
Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation.
Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for field scribing,
trimming and fitting.
Pre-cut Openings: Fabricate finish carpentry items with pre-cut openings, where
possible, to receive hardware, appliances, fixtures, electrical work and similar items.
1.
F.
1/16-inch radius for corners and edges of solid wood or plastic members 1 1/8-inch
actual thickness or less.
1/8-inch radius for edges of solid wood, plastic and similar members over 1 1/8inch actual thickness.
Locate openings accurately and use templates or rough-in diagrams as furnished
by the Contractor for proper size and shape.
Smooth edges of cutoffs and, where located in potentially damp locations, seal
edges of cutouts with water resistant coating.
Measurements: Before proceeding with fabrication of finish wood items required to be
fitted to other construction, obtain field measurements and verify dimensions and shop
drawing details as necessary for accurate fit.
MISCELLANEOUS WOOD TRIM ITEMS
A.
Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section applicable to item indicated.
B.
Comply with the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Grade: Custom.
Lumber Species: Birch.
Finish: AWI Finish System #5.
FASTENERS, ANCHORS AND REINFORCEMENT
A.
Screws: Select material, type, size and finish required for each use.
1.
2.
Comply with FS FF-S-0111 for applicable requirements.
Trim head type screws shall be used where exposed.
B.
Nails: Select material, type, size and finish required for each use and comply with FS
FF-N-105 for applicable requirements.
C.
Anchors: Select material, type, size and finish required by each substrate for secure
anchorage.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Provide non-ferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at
installations subject to moisture for corrosion resistance.
Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors.
Furnish inserts and anchors, as applicable, to be set into concrete or masonry
work for subsequent anchorage of finish carpentry items.
Adhesives: Products as recommended by finish carpentry manufacturer.
FINISH CARPENTRY
06200-4
3
EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Verify that surfaces to receive finish carpentry materials are prepared to exact levels and
dimensions.
B.
Application or installation of materials constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.
C.
Condition finish carpentry items to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation
areas prior to installing.
D.
Prior to installation examine shop-fabricated work for completion, finish, back priming
and removal of all packaging.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Quality Standard: Install wood finish carpentry items to comply with AWI Section 1700
for same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section.
B.
Install wood finish carpentry items plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions.
1.
2.
C.
Shim as required using concealed shims.
Install to a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 8 feet for plumb and level and with no
variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces.
Scribe and cut finish carpentry items to fit adjoining work.
1.
2.
Repair damaged wood surfaces at cuts.
Coordinate installations with installation specified in other Sections of the
specifications.
a.
b.
D.
Anchor wood items to blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates.
1.
2.
E.
Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners
and blind nailing as required for a complete installation.
Except where prefinished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing
nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with wood finish surface to
match final factory applied transparent finish.
Trim shall be installed with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces
from maximum length of finish wood available.
1.
2.
F.
Fit and protect wood finish carpentry items prior to installation of adjacent
work and equipment.
Remove protection from wood items after completion of work by other trades
that might damage finishes or installation.
Stagger joints in adjacent and related members.
Cope at returns, miter at corners and comply with referenced Quality Standards for
joinery.
Install all miscellaneous trim and mouldings required and all related finish carpentry
items indicated for a complete job.
FINISH CARPENTRY
06200-5
3.3
ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION
A.
Repair damaged and defective finish carpentry items where possible to eliminate defects
functionally and visually.
1.
Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
2.
Where repair does not produce visual or functional deficiencies, replace finish
carpentry items.
B.
Clean, lubricate and adjust hardware.
C.
Clean all finish carpentry items on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces.
D.
Touch-up finishes at field fabricated joints and wood filler at fastener heads using finish
materials as recommended by finish carpentry woodwork manufacturer to produce final
finish that matches factory finish in every respect.
E.
Buff and polish exposed surfaces of solid surface plastic items to remove superficial
scratches and apply liquid sealer to provide a smooth, scratch resistant finish.
F.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer
and installer that ensures finish carpentry items to remain, without damage or
deterioration, until final acceptance by Contracting Officer.
3.4
CLEANING UP
A.
Keep the premises in a neat, safe, and orderly condition at all times during execution of
this portion of the work, free from accumulation of sawdust, cut-ends, and debris.
B.
Sweeping:
1.
2.
3.
At the end of each working day, and more often if necessary, thoroughly sweep
surfaces where refuse from this portion of the work has settled.
Remove the refuse to the area of the job site set aside for its disposal.
Upon completion of this portion of the work, thoroughly broom clean all surfaces.
END 06200.
FINISH CARPENTRY
06200-6
DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS
Section 06400 – ARCHITECTURAL
WOODWORK
1
GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDES
A.
Base Bid:
1.
Contractor provide:
a.
b.
c.
d.
1.2
Factory finished plastic laminate countertops, nosings and splash.
Countertop support brackets.
Rough and finish hardware items for casework.
Miscellaneous wood finish items and trim indicated in drawings.
RELATED WORK
A.
Specified elsewhere:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related work specified elsewhere:
1.
2.
3.
C.
1.3
Division 1 – General Requirements.
Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry.
Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry.
Division 9 - Finishes.
Division 16 – Electrical.
Coordinate blocking and backing required for supporting work of this Section with
requirements specified in Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.
Trim, moldings and installation of miscellaneous Architectural Woodwork items are
specified in Section 06200, Finish Carpentry.
Coordinate work of this Section with work of Section 09250, Gypsum Drywall
Systems.
AAFES Furnished/Contractor installed items are listed in Section 01018 and indicated on
Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Architectural Woodwork manufacturer shall have a reputation for doing satisfactory work
on time and shall have successfully completed comparable work.
1.
2.
B.
Regularly and actively engaged in manufacture of this type of work for a period of
10 years.
Woodwork manufacturer shall, in addition have fabricated work of a similar
character and magnitude, and which has been in satisfactory use for at least 7
years.
Architectural Woodwork manufacturer shall provide single-source responsibility to
assume undivided responsibility for architectural woodwork and finish specified in this
Section including:
1.
2.
3.
Fabrication.
Finishing.
Field installation.
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06400-1
C.
Architectural Woodwork manufacturer shall be responsible for all details and dimensions
not controlled by job conditions and shall show on Shop Drawings all millwork profiles
required.
D.
Contractor and Custom Woodwork manufacturer shall:
1.
2.
1.4
Coordinate and cooperate to establish and maintain field dimensions.
Coordinate with Contracting Officer or designated representative for fabrication
and installation of equipment.
REFERENCES
A.
Lumber grading rules and wood species shall conform to Voluntary Product Standard PS
20-70: Grading rules of the following associations apply to materials furnished.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Northeastern Lumber Manufacturer’s Association, Inc. (NELMA).
Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB).
West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB).
Western Wood Products Association (WWPA).
Redwood Inspection Service (RIS).
Northern Hardwood and Pine Manufacturer’s Association (NHPMA).
B.
Hardwood lumber to comply with: National Hardwood Lumber Association (NHLA)
Rules.
C.
Plywood Grading Rules:
1.
2.
D.
Softwood Plywood – Construction and Industrial: Product Standard PS 1/ANSI
A199.1.
Hardwood Plywood: Product Standard PS 51.
Grade Marks: Identify all lumber and plywood by official grade mark:
1.
Lumber: Grade stamp to contain symbol of grading agency, mill number or name,
grade of lumber, species or species grouping or combination designation, rules
under which graded, where applicable, and condition of seasoning at time of
manufacture.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
E.
Softwood Plywood: Appropriate grade-mark of the American Plywood Association.
Hardwood Plywood: Appropriate grademark of qualified inspection, testing or
grading agency.
Quality Standards of Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) shall apply and by
reference are hereby made a part of this specification.
1.
2.
1.5
S-GRN: Unseasoned.
S-DRY: Maximum 19% moisture content.
MC-15 or KD: Maximum 15% moisture content.
Dense.
Any reference to Premium, Custom or Economy, in this specification shall be as
defined in the latest edition of AWI “Quality Standards”.
Any item not given a specific quality grade in this specification shall be Custom
Grade as defined in the latest edition of AWI “Quality Standards”.
SUBMITTALS
A.
In accord with 01340:
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06400-2
1.
Product data: Submit manufacturer’s product data for each product and process
specified as work of this Section and/or incorporated into finish carpentry items
including:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
Substrate wood grade and moisture content.
Plastic laminate grades.
Fabrication techniques as related to AWI standards.
Installation procedures.
Hardware and support brackets.
Certifications: Submit manufacturer’s/fabricator’s certification stating that
fabricated wood items complies with quality grades and AWI requirements
indicated.
Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings illustrating the following:
a.
b.
c.
Location of each item.
Dimensioned plans and elevations.
Large scale details illustrating:
1.)
2.)
3.)
d.
e.
f.
4.
Internal and external attachment devices.
Finish hardware.
Other miscellaneous components.
Samples:
a.
1.6
Construction of item.
Relationship of attached components.
Relationship to other finish components of construction including
walls, floors and equipment.
High Pressure (HP) plastic laminate: (2) 3 inch by 5 inch pieces of final
laminate selection for each type, color, pattern and surface finish selected.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver and store products in accord with Sections 01600 and 01620.
B.
Protect woodwork items during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent
damage, soiling and deterioration.
C.
Do not deliver woodwork items until taping, wet work, grinding and similar operations
that could damage, soil or deteriorate items have been completed.
D.
Woodwork items shall only be stored in installation areas or areas meeting requirements
specified for installation areas.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Conditioning: Woodwork manufacturer shall advise Contractor of temperature and
humidity requirements for installation of woodwork.
1.
2.
Requirements shall be identical for storage areas if items are stored prior to
installation.
Do not install woodwork until required temperature and relative humidity can be
established, stabilized and maintained in installation areas.
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06400-3
B.
Maintain temperature and humidity in installation area as required to maintain moisture
content of installed finish carpentry within 1 percent tolerance of optimum moisture
content.
1.
2.
Maintain from date of installation through remainder of construction period.
Contractor shall require woodwork manufacturer to provide written documentation
of optimum moisture content and required temperature and humidity conditions.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Plastic Laminate: Subject to compliance with requirements provide high pressure
decorative laminates manufactured by the following:
1.
B.
Counter Support Brackets: Subject to compliance with requirements provide counter
support brackets manufactured by the following:
1.
2.2
Wilsonart International.
Knape & Vogt.
GENERAL
A.
Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for
moisture content of lumber at time of fabrication and for relative humidity conditions in
the installation areas.
B.
Fabrication: Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles and details indicated with
openings and mortises precut, where possible, to receive hardware and other items and
work.
C.
Assembly: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware mortising/fitting and
other work before shipment to project site to maximum extent possible.
1.
2.
D.
2.3
Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation.
Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for field scribing,
trimming and fitting.
Measurements: Before proceeding with fabrication of wood finish carpentry items
required to be fitted to other construction, obtain field measurements and verify
dimensions and shop drawing details as necessary for accurate fit.
ARCHITECTURAL COUNTERTOPS
A.
Quality Standards: Comply with AWI Section 400 and Divisions 400B and 400C.
B.
High Pressure Decorative Laminate.
1.
2.
Grade: Premium.
Laminate Cladding for Horizontal Surface:
a.
b.
3.
Color, pattern and finish: Wilsonart Laminate, 4811-60, "Silicon EV".
Laminate grade: Comply with NEMA LD 3, GP-50 (0.050” nominal thickness).
Edge and Splash Treatment:
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06400-4
a.
b.
4.
Counter Support Brackets:
a.
b.
c.
5.
2.4
Edge or nosing treatment on all plastic laminate countertops shall be plastic
laminate with 1/4 inch radius transition from horizontal counter surface to
vertical edge as indicated.
Splash Treatment shall be ¾ inch by 3 ¾ inch standard size with square
transition from horizontal counter surface to vertical splash and 1/2 inch
radius at top of splash return to wall as indicated.
Bracket: Knape & Vogt 208 Series Ultimate L-Bracket.
Size: 22 inches deep x 14.2 inches high x 1 3/16 inches wide.
Color: White.
Provide solid blocking within wall as specified in Section 06100, Rough Carpentry,
to secure counter support brackets using color matched screws as recommended
by manufacturer to achieve load rating of bracket.
MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A.
Screws: Select material, type, size and finish required for each use.
1.
2.
Comply with FS FF-S-0111 for applicable requirements.
Trim head type screws shall be used where exposed.
B.
Nails: Select material, type, size and finish required for each use and comply with FS
FF-N-105 for applicable requirements.
C.
Anchors: Select material, type, size and finish required by each substrate for secure
anchorage.
1.
2.
3.
Provide non-ferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at
installations subject to moisture for corrosion resistance.
Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors.
Furnish inserts and anchors, as applicable, to be set into concrete or masonry
work for subsequent anchorage of finish carpentry items.
D.
Adhesives: Products as recommended by wood finish carpentry manufacturer.
E.
Refer to Section 06100, Rough Carpentry for other fasteners, anchors and reinforcement
necessary for a complete, durable installation.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Verify that surfaces to receive architectural woodwork items are prepared to exact levels
and dimensions.
B.
Application or installation of materials constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.
C.
Condition architectural woodwork items to average prevailing humidity conditions in
installation areas prior to installing.
D.
Prior to installation examine shop fabricated work for completion, finish, back priming
and removal of all packaging.
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06400-5
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Quality Standard: Install wood finish carpentry items to comply with AWI Section 1700
for same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section.
B.
Install woodwork plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions.
1.
2.
C.
Scribe and cut woodwork items to fit adjoining work.
1.
D.
Refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts.
Anchor wood items to blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates.
1.
2.
E.
Shim as required using concealed shims.
Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet for plumb and level and with no variations
in flushness of adjoining surfaces.
Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners
and blind nailing as required for a complete installation.
Except where prefinished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing
nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with wood finish surface to
match final factory applied transparent finish.
Install cabinets without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned.
1.
2.
Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation.
Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
F.
Anchor countertops securely to base units and other support systems indicated.
G.
Complete the finishing work specified as work of this Section, to whatever extent not
completed at shop or prior to installation of woodwork.
H.
Install all miscellaneous trim and mouldings required and all related woodwork items
indicated for a complete job.
3.3
ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION
A.
Repair damaged and defective woodwork items where possible to eliminate defects
functionally and visually.
1.
2.
Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
Where repair does not produce visual or functional deficiencies, replace finish
carpentry items.
B.
Clean, lubricate and adjust hardware.
C.
Clean all finish carpentry items on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces.
D.
Touch-up all shop applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled work.
E.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer
and installer and that ensures woodwork items to remain, without damage or
deterioration, until final acceptance by Contracting Officer or designated representative.
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06400-6
3.4
CLEANING UP
A.
Keep the premises in a neat, safe, and orderly condition at all times during execution of
this portion of the work, free from accumulation of sawdust, cut-ends, and debris.
B.
Sweeping:
1.
2.
3.
At the end of each working day, and more often if necessary, thoroughly sweep
surfaces where refuse from this portion of the work has settled.
Remove the refuse to the area of the job site set aside for its disposal.
Upon completion of this portion of the work, thoroughly broom clean all surfaces.
END 06400.
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06400-7
DIVISION 7 – THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 07270 – FIRESTOPPING
1
GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDES
A.
Base Bid:
1.
2.
Contractor provide coordination of firestopping penetrations on entire project.
Each subcontractor provide:
a.
b.
3.
1.2
Firestopping of own penetrations through rated wall assemblies.
Firestopping of own penetrations through rated ceiling assemblies.
Coordinate all work related to this Section with the DPW Fire Department Office
prior to construction of fire resistive assemblies and installation of firestopping
products.
RELATED WORK
A.
Specified elsewhere:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
1.3
Division 1 – General Requirements.
Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry.
Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall Systems.
Division 15 – Mechanical.
Division 16 – Electrical.
Contractor shall be responsible for construction and sealing perimeters of and
penetrations through fire rated assemblies as indicated herein and specified in Section
09250, Gypsum Drywall.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Provide Firestopping systems that comply with the following requirements and those
specified under paragraph for Performance Requirements.
1.
2.
Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified, testing and inspection agency
such as UL or other agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services
for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Firestopping products shall bear classification marking of qualified testing and
inspection agency.
B.
Engage an experienced installer who is certified, licensed or otherwise qualified by the
Firestopping manufacturer as having been provided the necessary training to install
firestop products per specified requirements.
C.
Obtain firestop systems for each type of penetration or joint opening and construction
condition indicated from a single manufacturer.
1.4
PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A.
Fire Test Requirements:
1.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL):
a.
b.
FIRESTOPPING
ANSI/UL 1479, “Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops”.
ANSI/UL 2079, “Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems”.
07270-1
c.
d.
2.
America Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
ASTM E-814, “Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops”.
ASTM E-1966, “Test Method for Fire Resistive Joint Systems”.
ASTM E-119, “Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials”.
ASTM E-84, “Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials”.
References:
1.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) of Northbrook, IL “Fire Resistance Directory”.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
Through Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ)
Joint Systems (XHBN)
Fill, Void or Cavity Materials (XHHW)
Firestop Devices (XHJI)
Forming Materials (XHKU)
Wall Opening Protective Materials (CLIV)
All major building codes:
a.
b.
C.
ANSI/UL 263, “Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials”.
ANSI/UL 723, “Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials”.
National Building Code published by BOCA.
International Building Code published by ICC.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) of Quincy, MA “NFPA 101: Life Safety
Code”.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) of Quincy, MA “NFPA 70: National
Electrical Code”.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Provide products that upon curing, do not re-emulsify, dissolve, leach, breakdown
or otherwise deteriorate over time from exposure to atmospheric moisture,
sweating pipes, ponding water or other forms of moisture characteristic during and
after construction.
Provide firestop sealants sufficiently flexible to accommodate motion such as pipe
vibration, water hammer, thermal expansion and other normal building movement
without damage to the seal.
Pipe insulation shall not be removed, cut away or otherwise interrupted through
wall or floor openings and provide products appropriately tested for the thickness
and type of insulation utilized.
Openings within walls and floors designed to accommodate communication and
data cabling shall be provided with re-enterable products specifically designed for
retrofit.
Penetrants passing through fire-resistance rated ceiling assemblies contained
within chase wall assemblies shall be protected.
a.
b.
6.
FIRESTOPPING
Provide products tested by being fully exposed to the fire outside of the chase
wall.
Systems within the UL Fire Resistance Directory that meet this criterion are
identified with the words “Chase Wall Optional”.
Provide fire-resistive joint sealants sufficiently flexible to accommodate movement
such as thermal expansion and other normal building movement without damage
to the seal.
07270-2
7.
8.
1.5
Provide fire-resistive joint sealants designed to accommodate a specific range of
movement and tested for this purpose in accordance with a cyclic movement test
criteria as outlined in Standards, ASTM E-1399, ASTM E-1966 or ANSI/ UL 2079.
Provide fire-resistive joint systems subjected to an air leakage test conducted in
accordance with Standard, ANSI/UL2079 with published L-Ratings for ambient and
elevated temperatures as evidence of the ability of the fire-resistive joint system to
restrict the movement of smoke.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of firestopping product indicated.
B.
System Drawings: Submit documentation from a qualified third-party testing agency that
is applicable to each firestopping system configuration for construction, joint opening
width and/or penetrating items.
C.
Product Certificates: Certificate of conformance signed by manufacturers of firestopping
products certifying that products comply with requirements.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING.
A.
Deliver firestopping products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages
with intact and legible manufacturer’s labels identifying product and manufacturer, date
of manufacture and the following in accord with 01600 and 01620:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Lot number.
Shelf life, where applicable.
Qualified testing and inspection agency’s classification marking.
Mixing instructions for multi-component materials.
Store and handle materials for firestopping products to prevent their deterioration or
damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants or other causes.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL
A.
Provide firestopping products that are compatible with one another, with the substrates
forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating through-penetration firestop
systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by firestopping
products manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B.
Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials.
C.
Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the
qualified testing agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems.
2.2
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Subject to compliance with through-penetration firestop systems (XHEZ) and/or joint
systems (XHBN) listed in Volume 2 of the UL Fire Resistance Directory, provide
products of the following manufacturers as identified below:
1.
2.
FIRESTOPPING
Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI)
Somerville, New Jersey
(800) 992-1180
Other manufacturers listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory – Volume 2.
07270-3
2.3
MATERIALS
A.
General: Use only firestopping products that have been tested for specific fireresistance-rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type,
penetrating item type or joint opening width and movement capabilities, annular space
requirements, and fire-rating involved for each separate instance.
B.
Latex Sealants: Single component latex formulations that upon cure do not re-emulsify
during exposure to moisture, the following products are acceptable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled steel collars lined with intumescent material sized
to fit specific outside diameter of penetrating item, the following products are acceptable:
1.
2.
D.
(STI) SpecSeal Series SSM Firestop Mortar.
Silicone Sealants: Moisture curing, single component, silicone elastomeric sealant for
horizontal surfaces (pourable or non-sag) or vertical surface (non-sag), the following
products are acceptable:
1.
2.
I.
(STI) SpecSeal Series SSB Firestop Pillows.
Mortar: Portland cement based dry-mix product formulated for mixing with water at
Project site to form a non-shrinking, water-resistant, homogenous mortar, the following
products are acceptable:
1.
H.
(STI) SpecSeal Series SSP Firestop Putty.
Firestop Pillows: Re-enterable, non-curing, mineral fiber core encapsulated with an
intumescent coating contained in a flame retardant poly bag, the following products are
acceptable:
1.
G.
(STI) SpecSeal Series SSP Firestop Putty Pads.
(STI) SpecSeal Series EP PowerShield Insert Pads.
Firestop Putty: Intumescent, non-hardening, water resistant putties containing no
solvents, inorganic fibers or silicone compounds, the following products are acceptable:
1.
F.
(STI) SpecSeal Series SSC Firestop Collars.
(STI) SpecSeal Series LCC Firestop Collars.
Wall Opening Protective Materials: Intumescent, non-curing pads or inserts for
protection of electrical switch and receptacle boxes to reduce horizontal separation to
less than 24”, the following products are acceptable:
1.
2.
E.
(STI) SpecSeal Series SSS Intumescent Sealant.
(STI) SpecSeal Series LCI Intumescent Sealant.
(STI) SpecSeal Series LC Endothermic Sealant.
(STI) SpecSeal Series AS Elastomeric Spray.
(STI) SpecSeal Series ES Elastomeric Sealant.
(STI) Pensil 300 Silicone Sealant.
(STI) Pensil 300 SL Self-Leveling Silicone Sealant.
Silicone Foam: Multi-component, silicone-based liquid elastomers, that when mixed,
expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, non-shrinking foam, the following
products are acceptable:
1.
FIRESTOPPING
(STI) Pensil 200 Silicone Foam.
07270-4
3
EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Examination of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be
performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.
B.
Surfaces to which firestop materials will be applied shall be free of dirt, grease, oil, scale,
laitance, rust, release agents, water repellents, and any other substances that may
inhibit optimum adhesion.
C.
Provide masking and temporary covering to prevent soiling of adjacent surfaces by
firestopping materials.
D.
Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
FIRESTOPPING INSTALLATION
A.
General Requirements: Install through-penetration firestop systems and fire-resistive
joint systems in accordance with “Performance Criteria” Article and in accordance with
the conditions of testing and classification as specified in the published design.
B.
Manufacturer’s Instructions: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for installation of
firestopping products.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.3
Seal all openings or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air and water
resistant seal.
Consult with appropriate subcontractor prior to installation of through-penetration
firestop systems that might hamper the performance of fire dampers as it pertains
to duct work.
Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic.
Apply a suitable bond-breaker to prevent three-sided adhesion in applications
where this condition might occur such as the intersection of a gypsum
wallboard/steel stud wall to floor or roof assembly where the joint is backed by a
steel ceiling runner or track.
Where joint application is exposed to the elements, fire-resistive joint sealant must
be approved by manufacturer for use in exterior applications and shall comply with
ASTM C-920, “Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants”.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspections: Contractor shall inspect or, at Architect’s direction as an additional cost,
engage a qualified independent inspection agency to inspect through-penetration
firestop systems.
B.
Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Where deficiencies are found, repair or firestopping products so they comply with
requirements.
3.4
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Remove equipment, materials and debris, leaving area in undamaged, clean condition.
B.
Clean all surfaces adjacent to sealed openings to be free of excess firestopping
materials and soiling as work progresses.
END 07270.
FIRESTOPPING
07270-5
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 07920 – BUILDING & PAVING JOINT SEALERS
1.
GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDES
A.
Base Bid:
1.
Contractor provide:
a.
b.
1.2
All caulking of building joints.
All joint fillers and accessories indicated and herein specified.
RELATED WORK
A.
Specified elsewhere:
1.
2.
1.3
Division 1 – General Requirements.
All Sections of the Specifications.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Qualifications of installers: Employ only experienced craftsmen, skilled in the installation
of specified products.
B.
Contractor shall select one manufacturer for all exposed caulking.
1.
2.
C.
1.4
Coordinate purchase of caulking with individual subcontractors so that each trade
will furnish compatible products of the selected manufacturer.
Coordinate installation with individual subcontractors so that methods and colors
for all exposed caulking will match.
Color(s) will be selected by Contracting Officer or designated representative from
standard range of colors available from manufacturer selected by Contractor from
approved list below.
REFERENCES
A.
Industry standards as set forth by the American Society for Testing and Materials
(ASTM).
B.
Manufacturer's Catalogs: The acceptable manufacturer's catalogs, current at date of
bidding documents, are incorporated by reference to the same force and effect as if
repeated herein at length.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit in accordance with Section 01340 and applicable technical Sections.
B.
Product data:
1.
2.
C.
Materials description.
Manufacturer's current printed installation instructions for each product.
Samples: Each compound and joint filler for color selection.
BUILDING & PAVING JOINT SEALERS
07920-1
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver all products in manufacturer's original containers, with seals unbroken, labels,
product and manufacturer's names intact and legible.
B.
Store all products in a manner to prevent damage, in a secure place, out of way of
construction operations and provide protection until ready for use.
C.
Handle in accord with manufacturer's written recommendations.
1.7
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental conditions:
1.
2.
1.8
Weather: Do not install products during adverse weather conditions.
Temperature: Ensure that surface and ambient temperatures are within the range
recommended by the manufacturer.
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
Schedule work to coincide with work of other subcontractors.
B.
Perform work of this Section as soon as possible after permanent installation of products
requiring joint sealants.
1.9
WARRANTY
B.
Two-year warranty on all caulk, joint fillers and related accessories.
C.
Contractor provide written warranty for work furnished, on Contractor’s letterhead, to
Architect at time of Project Close-out in accord with Section 01700.
2.
PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES
A.
Use only the specified products of the following manufacturers:
CODE
1. PECO
2. SON
3. TREM
2.2
MANUFACTURER
Pecora Chemical Corp.
Harleysville, PA
Contech, Inc., Sonneborn Building Products Division
Minneapolis, MN
Tremco Manufacturing Co.
Cleveland, OH
CAULKS
A.
Provide caulking materials as specified for interior use only.
B.
Generic description:
1.
2.
C.
C-1: One part butyl gun grade.
C-2: One part acrylic gun grade.
Acceptable products:
BUILDING & PAVING JOINT SEALERS
07920-2
2.3
MFGR/TYPE
C-1
C-2
1.
2.
3.
Butyl BC 158
Butakauk
Butyl sealant 400/500
AC20 acrylic latex
Sonalac acrylic
Acrylic latex calk
PECO
SON
TREM
JOINT FILLERS
A.
Generic description and use: JF-1: Backer rod for elastomeric sealants.
a.
b.
2.
3.
B.
Extruded closed-cell polyethylene foam or polyethylene
polyurethane foam.
Non-bleeding, non-staining, oversized 30 to 50 percent.
JF-2: Preformed fiber joint filler, asphalt impregnated.
JF-3: Preformed cork expansion joint filler.
Acceptable products:
MFGR/TYPE
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.4
jacketed
DOW
MEAD
SON
WIL
JF-1
Ethafoam
Backer Rod
Sonofoam
Expand-O-Foam
JF-2
JF-3
Fiber E.J.
Sealtight Cork
Sonoflex Cork
JOINT CLEANER
A.
2.5
Joint Cleaner: Type recommended by the manufacturer of the sealing compound for the
specific joint surface and condition.
BOND BREAKER
A.
Bond Breaker: Polyethylene tape; pressure sensitive recommended by manufacturer to
suit application.
3.
EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
Thoroughly inspect all existing construction and the conditions under which the work will
be performed and report to the Architect all conditions that would adversely affect
installation of the work.
B.
Verify that all joint dimensions are in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.
C.
Start of work constitutes acceptance of construction and conditions.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Clean, prepare and size joints in accord with manufacturer's instructions.
1.
2.
3.3
Remove all loose materials and foreign matter using compressed air.
Proof areas to ensure that joint is free of all materials that might impair adhesion of
caulking.
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with caulking manufacturer's printed instructions.
BUILDING & PAVING JOINT SEALERS
07920-3
B.
Install bond breaker tape wherever recommended by manufacturer to ensure that
elastomeric sealants will perform properly.
C.
Install caulking in uniform, continuous ribbons, without gaps or air pockets.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Install caulking to depths indicated or when not indicated, within the following limitations:
1.
E.
For joints filled with caulking compounds, fill joints to a depth in the range of 75
percent to 125 percent of joint width.
Spillage:
1.
2.
3.4
Ensure complete "wetting" of the joints.
Bond surfaces equally on opposite sides.
Fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces.
Do not allow caulking compounds to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces.
Use masking tape or other precautionary devices to prevent staining of adjoining
surfaces.
CURING
A.
3.5
Cure caulking compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions to obtain high
early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability.
ADJUST & CLEAN
A.
Upon completion, carefully examine all sealant and caulking work.
1.
2.
Remove all damaged and defective work.
Replace defective work with new materials.
B.
Clean up and remove all surplus products, containers and rubbish and dispose of off
site.
C.
Remove all spilled or spattered materials from all surfaces.
1.
2.
3.6
When adjacent surfaces or other work has been damaged or stained as a result of
cauling work, repair all damage.
Remove all stains to the satisfaction of the Contracting Office or designated
representative.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed work during remainder of construction period.
B.
Ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration (other than normal wear or
weathering) at substantial completion.
3.7
SCHEDULES
A.
Caulking:
1.
At all interior joints.
a.
b.
2.
Between countertops and walls.
Between dissimilar finish materials.
At other locations noted on drawings or where joint filling is required to provide
neat appearance and transition between materials.
END 07920.
BUILDING & PAVING JOINT SEALERS
07920-4
DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS
Section 08100 – METAL DOORS & FRAMES
1.
GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDES
A.
Base Bid:
1.
Contractor Provide:
a.
Items of hollow metal work and accessories indicated including:
1.)
2.)
3.)
4.)
1.2
Hollow metal frames.
Anchors, strike boxes, mortar guards and accessories required for
proper installation of frames.
Reinforcement for finish hardware.
Template information to frame manufacturer for existing finish
hardware scheduled for reuse to ensure proper machining and
reinforcing of new frames.
RELATED WORK
A.
Specified elsewhere:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
1.3
Division 1 – General Requirements.
Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry.
Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry.
Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers.
Section 08211 – Flush Wood Doors (Installation Only).
Section 08710 – Finish Hardware (Installation Only).
Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall Systems.
Section 09900 – Painting.
Contractor shall inventory existing finish hardware items scheduled for reuse, removed
from existing frames under Section 02070, and shall furnish necessary template
information to hollow metal frame manufacturer for proper mortising, machining and
reinforcing of new frames to receiving existing hardware without field modification to
existing hardware or doors.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Regulatory Requirements:
1.
2.
B.
Comply with provisions of the “Americans with Disabilities Act” (ADA) and the
“Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards” (UFAS).
National Fire Protection Agency, “NFPA Standard No. 80” for fire-rated doors and
frames.
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Steel Door Institute (SDI), “Standard Steel Doors and Frames Fact File”, S.D.I. 100
series of Standards.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI), “A250” series of Standards.
Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (HMMA) Division of the National
Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers Association (NAAMA), “The
Hollow Metal Manual”, HMMA-800 series Standards.
American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM), for rolled steel sheet and zinccoating.
METAL DOORS & FRAMES
08100 -1
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Existing Hardware: Contractor shall furnish hollow metal frame manufacturer with
existing hardware schedules and template information for proper mortising, reinforcing
and machining of new hollow metal frames to receive existing finish hardware to be
salvaged for reuse.
B.
In accord with 01340:
1.
2.
3.
1.5
Shop drawings shall indicate item type, size and location, dimensional elevations,
materials and thickness, reinforcements, methods of securing items to adjoining
construction, jointing details, methods of assembly and hardware locations.
Coordinate and indicate actual hardware information furnished by Contractor for
reuse on new hollow metal frames.
All hollow metal frames furnished for project shall be products of one manufacturer
and shall be compatible with each other for existing hardware locations and
reinforcements.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
In accord with Section 01620.
2.
PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Amweld.
B.
Ceco.
C.
Steelcraft.
D.
Pioneer Industries.
E.
Republic.
F.
Curries.
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Hardware locations: Mounting heights for hardware shall be in accord with Table V of
Steel Door Institute “Technical Data Series” S.D.I. 100-80, and shall match existing door
hardware locations, field verified by Contractor, unless indicated otherwise.
B.
Frames for all openings shall be made of commercial grade cold rolled steel conforming
to ASTM Designation A366.
1.
Interior frames:
a.
b.
2.3
Frames shall be 16-gauge.
Frames shall be factory primed to receive field finish.
FABRICATION
A.
Frames:
1.
2.
3.
Frames shall be welded or knock down (KD) units with integral trim, of sizes and
shapes shown on reviewed shop drawings.
Finished work shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, square, true and free
of defects, warp or buckle.
Molded members shall be clean cut, straight and of uniform profile throughout their
length.
METAL DOORS & FRAMES
08100 -2
4.
5.
Jamb depths, trim, profile and backbends shall be as scheduled by
Architect/Engineer and shown on reviewed shop drawings.
Corner joints shall have all contact edges closed tight, with trim faces mitered, and
continuously welded in shop or field and stops butted.
a.
6.
7.
Minimum depth of stops shall be 5/8 inch.
Frames shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at factory for fully
templated mortised hardware only, in accord with approved hardware schedule
and templates provided by hardware contractor.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
8.
Templates or other appropriate information acceptable to frame manufacturer
shall be provided by Contractor for hardware salvaged for reuse.
Where surface mounted hardware is to be applied, frames shall have
reinforcing plates only; all drilling and tapping shall be done by others.
Hinge reinforcement plates shall be not less than 8 gauge or equivalent
number of threads, 1-1/4 inches by 10 inches or 1-1/2 inches by 9 inches,
securely welded to frame.
Closer reinforcement plates not less than 12 gauge, securely welded to
frame.
Strike and flush bolt reinforcements not less than 16 gauge, securely welded
to frame.
Reinforcements for all other surface mounted hardware shall be not less than
12 gauge, securely welded to frame.
Floor anchors shall be securely welded inside each jamb with two holes provided
at each jamb for floor anchorage.
a.
b.
9.
Gussets will not be permitted.
Floor anchors shall be designed to extend under threshold at exterior doors
or otherwise provide access for installation in existing walls.
If access is provided, permanently close openings in field and patch so that
access panel is inconspicuous and completely hidden upon completion of
finishes.
Jamb Anchors:
a.
Frames for installation in existing walls shall be provided with reinforced tube
spacers for face anchoring through stop into rough jamb.
1.)
2.)
10.
11.
12.
All holes for face anchors shall be countersunk.
Provide 3 anchors for each jamb on frames up to 7 feet 6 inches high
and 4 anchors for taller frames.
Dust cover boxes (or mortar guards) of not thinner than 26 gauge steel shall be
provided at all hardware mortises on frames.
All frames shall be provided with steel spreader temporarily attached to feet of
both jambs to serve as brace during shipping and handling unless KD frames are
provided.
After fabrication, all tool marks and surface imperfections shall be removed and
exposed faces of all welded joints shall be dressed smooth whether shop welded
or field welded.
a.
b.
All frames shall be chemically treated to insure maximum paint adhesion.
All frames shall then be chemically coated on all surfaces with a rustinhibitive primer that is fully cured before shipment.
METAL DOORS & FRAMES
08100 -3
2.4
SHOP PAINTING
A.
Thoroughly clean all metal surfaces of loose scale, shavings, filings, dirt and other
deleterious materials by use of wire brushes or other effective means.
B.
Remove grease and oil by solvent cleaning.
C.
Chemically treat all surfaces to assure maximum paint adherence.
1.
2.
2.5
Apply zinc chromate primer baked on in shop; brush coat touch-up in field.
Cover all exposed and concealed surfaces without runs, smears or bare spots.
DOOR SILENCERS
A.
Furnish grey rubber door silencers for all hollow metal frames, three for each single door
and two for each double door without a mullion.
B.
Apply to jamb stop strip for single doors, three per door.
2.6
CLEARANCES
A.
Edge clearances shall be provided as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Between doors and frames at head and jambs, not more than 1/8 inch.
Between door and floor, 3/4 inch.
Between meeting edges of pairs of doors, not more than 1/4 inch except fire doors
not more than 1/8 inch.
3.
EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
Verify that door frames are of type required for door and are installed as required for
proper installation of doors.
1.
2.
3.
Confirm that frame preparations allow installation of existing hardware items
salvaged for reuse without field modification of hardware items or frame.
Reject frames that have not been properly prepared to receive new and existing
hardware items.
Furnish new frames that have been coordinated and accurately machined.
B.
Do not install doors in frames that would hinder operation of doors.
C.
Field verify openings in existing concrete walls and coordinate with fabricator to insure
adequate clearance for frame installation and door operation.
D.
Prior to installation, verify that all frames have been coated on the inside with asphalt
emulsion paint as stipulated in this Section.
3.2
INSTALLATION OF HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A.
Set hollow metal frames accurately in location; in alignment, plumb, straight and true.
B.
Brace frames as required to prevent displacement.
1.
2.
Provide spread at mid-height where height of frame dictates.
Shim frames plumb in existing concrete openings.
C.
Install frame anchors at 2 feet 6 inches maximum spacing but not less than 3 anchors
per jamb.
D.
Anchor door frames, through bottom angle, to floor with bolts or power fasteners.
E.
Coordinate installation of jamb anchors as required with other trades for proper
installation with their work.
METAL DOORS & FRAMES
08100 -4
3.3
ADJUST AND CLEAN
A.
Replace and re-hang doors that are hinge-bound and do not swing or operate freely.
B.
Refinish or replace job finished doors damaged during installation.
C.
Protect doors and frames from damage before, during and after finishing.
END 08100.
METAL DOORS & FRAMES
08100 -5
DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS
Section 08211 – WOOD DOORS
(INSTALLATION ONLY)
1
GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDES
A.
Base Bid:
1.
Contractor provide:
a.
b.
1.2
Installation of existing flush wood doors.
All equipment, fasteners, miscellaneous items and other means necessary for
complete installation.
RELATED WORK
A.
Specified Elsewhere:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Division 1 – General Requirements.
Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry.
Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry.
Section 08100 – Metal Doors & Frames.
Section 08710 – Finish Hardware (Installation Only).
Section 08800 – Glass & Glazing.
Section 09300 – Tile.
B.
Related hollow metal frames shall be furnished per Section 08100 and installed by
Contractor.
C.
Related door finish hardware will be salvaged under Section 02070, Selective Demolition
and reinstalled by Contractor per Section 08710, Finish Hardware.
1.3
PRODUCT STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect existing doors during storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and
deterioration.
B.
Comply with requirements of referenced standards and recommendations of WDMA’s
Appendix Section “Care and Installation at Job Site”.
1.
Store doors flat and off the floor on a level surface in a dry, well ventilated building.
a.
b.
2.
3.
Do not store on edge.
Protect doors from dirt, water and abuse.
Certain wood species are light sensitive and shall be protected from exposure to light.
Do not subject interior doors to extremes in either heat or humidity and control
temperature and humidity extremes.
2
PRODUCTS (Not Used)
3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine installed frame prior to hanging door:
1.
Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and
swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads.
WOOD DOORS (INSTALLATION ONLY)
08211-1
2.
B.
3.2
Confirm that hardware preparations allow installation of existing hardware items
salvaged for reuse without field modification of hardware items or doors.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION:
A.
See Section 08710, Finish Hardware for installation of existing hardware items.
B.
Install wood doors to comply with referenced AWI standard and as indicated.
C.
Restore finish before installation at the job site.
3.3
ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION:
A.
Operation: Re-hang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B.
Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation.
C.
Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors will be
without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END 08211.
WOOD DOORS (INSTALLATION ONLY)
08211-2
DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS
Section 08710 – FINISH HARDWARE
(INSTALLATION ONLY)
1
GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDES
A.
Base Bid:
1.
Contractor provide:
a.
b.
c.
d.
1.2
Coordination of existing hardware to be reused and furnish templates to
hollow metal door manufacturer.
Coordination of keying with AFFES General Manager.
All equipment, fasteners, miscellaneous items and other means necessary for
complete installation.
Cleaning.
RELATED WORK
A.
Specified elsewhere:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Division 1 – General Requirements.
Section 02070 – Selective Demolition.
Section 08100 – Metal Doors & Frames.
Section 08211 – Wood Doors (Installation Only).
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Templates: Furnish hardware templates to hollow metal frame manufacturer and other
work to be factory-prepared for the installation of salvaged existing hardware to be
reused.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Store existing hardware in accordance with 01620.
B.
Package and label each item of hardware separately upon removal from existing
opening.
1.
2.
1.5
Tag each item.
Each package shall contain appropriate fastenings as removed from existing
hardware items.
JOB CONDITIONS
A.
Various items specified for this Project will require coordination between manufacturers
of those products and the Contractor including:
1.
Factory preparation of non-rated hollow metal frames specified in Section 08100,
Metal Doors & Frames.
a.
B.
Include preparation of frames to receive savaged existing hinges, locksets,
closers and other hardware items.
Contractor shall be responsible for coordination with hollow metal frame supplier to
ensure that hardware items will fit new frames as indicated.
FINISH HARDWARE
(INSTALLATION ONLY)
08710-1
2
PRODUCTS (Not Used)
3
EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
Examine all doors, frames and hardware for damage, defects, and suitability for intended
use.
B.
Restore all parts or items found damaged, defective, or inadequate, or replace with good
material before installation.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Fitting: Fit all hardware accurately and properly.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Adjusting and Finishing: After work has been otherwise completed, examine all
hardware for complete and proper installation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.3
Remove exposed parts until after painter’s finishing is completed, then reinstall.
Securely fasten all fixed parts.
Fit faces of mortised parts snug and flush.
Make sure operating parts move freely and smoothly without binding, sticking or
excessive clearance.
Lubricate bearing surfaces of moving parts.
Adjust latching and holding devices to proper function.
Adjust door control devices to proper speed and power.
Test keys for conformance to approved keying system.
Clean all exposed surfaces, check for surface damage and polish.
DEFECTIVE WORK
A.
Where hardware is found defective in materials or installation; rework, restore or replace
or otherwise correct as directed.
B.
Following will be considered as defective materials:
1.
2.
C.
Unauthorized substitutes.
Items with missing, broken, damaged or defaced parts not documented during
demolition.
Following will be considered as defective installation:
1.
2.
Items broken, damaged or defaced during demolition.
Items incomplete, misaligned or incorrectly located.
END 08710.
FINISH HARDWARE
(INSTALLATION ONLY)
08710-2
DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS
Section 08800 – GLASS & GLAZING
1
GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDES
A.
Base Bid:
1.
Contractor provide:
a.
b.
c.
1.2
Security glazing for hollow metal pass window frame.
All other related accessory items such as fasteners, clips, setting blocks,
glazing beads and other items of installation to complete glazing work.
Cleaning.
RELATED WORK
A.
Specified elsewhere:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Division 1 – General Requirements.
06200 – Finish Carpentry.
07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers.
08100 – Metal Doors & Frames.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Safety Glass:
1.
2.
B.
Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and
organizations as follows:
1.
2.
C.
1.4
Comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR, Part 1201 for
Category II materials.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety units permanently marked
with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or other
certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
FGMA Publications: “FGMA Glazing Manual”.
SIGMA Publications: TM-3000, “Vertical Glazing Guidelines”.
Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each product and installation method
indicated.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General:
1.
2.
Provide glazing systems that are produced, fabricated and installed to withstand
normal thermal movement and impact loading without failure.
Included in these requirement are loss or glass breakage attributable to the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
Defective manufacturer fabrication.
Installation defects.
Failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight.
Deterioration of glazing materials and other defects in glazing installation.
Glass Design:
GLASS & GLAZING
08800-1
1.
2.
1.5
Glass thicknesses are indicated or, where not indicated, shall be the minimum
thickness required for installation.
Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Manufacturer’s Data, Glass:
1.
2.
B.
Submit 6 copies of manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions for
each type of glass required.
Include test data substantiating that glass complies with specified requirements.
Manufacturer’s Data, Glazing Materials:
1.
2.
Submit 6 copies of manufacturer’s specifications, and installation instructions for
each type of glazing sealant and compound, gasket and associated miscellaneous
material.
Include manufacturer’s published data, or letter of certification, or certified test
laboratory report indicating that each material complies with the project
specifications and is suitable for the applications shown.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
SECURITY GLASS
A.
Security Glass: Glass shall be U.L. Standard 752 listed for Level II ballistics and meet
the requirements of ASTM C1036-85 (formerly Federal Specification DD-B451d), ANSI
Z97.1 and CPSC CFR 1201 Category I and II.
B.
Acceptable products:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Falconer Glass Industries.
Globe-Amerada Glass Company.
Viracon, Inc.
GLAZING SEALANTS/COMPOUNDS
A.
Provide color selected by Contracting Officer or designated representative from
manufacturer’s standard colors.
B.
Provide only compounds that are proven to be fully compatible with surfaces contacted.
C.
Silicone Base Sealant:
1.
2.
Silicone base, single component, chemical curing; capable of withstanding
movement of up to 50 percent of joint width and satisfactorily applied throughout a
temperature range of 40 to 80 F. Shore A hardness of maximum 50; nonstaining color; color will be selected by Contracting Officer or designated
representative from manufacturer’s standard colors.
Acceptable manufacturers and products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
General Electric “Silpruf”.
General Electric “Silglaze 2400”.
Woodmont Products “Chem-Caul 1000”.
Dow Corning “790”.
Pecora “863”.
Refer also to Type S-3 Sealants specified in Section 07920 for silicone sealant
products used for field glazing.
GLASS & GLAZING
08800-2
D.
Preformed Butyl Rubber Glazing Sealant:
1.
2.
2.3
Tape or ribbon (coiled on release paper) of polymerized butyl, of mixture of butyl
and polyisobutylene, compounded with inert fillers and pigments, solvent based
with minimum of 95% solids, with thread of fabric reinforcement, tack-free within
24 hours, paintable, non-staining.
Provide combination tape and encased continuos rubber shim, of approximately
50 durometer hardness.
MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A.
Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 79-90 durometer hardness, with proven compatibility with
sealants used.
B.
Spacers: Neoprene 40-50 durometer hardness, with proven compatibility with sealants
used.
C.
Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION.
A.
Examine the framing and glazing channel surfaces, backing, removal stop design, and
the conditions under which the glazing will be performed.
B.
Notify the Contracting Officer in writing of all conditions detrimental to the proper and
timely completion of the work.
C.
Do not proceed with the glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a
manner acceptable to the Contracting Officer or designated representative.
3.2
JOB REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide secure installation of each piece of glass.
B.
Each installation shall withstand normal temperature changes, loading and impact
loading without failure of any kind including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants
or gaskets to remain secure and airtight, deterioration of glazing materials and other
defects in the work.
C.
Protect glass from edge damage at all time during handling, installation and operation of
the building.
D.
Glazing channel dimensions indicated provide for a minimum bite on the glass, minimum
edge clearance and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.
E.
Be responsible for correct glass size for each opening, within the tolerances and
dimensions established.
F.
Comply with combined recommendation of glass manufacturer and manufacture of
sealants and other materials used in glazing, except where manufacturer’s technical
representative direct otherwise.
GLASS & GLAZING
08800-3
G.
Comply with “Glazing Manual” by Flat Glass Marketing Association except as shown and
specified otherwise, and except as specifically recommended otherwise by the
manufacturer of the glass and glazing materials.
H.
Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation, and eliminate all that have
observable edge damage or face imperfections.
I.
Unify appearance of each series of lights by setting each piece to match others as nearly
as possible. Inspect each piece and set with pattern, draw and bow oriented in the
same direction as other pieces.
3.3
PREPARATION FOR GLAZING
A.
Clean the glazing channel, or other framing members to receive glass, immediately
before glazing.
1.
2.
B.
3.4
Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to the substrate.
Remove lacquer from metal surfaces wherever elastomeric sealants are used.
Apply primer or sealer to joint surfaces wherever recommended by sealant
manufacturer.
GLAZING
A.
Comply with ANSI Standard Z97.1-(Current Edition) Safety Glazing Code.
B.
Install setting blocks of proper size at quarter points of sill rabbet. Set blocks in thin
course of the heel bead compound.
C.
Glazing shall be set with equal bearing for entire width.
D.
Provide spacers inside and out, and of proper size and spacing, for all glass sizes larger
than 50 united inches, except where gaskets are used for glazing.
E.
Provide minimum bite of spacers on glass per requirements of UFC 04-010-01, 22
January 2007 requirements, and use thickness equal to sealant width, except with
sealant tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.
F.
Voids and Filler Rods: Prevent exudation of sealant or compounded by forming voids or
installing filler rods in the channel at the heel of jambs and heads (do not leave voids in
the sill channels) except as otherwise indicated, depending on light size, thickness and
type of glass, and complying with manufacturer’s recommendations.
G.
Do not attempt to cut, seam, nip or abrade glass that is chemically strengthened,
tempered, or heat strengthened.
H.
Force sealants into channel to eliminate voids and to ensure complete “wetting” or bond
of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
1.
2.
3.
Tool exposed surfaces of glazing liquids and compounds to provide a substantial
“wash” away from the glass.
Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of the channel to
eliminate dirt and moisture pockets.
Clean and trim excess glazing materials from the glass and stops or frames
promptly after installation, and eliminate stains and discolorations.
GLASS & GLAZING
08800-4
I.
Wedge shaped gaskets:
1.
2.
3.5
Where driven into one side of the channel to pressurize the sealant or gasket on
the opposite side, provide adequate anchorage to ensure that gasket will not
“walk” out when subjected to dynamic movement.
Anchor gasket to stop with matching ribs, or by proven adhesive, including
embedment of gasket tail in cured heel bead.
CURE, PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A.
Cure glazing sealants and compounds in compliance with manufacturer’s instruction and
recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and
surface durability.
B.
Protect glass from breakage immediately upon installation, by attachment of crossed
streamers to framing held away from glass and do not apply markers of any type to
surfaces of glass.
C.
Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in
other ways during the construction period, including natural causes, accidents and
vandalism.
D.
Maintain glass in a reasonably clean condition during construction, so that it will not be
damaged by corrosive action and will not contribute (by washoff) to the deterioration of
glazing materials and other work.
E.
Wash and polish on both faces not more than four days prior to Owner’s acceptance of
the work in each area.
1.
2.
Comply with glass manufacturer’s recommendations.
Washing shall be performed by a professional firm.
END 08800
GLASS & GLAZING
08800-5
DIVISION 9 – FINISHES
Section 09250 – GYPSUM DRYWALL
1
GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDES
A.
Base Bid:
1.
Contractor provide:
a.
b.
c.
d.
1.2
All heavy-duty drywall stud framing for interior wall and ceiling framing.
All miscellaneous drywall stud framing for headers, bulkheads and similar
construction.
All gypsum fire-rated and fire-rated/water resistant gypsum drywall for walls,
headers, bulkheads and similar construction.
All fasteners, beads, trim, control joints and related accessory items
necessary to complete the work of this Section.
RELATED WORK
A.
Specified Elsewhere:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.3
Division 1 – General Requirements.
Section 02070 – Selective Demolition.
Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry.
Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry.
Section 06400 – Architectural Woodwork.
Section 09900 – Painting.
Section 10265 – Wall Surface Protection Systems.
Division 15 – Mechanical.
Division 16 – Electrical.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installation: Installation and application of materials specified shall be in accord with
latest printed directions and specifications of manufacturers.
B.
Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of gypsum board and related joint
treatment materials from a single manufacturer.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Make submittals in accordance with provisions of Section 01340.
B.
Product data: Complete manufacturers’ product data for each product installed under
work of this Section including:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Gypsum drywall products.
Gypsum drywall framing.
Gypsum drywall accessories.
Certification and Instructions:
1.
2.
Manufacturers’ certification stating that materials furnished comply with standards
set forth in these specifications.
Manufacturer’s printed instruction for installation.
GYPSUM DRYWALL
09250-1
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B.
Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage
from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic and
other causes.
C.
Neatly stack gypsum board panels flat to prevent sagging.
D.
Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces.
E.
Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for
application and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and with gypsum
board manufacturer's recommendations.
B.
Minimum Room Temperatures:
1.
2.
For non-adhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than
40 deg F (4 deg C).
For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board maintain not less than 50
deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours prior to application and continuously thereafter until
drying is complete.
C.
Ventilate building spaces to remove water not required for drying joint treatment
materials.
D.
Avoid drafts during dry, hot weather to prevent materials from drying too rapidly.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the
following:
1.
Steel Framing and Furring:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Gypsum Boards and Related Products:
a.
b.
c.
2.2
Clark Western Dietrich Building Systems.
Pelling Industries.
MBA Building Supplies.
Georgia Pacific Building Products.
Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.
United States Gypsum Co.
STEEL FRAMING FOR PARTITIONS, HEADERS AND BULKHEADS
A.
Steel Framing: ASTM C 645, 33 ksi of profile, size, and base metal thickness required to
produce assemblies complying with structural performance requirements, with sectional
properties computed to conform with AISI "Specification for Design of Cold-Formed Steel
Structural Members."
GYPSUM DRYWALL
09250-2
1.
Steel Studs and Runners: Heavy duty drywall stud with 1 ¼” wide flange with
flange edges of studs bent back 90 degrees and doubled over to form 3/16"
minimum lip (return) and complying with the following requirements for minimum
thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth:
a.
b.
c.
B.
2.3
Thickness: 30 mil (nominal).
Minimum Design Thickness: 0.0312 inch (20 gauge nominal).
Depth: 1 5/8", 2 1/2", 3 5/8”, 4" and 6” or as otherwise indicated.
Fasteners: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power
and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to
substrates involved complying with the recommendations of gypsum drywall
manufacturers for applications indicated.
GYPSUM BOARD
A.
General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available to
minimize end-to-end joints.
B.
Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396, and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Type: Type “X” for all assemblies.
Edges: Tapered.
Thickness: 5/8” or as indicated
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following
products for Type “X” gypsum wallboard:
a.
b.
c.
2.4
"ToughRock FireGuard”; Georgia Pacific Building Products.
"Gold Bond Fire-Shield"; National Gypsum Co.
"Sheetrock Brand Firecode Gypsum Panels"; United States Gypsum Co.
TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum drywall construction that comply with
referenced standards and the recommendations of the manufacturer of the gypsum
board.
B.
Corner-bead and Edge Trim for Interior Installation: Provide corner beads, edge trim and
control joints which comply with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below:
1.
Material: Formed metal complying with the following requirement:
a.
2.
Edge trim shapes indicated below by reference to designations of Fig. 1 in ASTM
C 1047:
a.
3.
C.
2.5
Sheet steel zinc-coated by hot-dip process.
"LC" or “L” Bead (USG #200A), unless otherwise indicated.
One-Piece Control Joint: Formed with vee-shaped slot per Fig. 1 in ASTM C 1047,
with slot opening covered with removable strip.
Gypsum Board Screws: ASTM C 1002.
GYPSUM BOARD JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide materials complying with ASTM C 475, ASTM C 840, and
recommendations of manufacturer of both gypsum board and joint treatment materials
for the application indicated.
GYPSUM DRYWALL
09250-3
B.
Joint Tape: Paper reinforcing tape.
C.
Drying-Type Joint Compounds: Factory-prepackaged vinyl-based products complying
with the following requirements for formulation and intended use.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Ready-Mix Formulation: Factory-premixed product.
Job-Mixed Formulation: Powder product for mixing with water at Project site.
Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners
and flanges of corner beads and edge trim.
Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats.
All-purpose compound formulated for use as both taping and topping compound.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates to which drywall construction attaches or abuts, preset hollow metal
frames, cast-in-anchors, and structural framing, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance
of drywall construction.
B.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Header and Bulkhead Anchorages: Coordinate installation of suspension system with
installation of overhead structural systems to ensure that inserts and other structural
anchorage provisions have been installed to receive header and bulkhead anchors in a
manner that will develop their full strength and at spacing required to support finished
loads.
B.
Verify that all installations are level, plumb and within specified tolerances to receive
installations specified for this Project.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A.
Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754
and with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation.
B.
Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations in the work, at
unsupported edges of structural exterior wall sheathing and for support of fixtures,
equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, and similar
construction to comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum
board manufacturer, or if none available, with "Gypsum Construction Handbook"
published by United States Gypsum Co.
C.
Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by
structural movement, at locations indicated below to comply with details shown on
Drawings:
1.
D.
3.4
Where partition and wall framing abuts overhead structure provide slip or
cushioned type joints to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading.
Anchor framing tracks so that they do not bridge building expansion and control joints by
anchoring tracks to one side only for all runs.
INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING
A.
Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings and structural walls and columns where gypsum
drywall stud system abuts other construction.
GYPSUM DRYWALL
09250-4
B.
Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member so that fastening
surface do not vary more than 1/8 inch from plane of faces of adjacent framing.
C.
Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings,
except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings.
D.
Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts
penetrating partitions above ceilings to provide support for gypsum board.
E.
Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacing indicated but not less than that
required by referenced steel framing installation standard.
F.
Install steel studs so that flanges point in the same direction and gypsum boards can be
installed in the direction opposite to that of the flange.
G.
Frame door openings to comply with details indicated, with GA-219 and with applicable
published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer.
H.
Attach vertical studs at jambs with screws either directly to frames or to jamb anchor
clips on doorframes; install runner track section (for cripple studs) and header at head
and secure to jamb studs.
1.
2.
I.
3.5
Extend vertical jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of
roof structure above.
Provide continuous wood blocking attached to steel framing as indicated for
fastening finish wood and other materials.
Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated, or if none
indicated, in same manner as required for door openings and install framing below sills
of openings to match framing required above door heads.
APPLICATION AND FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A.
Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standard: Install and finish gypsum board to
comply with ASTM C 840.
B.
Install boards with end joints staggered over studs in manner that minimizes the number
of end-butt joints or avoid them entirely where possible.
1.
2.
C.
Install ceiling boards across framing in the manner that minimizes the number of endbutt joints.
1.
2.
D.
Avoid end joints in the central area of each ceiling.
Stagger end joints at least 24 inches.
Install exposed gypsum board with face side out.
1.
2.
3.
E.
Locate exposed end-butt joints as far from center of walls as possible.
Stagger not less than 24 inches in alternate courses of board.
Do not install imperfect, damaged or damp boards.
Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16
inch open space between boards.
Do not force into place.
Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in horizontal applications where
intermediate supports or gypsum board back blocking is provided behind end joints.
1.
2.
3.
Position boards so that like edges abut, tapered edges against tapered edges and
mill-cut or field-cut ends against mill-cut or field-cut ends.
Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends.
Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions.
GYPSUM DRYWALL
09250-5
F.
Attach gypsum board to steel studs so that leading edge or end of each board is
attached to open (unsupported) edge of stud flange first.
G.
Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking provided for additional
support at openings and cutouts.
H.
Form control joints and expansion joints at locations indicated, with space between
edges of boards, prepared to receive trim accessories.
I.
Space fasteners in gypsum boards in accordance with referenced gypsum board
application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations.
3.6
METHODS OF GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION
A.
Single-Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard as follows:
1.
2.
B.
Single-Layer Fastening Methods:
1.
2.
3.7
On walls apply gypsum board vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise
indicated, and provide sheet lengths that will minimize end joints.
On partitions/walls 8'-1" or less in height apply gypsum board horizontally
(perpendicular to framing); use maximum length sheets possible to minimize end
joints.
Apply gypsum boards to supports as follows:
Fasten with screws.
INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as
required to fasten gypsum board to the supports or otherwise, fasten flanges to comply
with manufacturer's recommendations.
B.
Install corner beads at external corners.
C.
Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or
semi-exposed.
D.
Provide type with face flange to receive joint compound.
1.
2.
E.
3.8
Install "LC" bead where drywall construction is tightly abutted to other construction
and back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate.
Install "L" bead where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum board is
installed.
Install control joints at locations indicated, or if not indicated, at spacings and locations
required by referenced gypsum board application and finish standard, and approved by
the Contracting Officer or designated representative for visual effect.
FINISHING OF DRYWALL
A.
General: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions); flanges of corner
bead, edge trim, and control joints; penetrations; fastener heads, surface defects and
elsewhere as required; to prepare work for decoration.
B.
Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards, except where trim accessories are
indicated.
C.
Finish interior gypsum wallboard by applying the following joint compounds in 3 coats
and sand between coats and after last coat:
GYPSUM DRYWALL
09250-6
1.
2.
3.
3.9
Embedding and First Coat: Ready-mix drying-type all-purpose or taping
compound.
Fill (Second) Coat: Ready-mix drying-type all-purpose or topping compound.
Finish (Third) Coat: Ready-mix drying-type all-purpose or topping compound.
ADJUST AND CLEAN
A.
Inspect installation for defective materials and workmanship and promptly repair or
replace any defective items with new, acceptable products.
1.
Fasteners:
a.
b.
2.
B.
3.10
When face paper is punctured, drive new screw approximately 1 ½” from
defective fastener and remove original screw.
Fill damaged surface with joint taping compound and repair facer surface with
joint tape.
Fill cracks or voids.
Remove excess materials and debris resulting from work and dispose of legally, leaving
work areas in a clean, safe condition ready for work by other trades.
PROTECTION
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer.
B.
Ensure gypsum drywall construction to be without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
END 09250.
GYPSUM DRYWALL
09250-7
DIVISION 9 – FINISHES
Section 09510 – ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
1
GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDES
A.
Base Bid:
1.
Contractor provide:
a.
b.
c.
d.
1.2
All non-rated acoustical panel ceilings.
15/16” grid and suspension system.
Perimeter wall angle moldings.
Miscellaneous accessory items for complete and proper installation.
RELATED WORK
A.
Specified elsewhere:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Division 1 – General Requirements.
Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry.
Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall.
Section 09900 – Painting.
Division 15 – Mechanical.
Division 16 – Electrical.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
It is the intent of this Section that the acoustical tile panels and grid used to extend ceilgn
finishes shall match existing in size, texture, pattern and color in every respect.
B.
Installation of acoustical ceilings shall be by workmen with a minimum experience of 3
project installations of comparable extent as proposed project.
C.
Performance:
1.
2.
3.
Suspension system components, hangers and fastening devices supporting light
fixtures, ceiling grids and acoustical units shall permit a maximum deflection of
1/360 of the span.
Finished acoustical ceiling system shall be level with 1/8 inch in 12 feet.
Panels shall have edges in alignment.
D.
Single-Source Responsibility for Ceiling Units: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling unit
from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in
appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.
E.
Single-Source Responsibility for Suspension System: Obtain each type of suspension
system from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in
appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.
F.
Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units and
suspension system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is
supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-alarm system
components, security system components and partition system.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09510-1
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Make all submittals in accordance with provisions of Section 01340.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturers complete printed product data:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Samples:
1.
2.
1.5
Acoustical tile ceiling pads.
Acoustical tile ceiling suspension system.
Accessory items including reveal edge trim.
Samples, 12” square, of each type acoustical tile or panel (3 required).
Samples, 12” long, of exposed grid tee and reveal edge shadow line perimeter wall
angle (3 pieces each).
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Sections 01600 and 01620.
B.
Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store
them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from
moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
C.
Store acoustical ceiling units to comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for
temperature and humidity.
D.
Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in
any way.
1.6
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
1.7
Complete installation of roofing materials and wall/ceiling perimeter painting before
beginning work.
Maintain humidity of 65%-70% in area where acoustical materials are to be
installed, during and 24 hours before and after installation.
Maintain a uniform temperature in the range of 55 degrees to 70 degrees F. prior
to and during installation of materials.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Deliver extra materials to Owner packaged with protective covering for storage and
identified with appropriate labels.
B.
Acoustical ceiling units: furnish minimum of two extra cartons of units or 2% of the
amount installed, whichever is greater.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Use only specified products of the following manufacturers of grid systems and
perimeter reveal.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09510-2
B.
2.2
CODE
MANUFACTURER
1.
USG Interiors, Inc.
101 S. Wacker Drive
Chicago, IL 60606; (312) 321-4000
USG
Use only specified products of the following manufactures of ceiling pads.
CODE
MANUFACTURER
1.
USG Interiors, Inc.
101 S. Wacker Drive
Chicago, IL 60606; (312) 321-4000
USG
MATERIALS
A.
Suspension systems shall be intermediate duty grid with all exposed surfaces having a
painted finish in color to be selected by Contracting Officer or designated representative.
1.
Acceptable products for 15/16” standard grid:
MANUFACTURE
a.
USG
NON-RATED SYSTEM
“DX System”
B.
Hanger wire for grid system shall be minimum of No. 12 gauge galvanized soft
annealed, mild steel wire.
C.
Wall angle: Perimeter edge, 7/8” wall angle molding shape compatible with grid system
specified above at areas indicated.
D.
Acoustical Panels, General
1.
2.
3.
E.
Acoustical panels shall conform to Federal Specifications SS-S-118a, Type III,
Class 25 and shall meet the requirements of sound absorption described in the
Acoustical Association Bulletin.
Low-Emitting Materials: Acoustical tile ceilings shall comply with the testing and
product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard
Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using
Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
Recycled Content: Materials/products shall contain the maximum amount of
recycled content allowed that retains material integrity and product safety in order
to meet the finished installation requirements.
Products: Refer to drawing schedule and reflected ceiling plan for location of products.
1.
2.
Standard acoustical lay-in panels as indicated shall be a mineral fiberboard, 24
inches by 48 inches by 5/8 inch thick, fissured design, square edge with a factory
applied white vinyl latex paint finish, USG product number 562.
Standard acoustical lay-in panels as indicated shall be a mineral fiberboard, 24
inches by 24 inches by 5/8 inch thick, fissured design, square edge with a factory
applied white vinyl latex paint finish, USG product number 560.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
Examine surfaces to receive suspended acoustical units for unevenness, irregularities
and dampness that would affect quality and execution of work.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09510-3
B.
3.2
Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Contractor shall coordinate work with subcontractors to assure that light fixture layouts
and all grills are located in accordance with drawings.
B.
Suspension system shall be supported by 12 gauge hanger wires, nominally 48 inches
on center.
1.
2.
C.
Install additional hangers at ends of each suspension member and at light fixtures,
6 inches from vertical surface.
Wrap wire a minimum of 3 times horizontally, turning ends upward.
Main runners shall be spaced as required for panel size and shall be level and square to
adjacent walls.
1.
2.
Space cross runners as required by panel size.
All joints shall meet perfectly.
D.
Install perimeter wall molding at intersection of suspended ceiling and vertical surfaces;
miter corners where wall mouldings intersect.
E.
Acoustical units shall be installed to bear all around on suspension members; width of
border units shall generally be a minimum of one-half unit dimension.
F.
Joints in acoustical units around pipes, ducts, conduit, grilles, fixtures and hangers shall
be cut fit neatly and where necessary.
1.
3.3
Provide a plated escutcheon cover to trim out unit.
CLEANING
A.
Clean soiled or discolored tile, touch-up scratches, voids and other defects in painted
surfaces.
B.
Tile that is defective or improperly installed shall be replaced.
C.
Remove all excess materials and debris from site and dispose of properly; leave area
clean.
D.
Leave extra replacement materials at Project Site and protect until acceptance by
Owner.
END 09510.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09510-4
DIVISION 9 – FINISHES
Section 09650 – RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
1
GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDES
A.
Base Bid:
1.
Contractor provide:
a.
b.
c.
1.2
Vinyl cove base.
Adhesives, accessories and anchorage as required.
Cleaning.
RELATED WORK
A.
Specified elsewhere:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Division 1 – General Requirements.
Section 02070 – Selective Demolition.
Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers.
Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall.
Section 09900 – Painting.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Provide resilient flooring and related materials that comply with the following fire test
performance criteria determined by an independent testing laboratory acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.4
Critical Radiant Flux – not less than 0.45 watts per sq. cm. per ASTM E648 or
NFPR 253.
Flame Spread – 0-25 per ASTM E84.
Smoke Developed – 0-450 per ASTM E84.
Smoke Density – 0-450 per ASTM E662.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Make all submittals in accordance with Section 01340.
B.
Product Data:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Material descriptions.
Manufacturer’s installation instructions for each project.
Two copies of manufacturer’s recommended maintenance methods, procedures
and products.
Samples:
1.
2.
3.
It is the intent of this specification to exactly match the existing base color as
specified below.
Contractor shall use full sample range offered by specified manufacture to
determine whether specified product is an exact match and adjust color
accordingly if necessary.
Provide for final coordination purposes:
a.
Four (4) samples of final color selection after verification at Project site.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
09650-1
1.5
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A.
Deliver and store products in accordance with provisions of Sections 01600 and 01620.
B.
Deliver products to Project in manufacturer’s original unopened cartons and store in a
fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage.
C.
Follow manufacturer’s written instructions for temperature and humidity limitations for
storage.
1.6
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain temperature in space to receive flooring between 70 degrees F., and 90
degrees F., for not less than 24 hours before and 48 hours after installation.
B.
Maintain minimum temperature of 55 degrees F., after flooring is installed except as
specified in Paragraph 1.5A.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Use only the products of the following manufacturers of rubber cove base.
CODE
MANUFACTURER
1.
Johnsonite Flooring
16910 Munn Road
Chagrin Falls, OH 44023
(800) 899-8916
JON
FLOOR COVERING MATERIALS
A.
Resilient Base: Rubber cove base shall be furnished as indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Rubber cove base (with toe) shall be provided at all flooring requiring base as
indicated.
All rubber base moldings shall be 4 inches high, .125 minimum gauge, in
continuous rolls as long as practical to minimize butt joints.
All inside and outside corners shall be factory preformed.
Acceptable rubber base products:
a.
All rubber base used in the Retail Area and Offices as indicated shall match
existing vinyl cove base thought to be:
1.)
2.)
3.)
4.)
b.
B.
Manufacturer: JON.
Type: Rubber Cove Base.
Size: 4 inch.
Color: Number 48, “Grey”.
Contractor shall verify specified color with actual samples for exact match of
existing vinyl base and, if necessary, make adjustment accordingly from full
range of manufacturer's available colors.
Adhesives, primer and other materials required shall be waterproof of type
recommended by flooring manufacturer.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
09650-2
C.
Provide contact cement adhesive at all inside and outside corners for adhering rubber
base to substrate.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION OF SURFACES
A.
Examine substrates for excessive moisture and unevenness that would prevent
execution and quality of resilient flooring specified.
B.
Notify Contracting Officer in writing of all unacceptable conditions observed.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Remove dirt, oil, grease of other foreign matter from surfaces to receive resilient floor
and base finishes.
B.
Fill cracks less than 1/16 inch wide and depressions 1/8 inch deep or less with selfbonding latex component cement especially formulated for this purpose.
C.
Prime surfaces if recommended by flooring manufacturer.
D.
Patch lower end of gypsum drywall and sand surfaces prior to installation of base to
ensure smooth installation over existing and new wall finishes.
E.
Prime and paint surfaces of walls prior to installation of base materials.
3.3
APPLICATION OF ADHESIVES
A.
Mix and apply adhesives in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction.
B.
Apply adhesives or, where required, contact cement uniformly over surface covering
only that amount of areas that can be covered by base material within the recommended
working time of the adhesive.
C.
Apply adhesives with notched trowel or other suitable tool.
1.
2.
3.4
Do not soil walls, bases or adjacent areas with adhesives.
Promptly remove any spillage.
INSTALLATION
A.
3.5
Base shall be installed using installation and workmanship conforming to printed
specifications of manufacturer whose flooring is being used.
FINISHING AND CLEANING
A.
Upon completion of installation, flooring subcontractor shall remove all equipment, debris
and excess materials resulting from work and leave all floors broomclean.
B.
Clean surfaces of base of all excess cement, dirt and markings.
END 09650.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
09650-3
DIVISION 9 – FINISHES
Section 09900 – PAINTING
1.
GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDES
A.
Base Bid:
1.
General Contractor provide:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
1.2
Preparation, painting and finishing of interior surfaces of existing and new
hollow metal frames.
Preparation, painting and finishing of new and existing interior gypsum
drywall walls, headers and bulkheads.
Surface preparation for all miscellaneous items to be field finished.
Protection of existing and new construction.
Clean up.
RELATED WORK
A.
Specified elsewhere:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Section 02070 – Selective Demolition.
Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry.
Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers.
Section 08100 – Metal Doors & Frames.
Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Included on label of containers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Manufacturer’s name and stock numbers.
Type of paint.
Color.
Instructions for reducing where applicable.
Label analysis.
B.
Fungus Control: Organic coating shall show no fungus growth when tested as specified
in Federal Test Method Standard No. 141, Method 6271.1.
C.
Field Quality Control:
1.
D.
Work shall be done by skilled craftsmen; all paints shall be smoothly and evenly spread
on or flowed on and shall be free from runs, sags, crawls, holidays or other defects.
1.
2.
3.
E.
PAINTING
Request review of first item of each color required for color, texture and
workmanship.
All painting shall be done under favorable weather conditions, or conditions
suitable for production of good, durable work.
No succeeding coats shall be applied until preceding coat is thoroughly dry.
No paint is to be applied to a metal surface in temperatures below 50 degrees F.
Painter shall receive surfaces to be painted or otherwise treated, free from foreign matter
such as concrete, plaster and grease caused by other crafts and shall only be required
to do a nominal amount of sandpapering and cleaning before proceeding with his work.
09900-1
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Make all submittals in accordance with Section 01340:
1.
2.
1.5
Prepare sample paint-out, submitted on dense cardboard, of each color selected
for each type of paint specified.
Make samples not less than 8 inches square and submit each sample to
Contracting Officer or designated representative for approval.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver and store materials in accord with Section 01620.
B.
Painting materials shall be delivered and stored in original containers with labels intact
and color indicated.
1.6
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A.
Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations as to environmental conditions under
which coatings and coating systems can be applied.
B.
Cover or otherwise protect finished work of other crafts and surfaces not being painted
concurrently or not to be painted.
C.
Do not apply paint in areas where dust is being generated.
D.
Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg
C).
E.
Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg F (7 deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C).
F.
Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist, when the relative humidity exceeds 85
percent, at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point, or to damp or
wet surfaces.
2.
PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE PAINT MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
2.2
Use only the specified products of the following manufactures:
MANUFACTURER
CODE
1.
SHE
Sherwin Williams
Materials selected for coating systems shall be from a single manufacturer.
MATERIALS
A.
Paint Materials List:
1.
Interior Metal Primer:
a.
2.
PAINTING
SHE: Kem Bond Metal Primer.
Interior Metal Finish:
09900-2
a.
3.
Gypsum Board Wall Primer:
a.
4.
SHE: Pro-Mar Zero VOC Latex Wall Primer.
Gypsum Board Wall Finish:
a.
2.3
SHE: Pro-Mar Interior Waterbased Acrylic-Alkyd Semi-Gloss.
SHE: Pro-Mar Zero VOC Interior Latex Eg-Shel.
COLORS, MIXING AND TINTING
A.
Colors shall be as indicated on drawings.
B.
Tint primer per manufacturer's recommendation for best topcoat color development.
C.
Paints and enamels shall be stored tinted and mixed.
1.
2.
D.
Manufacturer shall incorporate fungicidal agent into paint.
No materials are to be reduced or changed except as specified by manufacturer.
Job mixing and job tinting will not be permitted.
3.
EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
Examine surfaces scheduled to receive paint and finishes for conditions that will
adversely affect execution, permanence or quality of work and which cannot be put into
acceptable condition through preparatory work as included in Article 3.2.
B.
Do not proceed with surface preparation or coating application until conditions are
suitable.
3.2
PREPARATION OF SURFACES
A.
All puttying of cracks, open joints and other defects shall be done after primer or first
coat is dry and before second coat is applied.
1.
Putty is to be spackling or a similar non-shrinking compound.
B.
All metal surfaces to be painted shall be cleaned with benzine or mineral spirits before
any paint is applied.
C.
Rust on metal surfaces shall be removed by sanding, wire brushing, or application of
navel jelly, as appropriate for surface and area being cleaned and shall be left clean and
ready to receive finish coat.
D.
Featheredge sand paint around chipped areas by grinding or sanding prior to touch-up
of shop primer coats so following coats will blend in smoothly without photographing.
E.
Existing Surfaces:
1.
2.
PAINTING
Existing work to be repainted shall be sanded and put in condition to provide good
adhesion to receive specified finish.
Surface shall be free of any foreign material that will adversely affect adhesion or
appearance of applied finish before finish is applied.
09900-3
F.
3.3
Consult manufacturers of factory primed or finished items for written instructions on
touch-up of primer or finish where touch-up of items is acceptable to the Contracting
Officer.
APPLICATION
A.
Do not apply initial coating until moisture content of surface is within limitation
recommended by paint manufacturer.
1.
B.
Test surface with a moisture meter.
Apply paint coatings with suitable brushes, rollers, or airless spray equipment.
1.
2.
Rate of application shall not exceed paint manufacturer’s recommendation for
surface involved and shall be not less than wet mil thickness indicated in 3.5 for
various products and surfaces.
Keep brushes, rollers and equipment clean, dry and free from contaminants and
suitable for finish required.
C.
Drying time between succeeding coats shall be as recommended by manufacturer of
coating.
D.
Slightly vary color between succeeding coats.
1.
2.
Sand and dust as required between each coat to remove defects visible from a
distance of 3 feet.
No runs, blisters, glue spots, checking, crazing or cracking will be allowed.
E.
Finish coats shall be smooth, free of brush marks, roller fibers, streaks, runs, laps or pile
up of paints, and skipped or missed areas.
F.
Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors clean and sharp with no
overlapping.
G.
Shop coat and prime coat touch-up on metal shall be done while metal surface is bright
and clean.
H.
Final coat of interior finish shall not be applied until all other crafts are finished with their
work, their materials and debris removed and premises turned over in broom clean
condition.
I.
Existing surfaces that are being painted or refinished shall be refinished in entirety; walls
from floor to ceiling and corner to corner.
3.4
PAINTING SCHEDULE
A.
Interior metal surfaces that have been previously painted or factory primed shall receive
preparatory cleaning, sanding and surfaces painted as follows:
1.
2.
B.
Interior Ferrous Metals (Including Factory Primed Hollow Metal): Semi gloss finish.
1.
2.
C.
PAINTING
Primer: 1 coat of interior metal primer.
Finish: 2 coats minimum of interior metal finish or more as required to achieve
desired color.
Primer: 1 coat of interior metal primer.
Finish: 2 coats minimum of interior metal finish or more as required to achieve
desired color.
Gypsum Drywall Walls: Eg-shel finish.
09900-4
1.
2.
3.5
Primer: 1 coat of gypsum board wall primer.
Finish: 2 coats minimum of gypsum board wall finish or more as required to
achieve desired color.
PAINT THICKNESS
A.
Wet thicknesses for various products shall be as recommended by paint manufacturer or
as follows, whichever is greater:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.6
Metal Primer – 2.3 mils.
Metal Finish – 3.5 mils.
Gypsum Primer – 1.6 mils.
Gypsum Finish – 2.1 mils.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect work of other trades and surfaces not being painted.
B.
Protect completed work from damage by other trades.
3.7
CLEANING AND TOUCH-UP
A.
At conclusion of work, remove all empty containers, rags, drop clothes, excess materials
and debris from project site.
B.
Remove drops, splatters and runs from surfaces not scheduled to receive paint.
C.
Touch up or repaint any skips, holidays, mars or thin spots.
END 09900
PAINTING
09900-5
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
Section 10265 – WALL SURFACE PROTECTION
SYSTEMS
1
GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDES
A.
Base Bid:
1.
General Contractor provide:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
1.2
Surface mounted vinyl corner guards.
Flush mounted corner guards.
Surface mounted crash rails.
Floor mounted crash rails and pedestals.
End caps, outside corner caps and accessory items.
All equipment, fasteners, miscellaneous items and other means necessary for
complete installation.
RELATED WORK
A.
Specified elsewhere:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
1.3
Division 1 – General Requirements.
Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry.
Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall.
Section 09900 – Painting.
Backup blocking for wall surface protection systems is specified in Section 06100,
Rough Carpentry and shall be provided in coordination with items specified in this
Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE)
Underwriters Laboratory (UL)
International Building Code (IBC)
Rigid Vinyl Fire Performance Characteristics:
1.
2.
Vinyl cover shall be UL classified and conform with NFPA Class A fire rating.
Surface burning characteristics as determined by UL-723 (ASTM E-84) shall be as
follows:
a.
b.
C.
D.
Flame spread of 10.
Smoke development of 350-450.
High Density Polyethylene Profile Fire Performance Characteristics: High density
polyethylene covers shall conform with NFPA Class B fire rating.
Self-Extinguishing: Rigid vinyl shall have a CC1 classification, as tested in accordance
with the procedures specified in ASTM D-635-74, Standard Test Method for Rate of
Burning.
WALL SURFACE PROTECTION
SYSTEMS
10265-1
E.
Impact Strength:
1.
Rigid vinyl profile materials shall have impact strength of 30.2 ft-lbs/inch of
thickness as tested in accordance with the procedures specified in ASTM D-25690b, Impact Resistance of Plastics.
2.
Rigid vinyl sheet shall have impact strength of 30.4 ft-lbs/inch of thickness as
tested in accordance with the procedures specified in ASTM D-256-90b, Impact
Resistance of Plastics.
F.
System Impact Resistance: Corner guards with retainers shall resist an impact of 153.9
ft-lbs while producing no visual blemishes upon the vinyl cover surface and no
deformations in the aluminum retainers, as tested in accordance with the applicable
provisions of ASTM F 476-84, paragraph 18, Impact Test.
G.
Chemical and Stain Resistance: Rigid vinyl or high-density polyethylene shall show
resistance to stain when tested in accordance with applicable provisions of ASTM D543.
H.
Fungal and Bacterial Resistance: Rigid vinyl or high density polyethylene shall not
support fungal or bacterial growth as tested in accordance with ASTM G-21 and ASTM
G-22.
I.
Color Consistency: Thermoplastic components shall be matched in accordance with
SAE J-1545 - (Delta E) with a color difference no greater than 1.0 units using CIE Lab,
CIE CMC, CIE LCh, Hunter Lab or similar color space scale systems.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Make submittals in accord with 01340.
B.
Product data:
1.
2.
C.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Plan indicating location for each flush and surface mounted corner guard.
Plan indicating location for each surface mounted crash rail.
Plan indicating location of each floor crash rail.
Mounting details with appropriate fasteners for each product and substrate
indicated.
Samples:
1.
2.
1.5
Manufacturer’s printed product literature and data.
Manufacturer’s installation instructions.
Provide samples for verification purposes of surface and flush corner guard
covers, 8 inches long x full profile of unit.
Provide samples for verification purposes of crash rail covers, 8 inches long x full
profile of unit.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Make deliveries and store in accordance with requirements of Sections 01600 and
01620.
B.
Store so that corner guards are not bent or damaged.
WALL SURFACE PROTECTION
SYSTEMS
10265-2
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS
A.
Surface mounted corner guards as manufactured by Boston Retail, 400 Riverside
Avenue, Medford, MA 02153, (800) 225-1633:
1.
Customer Service/Retail Areas:
a.
Eco Series Rigid Vinyl – EcoRigid, Polybostylene, 100% PVC free.
1.)
Profile:
a)
2.)
3.)
B.
Color: 193 Polar White.
Height: 4'-0" from top of base, unless noted otherwise.
Flush mounted corner guards as manufactured by Construction Specialties/Acrovyn,
6696 State Route 405, Muncy, PA 17756, (800) 233-8493:
1.
Customer Service Return Area:
a.
Flush mounted corner guard consisting of continuous aluminum retainer with
snap-on Acrovyn 4000 cover.
1.)
2.)
3.)
C.
Model: FSC-25N with 2" legs for wall cap condition.
Color: 378 Brushed Nickel.
Finish: Suede.
Surface mounted crash rails as manufactured by Construction Specialties/Acrovyn, 6696
State Route 405, Muncy, PA 17756, (800) 233-8493:
1.
Customer Service Seating Area:
a.
Surface mounted assembly with continuous aluminum retainer and Acrovyn
4000 cover complete with end caps and mounting accessories.
1.)
Model: SCR-48MN with continuous aluminum retainer.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
D.
90° Corner Guard 1.5”, PBRVCG-1.5.
Profile: 6" snap-on face.
Ends: Factory installed end caps.
Material:
.062" aluminum retainer
polyvinylchloride with impact modifiers.
Color: 378 Brushed Nickel.
Finish: Suede.
and
stain
resistant
Floor mounted crash rails as manufactured by McCue Corporation, 35 Congress Street,
Salem, MA 01970, (800) 800-8503:
1.
Customer Service Return Area:
a.
CartStop BoxRail with the low connector leg.
1.)
2.)
3.)
Ends: Domed end caps.
Material: Galvanized steel rail with cast aluminum components.
Color: Natural finish.
WALL SURFACE PROTECTION
SYSTEMS
10265-3
2.2
COMPONENT CHARACTERISTICS
A.
Surface Mounted Corner Guards:
1.
Measurement shall be from the top of base to 4’-4” AFF (4’-0” long corner guard)
unless noted otherwise.
a.
At areas where walls are finished with sanitary panels provide full height
corner guards as specified herein in lieu of panel manufacturer’s outside trim:
1.)
2.)
B.
Flush Mounted Corner Guards:
1.
2.
C.
2.3
At outside corners run from top of base to bottom of ceiling wall angle.
At door openings run from top of base to bottom of header/soffit.
Horizontal corner guards shall be full length of wall.
Retainers to be taped and spackled into adjacent drywall.
Materials/products shall contain the maximum amount of recycled content allowed that
retains material integrity and product safety in order to meet the finished installation
requirements.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide UL listed corner guards conforming with
NFPA Class A fire rating.
1.
Surface building characteristics, as determined by UL-723:
a.
b.
2.
Flame spread of 10.
Smoke development of 350-450.
Provide corner guards with a CC1 classification, as tested in accordance with the
procedures specified in ASTM D-635-74, Standard Test Method for Rate of
Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics as
referenced by UBC 52-4-1988.
B.
Chemical and Stain Resistance: Provide corner guards that show resistance to stain
when tested in accordance with applicable provisions of ASTM D-543.
C.
Color Consistency: Provide components matched in accordance with SAE J-1545-(Delta
E) with a color difference no greater than 1.0 units using CIE Lab, CIE CMC, CIE LCh,
Hunter Lab or similar color space scale system.
D.
Impact Strength: Provide rigid PVC profile materials that have an impact strength of 30.2
foot pounds/inch of thickness as tested in accordance with the procedures specified in
ASTM D-256-90b, Impact Resistance of Plastics.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
Check areas to receive corner and wall guards for conditions that would affect quality
and execution of work.
B.
Commence installation when all checks have been made.
C.
Start of work constitutes acceptance of job conditions.
WALL SURFACE PROTECTION
SYSTEMS
10265-4
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Locate corner and wall guards as indicated, using mounting methods as indicated on
reviewed/approved shop drawings for the substrate and in compliance with
manufacturer’s printed instructions.
B.
Install corner and wall guards plumb with surfaces free from distortion or other defects in
appearance.
C.
Adhesive: As recommended by manufacturer and with a VOC content that complies
with the requirements South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule
#1168.
3.3
CLEAN UP
A.
Remove all excess materials and debris resulting from work and dispose of legally,
leaving work areas in a clean, safe condition.
B.
Inspect installation for defective materials and workmanship and promptly repair or
replace any defective items with new, acceptable materials.
C.
Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
END 10265.
WALL SURFACE PROTECTION
SYSTEMS
10265-5
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
Section 10522 – FIRE EXTINGUISHERS,
CABINETS & ACCESSORIES
1
GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDES
A.
Base Bid:
1.
Contractor provide:
a.
b.
c.
1.2
Fire extinguisher.
Cabinet.
All equipment, fasteners, miscellaneous items and other means necessary for
complete installation.
RELATED WORK
A.
Specified elsewhere:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
1.3
Division 1 – General Requirements.
Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry.
Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry.
Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall Systems.
Section 09900 – Painting.
Backup blocking to fire extinguisher brackets is specified in Section 06100, Rough
Carpentry and shall be provided in coordination with items specified in this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All fire extinguishers and accessories furnished shall be the product of one
manufacturer.
B.
All fire extinguishers shall comply with requirements of this specification and with
requirements set forth in NFPA-10.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
In accord with 01340:
1.
2.
3.
1.5
Manufacturer’s: printed product literature and data.
Manufacturer’s: installation instructions.
Drawings showing details of rough openings, recess requirements, head, jamb and
sill details.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Make deliveries and store in accordance with requirements of Sections 01600 and
01620.
B.
Store fire extinguisher so that valves and operating mechanisms are not damaged.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS
& ACCESSORIES
10522-1
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
2.2
Materials/products shall contain the maximum amount of recycled content allowed that
retains material integrity and product safety in order to meet the finished installation
requirements.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A.
Standard Fire Extinguisher indicated on Drawings as F.E.C. shall meet the following
requirements:
1.
Fire extinguisher shall be multi-purpose dry chemical, pressurized, capable of
extinguishing Class A, B and C fires and shall comply with Underwriters Standard
299.
2.
Capacity: Extinguishers mounted in cabinets (F.E.C.) shall be 10-pound capacity.
3.
All fire extinguishers shall have heavy-duty steel cylinders, metal valve and siphon
tube, replaceable molded valve stem seals, visual pressure gauges and high test
UL rated hoses.
Red finish to comply with: OSHA requirements.
All fire extinguishers shall bear UL label.
4.
5.
2.3
2.4
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
A.
Door: White color, aluminum framed, full glass door, silk-screened “FIRE
EXTINGUISHER” red lettering on upper door frame, continuous piano hinge of material
and color to match trim and lock.
B.
Trim: White color, 2 1/2" rolled edge, semi-recessed.
C.
Tub: Minimum 20 gauge cold-rolled steel, white epoxy finish.
D.
Size: To fit 10 pound capacity multi-purpose dry chemical extinguisher.
ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURE
RECESSED CABINET
J.L. Industries
Bloomington, MN
(612) 835-6850
Ambassador 1017-RT
Larsen’s Mfg. Co.
Minneapolis, MN
(612) 571-1181
Architectural Series 2409-6R
Modern Metal Products
Owatonna, MN
(507) 451-7114
100 Series 1026-SR3
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS
& ACCESSORIES
10522-2
3
EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
Check areas to receive fire extinguishers for conditions that would affect quality and
execution of work.
B.
Commence installation when all checks have been made.
C.
Start of work constitutes acceptance of job conditions.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install cabinets, fire extinguishers and brackets in locations shown on drawings in accord
with manufacturer’s printed instructions.
1.
Securely anchor brackets to structure, square and plumb.
B.
After completion of installation, clean and polish cabinets; brackets.
C.
Install fire extinguishers on all brackets or in cabinets after finish painting is complete,
immediately prior to final inspection of building.
1.
3.3
All fire extinguishers shall be fully charged, tagged and operable when installed.
CLEAN UP
A.
Remove all excess materials and debris resulting from work and dispose of legally,
leaving work areas in a clean, safe condition.
B.
Inspect installation for defective materials and workmanship and promptly repair or
replace any defective items with new, acceptable materials.
END 10522.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS
& ACCESSORIES
10522-3
SECTION 13720
INTRUSION DETECTION
PART 1. GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Intrusion detection with multiplexed, modular, microprocessor-based controls, intrusion
sensors and detection devices, and communication links to perform monitoring, alarm, and
control functions.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. LCD: Liquid-crystal display.
B. LED: Light-emitting diode.
C. PIR: Passive infrared.
D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
E. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.
F. Protected or Protection Zone: A space or area for which an intrusion must be detected and
uniquely identified, the sensor or group of sensors assigned to perform the detection, and any
interface equipment between sensors and communication link to central-station control unit.
G. Standard Intruder: A person who weighs 100 lb or less and whose height is 60 inches or less;
dressed in a long-sleeved shirt, slacks, and shoes.
H. Standard-Intruder Movement: Any movement, such as walking, running, crawling, rolling, or
jumping, of a “standard intruder” in a protected zone.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data in accordance with Division 01 – Quality Control: Components for sensing,
detecting, and control, including dimensions and data on features, performance, electrical
characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
1. Site and Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet and device locations, routing of raceways, and
cables inside and outside the building.
2. System Wiring Diagrams: Include system diagrams unique to Project. Show connections
for all devices, components, and auxiliary equipment. Include diagrams for equipment and
for system with all terminals and interconnections identified.
3. Details of surge-protection devices and their installation.
INTRUSION DETECTION
13720 -1
4. Sensor detection patterns and adjustment ranges.
B. Equipment and System Operation Description: Include method of operation and supervision of
each component and each type of circuit. Show sequence of operations for manually and
automatically initiated system or equipment inputs. Description must cover this specific Project;
manufacturer’s standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.
C. Qualification Data: For Installer, testing agency.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For intrusion detection system to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section
“Operation and Maintenance Data,” include the following:
1. Data for each type of product, including features and operating sequences, both automatic
and manual.
2. Central-station control-unit hardware and software data.
F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
G. Other Information Submittals:
1.
2.
Test Plan and Schedule: Test plan defining all tests required to ensure that system meets
technical, operational, and performance specifications within 60 days of date of Contract
award.
Examination reports documenting inspections of substrates, areas, and conditions.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. An employer of workers, at least one of whom is a technician certified by the Advantor.
2. Manufacturer’s authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of
units required for this Project.
B. Intrusion Detection Systems Integrator Qualifications: An experienced intrusion detection
equipment supplier and Installer who has completed systems integration work for installations
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted
in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Testing: A Daq certified installer shall conduct testing of the total building intrusion detection
system prior to beginning work and advise project manager in writing of any issues noted.
Beginning of work indicates the contractors acceptance of existing system. A Daq certified
installer shall conduct final testing of new and relocated components to ensure total building
intrusion detection system operation is complete and fully operations with no operational issues.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 7005, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
INTRUSION DETECTION
13720 -2
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Capable of withstanding the following environmental conditions
without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Altitude: Sea level to 4000 feet.
Central-Station Control Unit: Rated for continuous operation in an ambient of 60 to 85
deg F and a relative humidity of 20 to 80 percent, noncondensing.
Interior, Controlled Environment: System components, except central-station control unit,
installed in temperature-controlled interior environments shall be rated for continuous
operation in ambients of 0 to 122 deg F dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity,
noncondensing.
Interior, Uncontrolled Environment: System components installed in non-temperaturecontrolled interior environments shall be rated for continuous operation in ambients of 0
to 122 deg F dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, noncondensing.
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
A. Relocate existing Daq control panel and devices into new space and reinstall. Reconnect
relocated Daq to existing master control station. Relocate existing motion sensors, door
contacts and duress switches to new space and reinstall.
1.
1.
2.
Alarm Signal: Display at central-station control unit and actuate audible and visual alarm
devices.
Trouble Condition Signal: Distinct from other signals, indicating that system is not fully
functional. Trouble signal shall indicate system problems such as battery failure, open or
shorted transmission line conductors, or controller failure.
Supervisory Condition Signal: Distinct from other signals, indicating an abnormal
condition as specified for the particular device or controller.
B. System Control: Central-station control unit shall directly monitor intrusion detection devices
and connecting wiring in a multiplexed distributed control system or as part of a network.
C. System shall automatically reboot program without error or loss of status or alarm data after any
system disturbance.
D. Operator Commands:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Help with System Operation: Display all commands available to operator. Help
command, followed by a specific command, shall produce a short explanation of the
purpose, use, and system reaction to that command.
Acknowledge Alarm: To indicate that alarm message has been observed by operator.
Place Protected Zone in Access: Disable all intrusion-alarm circuits of a specific
protected zone. Tamper circuits may not be disabled by operator.
Place Protected Zone in Secure: Activate all intrusion-alarm circuits of a protected zone.
Protected Zone Test: Initiate operational test of a specific protected zone.
System Test: Initiate system-wide operational test.
Print Reports.
E. Printed Record of Events: Print a record of alarm, supervisory, and trouble events on system
printer. Sort and report by protected zone, device, and function. When central-station control
unit receives a signal, print a report of alarm, supervisory, or trouble condition. Report type of
signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble), protected zone description, date, and time of occurrence.
Differentiate alarm signals from other indications. When system is reset, report reset event with
INTRUSION DETECTION
13720 -3
the same information concerning device, location, date, and time. Commands shall initiate the
reporting of a list of current alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in system or a log of past
events.
F. Response Time: Thirty seconds maximum between actuation of any alarm and its indication at
central-station control unit.
G. Circuit Supervision: Supervise all signal and data transmission lines, links with other systems,
and sensors from central-station control unit. Indicate circuit and detection device faults with
both protected zone and trouble signals, sound a distinctive audible tone, and illuminate an
LED. Maximum permissible elapsed time between occurrence of a trouble condition and
indication at central-station control unit is 20 seconds. Initiate an alarm in response to opening,
closing, shorting, or grounding of a signal or data transmission line.
H. Manual Secure-Access Control: Coded entries at manual stations shall change status of
associated protected zone between secure and access conditions.
I.
Alarm Transmission to Remote Monitoring Station: Transmit all alarm and supervisory
indications to a designated remote monitoring station via telephone lines, dedicated alarm
network. Transmissions must be compatible with monitoring station equipment. Coordinate with
local authority having jurisdiction.
2.2 SYSTEM COMPONENT REQUIREMENTS
A. Interference Protection: Components shall be unaffected by radiated RFI and electrical
induction of 15 V/m over a frequency range of 10 to 10,000 MHz and conducted interference
signals up to 0.25-V RMS injected into power supply lines at 10 to 10,000 MHz.
B. Tamper Protection: Tamper switches on detection devices, controllers, annunciators, pull
boxes, junction boxes, cabinets, and other system components shall initiate a tamper-alarm
signal when unit is opened or partially disassembled and when entering conductors are cut or
disconnected. Central-station control-unit alarm display shall identify tamper alarms and
indicate locations.
2.3 ENCLOSURES
A. Interior Sensors: Enclosures that protect against dust, falling dirt, and dripping noncorrosive
liquids.
B. Interior Electronics: NEMA 250, Type 12.
C. Screw Covers: Where enclosures are accessible to unauthorized persons, secure with security
fasteners of type appropriate for enclosure.
2.4 SECURE AND ACCESS DEVICES
A. Manufacturers:
1.
Daq.
2.5 BALANCED MAGNETIC DOOR SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
ADEMCO Group; Pittway Corporation.
Aleph International Corporation.
INTRUSION DETECTION
13720 -4
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Amseco; Division of Kobishi America, Inc.
FBII; Pittway Corporation.
GE Interlogix; General Electric Company.
George Risk Industries.
Honeywell International Inc.
Optex.
Ultrak, Inc.; a Division of Ademco Video Systems.
B. Description: Balanced-magnetic switch, complying with UL 634, installed on frame with integral
overcurrent device to limit current to 80 percent of switch capacity. Bias magnet and minimum
of two encapsulated reed switches shall resist compromise from introduction of foreign
magnetic fields.
B. Flush-Mounted Switches: Unobtrusive and flush with surface of door frame.
C. Overhead Door Switch: Wide Gap balanced-magnetic type, listed for outdoor locations, and
having door-mounting magnet and floor- or frame-mounting switch unit.
2.6 PIR SENSORS
A. Manufacturers:
1.
Bosch Classic Line Series.
B. Description: Sensors detect intrusion by monitoring infrared wavelengths emitted from a human
body within their protected zone and by being insensitive to general thermal variations.
1.
2.
Ceiling-Mounting Unit Spot-Detection Pattern: Full 360-degree conical.
Ceiling-Mounting Unit Pattern Size: 84-inch diameter at floor level for units mounted 96
inches above floor; 18-foot diameter at floor level for units mounted 25 feet above floor.
C. Device Performance:
1.
2.
Sensitivity: Adjustable pattern coverage to detect a change in temperature of 2 deg F or
less, and standard-intruder movement within sensor’s detection patterns at any speed
between 0.3 to 7.5 fps across 2 adjacent segments of detector’s field of view.
Test Indicator: LED test indicator that is not visible during normal operation. When
visible, indicator shall light when sensor detects an intruder. Locate test enabling switch
under sensor housing cover.
2.7 DURESS-ALARM SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
ADEMCO Group; Pittway Corporation.
GE Interlogix; General Electric Company.
NAPCO Security Systems, Inc.
Visonic Inc.
B. Description: A switch with a shroud over the activating lever that allows an individual to covertly
send a duress signal to central-station control unit, with no visible or audible indication when
activated. Switch shall lock in activated position until reset with a key.
1.
2.
Minimum Switch Rating: 50,000 operations.
Push Button: Finger activated, suitable for mounting on horizontal or vertical surface.
INTRUSION DETECTION
13720 -5
2.8 EXISTING SECURITY SYSTEM CONTROL PANEL (SSCP)
A. Manufacturer: ICIDS III.
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of intrusion
detection.
B. For material whose orientation is critical for its performance as a ballistic barrier, verify
installation orientation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Comply with UL 681.
B. Security Fasteners: Where accessible to unauthorized persons, install intrusion detection
components using security fasteners with head style appropriate for fabrication requirements,
strength, and finish of adjacent materials except that a maximum of two different sets of tools
shall be required to operate security fasteners for Project. Provide stainless-steel security
fasteners in stainless-steel materials.
3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceways according to Division 16 Section “16111 Conduit and 16130 - Boxes.” Conceal raceway except in unfinished spaces and as indicated.
Minimum conduit size shall be ¾ inch. Control and data transmission wiring shall not share
conduit with other building wiring systems.
B. Wiring Method: Cable in metal raceways, concealed in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors
when possible.
C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points. Use lacing bars
and distribution spools.
Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as
recommended in writing by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to
sides and back of enclosure. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in
any enclosure associated with intrusion system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal
according to system’s wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal
spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.
D. Wires and Cables:
1.
2.
3.
Conductors: Size as recommended in writing by system manufacturer, unless otherwise
indicated.
120-V Power Wiring: Install according to Division 16.
Control and Signal Transmission Conductors: Size and type cable as recommended by
manufacturer.
E. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in
junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
INTRUSION DETECTION
13720 -6
F. Install power supplies and other auxiliary components for detection devices at controllers,
unless otherwise indicated or required by manufacturer. Do not install such items near devices
they serve.
G. Identify components with engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for central-station
control unit and each terminal cabinet, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates
and label products are specified in Division 16 Section 16195 “Electrical Identification.”
3.4 GROUNDING
A. Ground system components and conductor and cable shields to eliminate shock hazard and to
minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.
B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment rack or cabinet. Isolate from power system
and equipment grounding. Provide 5-ohm ground. Measure, record, and report ground
resistance.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Pretesting: After installation, align, adjust, and balance system and perform complete pretesting
to determine compliance of system with requirements in the Contract Documents. Correct
deficiencies observed in pretesting. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items with new ones
and retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. Prepare forms for
systematic recording of acceptance test results.
1.
Report of Pretesting: After pretesting is complete, provide a letter certifying that
installation is complete and fully operable; include names and titles of witnesses to
preliminary tests.
B. Manufacturer’s Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing and include in O & M data.
C. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare reports:
1.
2.
3.
Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and interconnecting wires
and terminals are identified.
Operational Tests: Schedule tests after pretesting has been successfully completed.
Test all modes of system operation and intrusion detection at each detection device.
Test for detection of intrusion and for false alarms in each protected zone. Test for false
alarms by simulating activities outside indicated detection patterns.
Electrical Tests: Comply with NFPA 72, Section A-7. Minimum required tests are as
follows:
a.
Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground.
b.
Test all conductors for short circuits using an insulation-testing device.
c.
With each circuit pair, short circuit at the far end of circuit and measure circuit
resistance with an ohmmeter. Record circuit resistance of each circuit on Record
Drawings.
d.
Verify that each controller is in normal condition as detailed in manufacturer’s
operation and maintenance manual.
e.
Verify that transient surge-protection devices are installed according to
manufacturer’s written instructions.
f.
Test each initiating and indicating device for alarm operation and proper response
at central-station control unit.
g.
Test both primary and secondary power.
INTRUSION DETECTION
13720 -7
D. Report of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a written record of tests, inspections, and detailed
test results in the form of a test log.
E. Tag all equipment, stations, and other components for which tests have been satisfactorily
completed.
END OF SECTION
INTRUSION DETECTION
13720 -8
SECTION 13851
FIRE ALARM
PART 1. GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Fire protection systems are life-safety systems and will therefore be designed, installed, tested,
and expected to perform as such.
B. This Section includes fire alarm systems.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. FACP: Fire alarm control panel.
B. LED: Light-emitting diode.
C. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.
D. AHJ: Authority Having Jurisdiction is an individual responsible for review, inspection, and/or
approval of a system and shall include the building official, fire marshal, engineer, Contracting
Officer, or Owners insurance representative. For this project, the AHJ shall be Base fire chief.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. All references shall be of the latest edition.
B. Factory Mutual (FM):
1. FM AG Approval Guide.
C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
NFPA 13 Standard For The Installation of Sprinkler Systems
NFPA 70 National Electrical Code
NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code
NFPA 90A Standard For The Installation of Air Conditioning And Ventilating Systems
NFPA 101 Life Safety Code
D. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Appropriate UL equipment standards:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
UL 864 Control Panels.
UL 268 Smoke Detectors.
UL 268A Smoke Detectors (HVAC).
UL 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes.
UL 346 Water flow Indicators for Fire Protection Signaling.
UL 1971, Standard for Visual Signaling Appliances.
E. Building Codes:
1. International Building Code
2. International Fire Code
FIRE ALARM
13851-1
F. ADA, and/or State and local equivalency standards as adopted by The Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
G. Military Unified Facilities Criteria:
1. UFC 3-600-1
2. UFC 3-600-02
3. UFC 4-021-01
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Noncoded, analog-addressable system; automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors;
and multiplexed signal transmission.
B. All equipment furnished shall be new and the latest state of the art products of a single
manufacturer, engaged in the manufacturing and sale of analog fire detection devices for over
ten years.
C. The system as specified shall be reviewed, fully tested and approved by each of the Authorities
Having Jurisdiction, and turned over to the owner in an operational condition.
D. In the interest of job coordination and responsibilities the installing contractor shall contract with
a single supplier for fire alarm equipment, engineering, programming, inspection and testing.
E. The contractor shall provide a representative as requested for project meetings such as to assist
in coordination of trades.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NFPA 72.
B. Fire alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Manual stations.
Smoke or heat detectors.
Automatic sprinkler system water flow.
Fire extinguishing system operation.
C. Fire alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:
1. Sound evacuation signals or voice messages and display a custom screen/message defining
the building/zone/room in alarm and the specific alarm point initiating the alarm.
2. Log to the system history archives all activity pertaining to the alarm condition.
3. Activate visual strobe signals throughout the facility.
4. Audible evacuation signals or messages shall be silenced from the fire alarm control panel by
an alarm silence switch. Visual signals shall be programmable to flash until system reset or
additional alarm silencing, as required.
5. A signal dedicated to sprinkler system water flow alarm shall not be silenced while the
sprinkler system is flowing at a rate of flow equal to a single head.
D. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or actions:
1. Display the origin of the supervisory condition report at the local fire alarm control panel.
2. Activate supervisory audible and dedicated visual signal.
3. A means for silencing a supervisory signal shall be permitted only if it is key-operated,
located in a locked enclosure, or arranged to provide equivalent protection against
unauthorized use. Such a means shall be permitted only if it transfers the supervisory
FIRE ALARM
13851-2
indication to a lamp or other visible indicator and subsequent supervisory signals in other
zones cause the supervisory notification appliance(s) to re-sound.
4. Record within system history the initiating device and time of occurrence of the event.
5. Transmit the signal to the monitoring station.
E. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or actions:
1. Display at the local fire alarm control panel the origin of the trouble condition report.
2. Activate trouble audible and visual signals at the control panel and as indicated on the
drawings.
3. Silence audible signals from the fire alarm control panel via a trouble acknowledge switch.
4. Trouble reports for primary system power failure to the master control shall be optionally
delayed for a period of time not greater than 200 seconds. Trouble conditions that have been
restored to normal shall be automatically removed from the trouble display queue and not
require operator intervention. This feature shall be software selectable and shall not preclude
the logging of trouble events to the historical file.
5. Record within system history, the occurrence of the event, the time of occurrence and the
device initiating the event.
6. Transmit the signal to the monitoring station.
F. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Ring trouble alarm and annunciate at the FACP
and remote annunciators.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: All submittals shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer for review. The
contractor shall include the following information in submittals.
1.
Shop Drawings shall be prepared and signed by persons with the following qualifications:
a.
Fire alarm certified by NICET, minimum Level IV. Trained and certified by
manufacturer in fire alarm system design.
2.
System Operation Description: Detailed description for this Project, including method of
operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for manually
and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs.
Manufacturer's standard
descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.
Elevation Details: Details shall be provided showing mounting of wall and ceiling
devices. Where exposed or pocketed ceilings are involved, specific dimensioned details
of detector and notification devices shall be provided.
Device Mounting Details: Details of device back-box requirements shall be provided.
Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device.
Show size and route of cable and conduits. CADD files for floor plans may be obtained
through General Contractor from the Architect/Engineer. Allow for minimum two week
return.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Cut Sheets, Calculations, and other Design Documents: Each set of shop drawings shall be
accompanied with supportive submittal documentation. This documentation shall be quality
bound and shall be organized and numerically tabbed into the following sections.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Initiation Devices
Audio/Visual Devices
System Components, Modules and Relays
Compatibility Listings (matrix, table, or info showing device compatibility)
FIRE ALARM
13851-3
5.
6.
Manufacturers Inspection instructions and other maintenance criteria from NFPA 72 and
UFC 3-600-02
Designer and installer certificates (documents prepared by a PE do not require certificate,
but are required to be sealed.)
D. Qualification Data: Copies of certificates for installers and documenting approved manufacture
representation shall be provided.
E. Field quality-control test reports. 100% of alarm devices shall be tested for correct operation and
resetting prior to beginning work. Contractor shall notify project manager in writing of any
discrepancies found during testing. Beginning of work indicates that contractor accepts status of
existing system as fully operational. Pre and final testing shall only be required on new and
relocated devices. Tester shall provide spread sheet format for final testing listing address, device
description, date tested, pass, fail and date corrected columns as a minimum. Tester’s shall sign
and date report. Report to be given to fire department prior to scheduling acceptance testing. Also
include copy in O & M manual.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire alarm system to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. Comply with NFPA 72, Appendix A, recommendations for Owner's
manual. Include abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at the FACP.
G. Submittals to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to distribution requirements for
submittals specified in Division 1 Section "Submittals," make an identical submittal to authorities
having jurisdiction. To facilitate review, include copies of annotated Contract Drawings as
needed to depict component locations. Resubmit if required to make clarifications or revisions to
obtain approval. On receipt of comments from authorities having jurisdiction, submit them to
Contracting Officer for review.
H. Documentation:
1.
2.
Approval and Acceptance: Provide the "Record of Completion" form according to
NFPA 72 to Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
Record of Completion Documents: Provide the "Permanent Records" according to
NFPA 72 to Owner. Format of the written sequence of operation shall be the optional
input/output matrix.
(a)
Typed hard copies on paper to Owner.
I.
A copy of these fire alarm specifications shall be included with all submittal packages including
those to the engineer, owner, and local AHJ’s.
J.
Incomplete submittals shall be returned without review, unless previously approved by the
Contracting Officer.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
Qualifications:
1.
2.
The contractor shall submit copies of all required Licenses and Bonds as required in the
State having jurisdiction to the Contracting Officer upon award of contract, and engineer
upon request.
The contractor shall employ on staff a minimum of one NICET level IV Fire Alarm
Technician, a registered Fire Protection Engineer, a professional engineer registered in
FIRE ALARM
13851-4
3.
4.
5.
6.
the State of the installation, or a Certified Safety Professional with proven experience in
fire alarm systems. This individual shall make regular site visits as necessary to oversee
the system installation. This individual will be held accountable for system oversight,
code compliance, and quality of installation. This requirement shall apply to the fire alarm
contractor and any other contractor installing portions of the system such as wiring and/or
devices by an electrical contractor. Qualified individual shall immediately provide
evidence of qualification upon request.
At least one NICET Level II Fire Alarm Technician shall be present and have oversight
anytime fire alarm equipment and/or wiring is being installed. This requirement shall
apply to the fire alarm contractor and any other contractor installing portions of the
system such as wiring and/or devices by an electrical contractor. Technician shall
immediately provide evidence of qualification upon request.
Fire alarm shop drawings shall be prepared and signed by a NICET level IV with proven
and documented experience/training in fire alarm system design and codes.
The Contracting Officer may accept a testing or qualification body other than NICET, if
submitted and approved prior to bidding the project,. Evidence of qualification and
means for verification shall be provided in writing to the Contracting Officer with sufficient
time for evaluating such request prior to awarding of contract. However, such
qualifications shall be specifically focused towards fire alarm system design, installation,
and codes. Qualifications for other low voltage systems such as security, access control,
telephone, etc. shall not be approved.
The State approved or licensed fire alarm contractor whose name appears on the system
and who is responsible for system warranty and service shall have sole authority to
establish installation responsibilities. Thus, if any portion is to be wired or installed by a
separate contractor (such as an electrical contractor), then the fire alarm contractor will
by contract select and warrant such contractor. An electrical or other contractor not
licensed by the state and/or not meeting qualification requirements of this specification
shall not dictate installation conditions for this system.
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
1.
Existing FACP and Equipment:
a.
Honeywell.
1.
Wire and Cable:
a.
Comtran Corporation.
b.
Helix/HiTemp Cables, Inc.; a Draka USA Company.
c.
Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corporation; a Marmon Group Company.
d.
West Penn Wire/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies.
2.
Audible and Visual Signals:
a. Gentex Corporation.
b. System Sensor; a GE-Honeywell Company.
c. Wheelock, Inc.
2.2 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP)
A.
General Description:
1.
Extend existing system to new devices and connect.
FIRE ALARM
13851-5
2.3 MANUAL FIRE ALARM BOXES
A. Description: UL 38 listed; finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in
contrasting color. Station shall show visible indication of operation. Mounted on recessed outlet
box; if indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.
2.
3.
4.
2.4
2.5
NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A.
Description: Equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system
connections. Color shall be white.
B.
Visible Alarm Devices. Xenon strobe lights listed under UL 1638 and 1971 in a single
mounting assembly. Fire alarm strobe shall be clear polycarbonate with “FIRE” engraved
in 1” high letters on lens. Provide a white aluminum trim.
GUARDS FOR PHYSICAL PROTECTION
A.
2.6
Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type. With
integral addressable module, arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal,
alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.
Station Reset: Key-operated switch. Device shall be keyed same as fire alarm control
panel and other fire alarm equipment cabinets. Use of break glass rods not
acceptable.
Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear polycarbonate plastic enclosure, hinged
at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate fire alarm. STI or equal.
Manual pull stations in areas accessible to the public shall have polycarbonate tamper
proof cover equivalent to Edward Systems Stopper II without sounder.
WIRE AND CABLE
A.
Wire and cable for fire alarm systems shall be UL listed and labeled as complying with
NFPA 70, Article 760.
B.
Signaling Line Circuits: Plenum rated twisted, shielded pair, No. 14 AWG.
1.
C.
Circuit Integrity Cable:
Twisted shielded pair, NFPA 70 Article 760,
Classification CI, for power-limited fire alarm signal service. UL listed as
Type FPL, and complying with requirements in UL 1424 and in UL 2196 for a
2-hour rating.
Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Plenum rated solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75
deg C, color-coded insulation.
1.
2.
Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum.
Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum.
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A.
Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that fire alarm system is fully operational
before making changes or connections to existing fire alarm system.
B.
No portion of a fire alarm system shall be installed prior to having plans on site that have
been approved and stamped by the Contracting Officer and the local AHJ. This includes
FIRE ALARM
13851-6
wiring. Approved stamped plans shall be on site at all times while the system is in the
installation stage.
3.2
BACK BOXES
A.
3.3
Manual pull stations shall be located on walls such that tamper resistant covers can be
installed as required, or in the future. Therefore, a 3-inch clearance from other switches,
window openings, door frames, etc. shall be provided on each side of a manual pull
station and 4 inches clear area above and below the manual pull station.
WIRING INSTALLATION
A.
Install wiring according to the following:
1.
2.
B.
Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway according to Division 16 Section “Raceways and
Boxes.”
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.4
NECA 1.
TIA/EIA 568-A.
Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm
system shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not
be used for any other wire or cable.
Devices shall be included on the circuits as indicated on the approved plans and
calculations. Changes must be evaluated by the designer. Changes in wire
routing may require new calculations.
Raceway system shall be minimum 3/4" EMT Type.
Paint all fire alarm conduit couplings and boxes red.
C.
Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as
recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides
and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no
excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure
associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to
the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal
spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.
D.
Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets, or
equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.
E.
Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building
power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color-code for
supervisory circuits.
Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from
alarm-initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint
fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 16
Section "Electrical Identification”.
B.
Each conductor shall be identified as shown on the drawings at each end and at terminal
points with wire markers. Attach permanent wire markers within 2 inches of the wire
termination. Marker legends shall be visible.
FIRE ALARM
13851-7
C.
3.5
All initiating devices shall have permanent making indicated address in FACP.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Contractor Pre-Testing and Record of Completion Testing of new and relocated work:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
This section covers contractor pre-testing and documentation by the installing
contractor that shall be conducted before any commissioning inspection or AHJ
testing is scheduled.
Wiring runs shall be tested for continuity, short circuits and grounds before any
system devices are installed or energized.
Provide the service of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician
authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment to technically
supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system.
All testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 72.
100% of new or relocated alarm devices shall be tested for correct operation and
resetting. Tester shall provide typed spread sheet format listing address, device
description, date tested, pass, fail and date corrected columns as a minimum.
Tester’s shall sign and date report. Report to be given to fire department prior to
scheduling acceptance testing. Also include copy in O & M manual.
Audibility testing shall not be conducted until all doors, windows, walls, ceilings,
and carpeting are in place.
All Alarm Initiating Devices shall be observed and logged for correct zone and
sensitivity. These devices and their bases shall be tagged with adhesive tags
located in an area not visible when installed, showing the initials of the installing
technician and date.
Computer/labeler generated labels with the address number only may be
installed on the exterior of the device as long as the background is clear and
installed in a quality manner. This will assist in the inspection, testing,
maintenance, and trouble-shooting of the system.
A systematic record shall be maintained of all readings using schedules or charts
of tests and measurements. Areas shall be provided on the logging form for
readings, dates and witnesses.
The installing contractor shall make instruments, tools and labor required to
conduct the system tests available.
The following equipment shall be a minimum for conducting the tests:
a.
Ladders, scaffolds, or lifts as required to access all installed equipment.
b.
Multimeter for reading voltage, current and resistance.
c.
Two way radios, flashlights, screwdrivers, measuring tapes.
d.
Calibrated decibel meter.
At minimum the following tests shall be conducted and documented to show status of
existing system.
1.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Turn each sprinkler system flow valve two full turns and verify proper supervisory
alarm at the FACP.
Verify activation of all flow switches under approved flowing conditions.
Open initiating device circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.
Open and short signaling line circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.
Open and short Notification Appliance Circuits and verify that trouble signal
actuates.
Ground all circuits and verify response of trouble signals.
Check installation, supervision, and operation of all intelligent smoke detectors
using the Walk Test feature.
FIRE ALARM
13851-8
7.
8.
9.
3.6
Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be
introduced on the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of
the signal at the FACP and the correct activation of the control points.
Each notification circuit shall be tested under standby/battery power. Voltage
readings shall be taken at the booster panel for Class “A” circuits. Any circuit
that measures less than 20 volts dc or the nameplate voltage, whichever is
higher, shall be considered as failing the design. Note: Some systems
incorporating synchronizing modules can impair results. If the module cannot be
bypassed for voltage readings, the manufacturer should be contacted for
guidance.
When the system is equipped with optional features, the manufacturer's manual
should be consulted to determine the proper testing procedures. This is intended
to address such items as verifying controls performed by individually addressed
or grouped devices, sensitivity monitoring, verification functionality and similar.
ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF NEW AND RELOCATED DEVICES
A.
This section details criteria for commissioning inspections by AHJ’s and the owner.
Testing shall be scheduled with all parties minimum 10 working days in advance.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.
4.
This stage of testing shall not be scheduled or conducted until all pre-testing has
been completed and is in compliance with applicable requirements.
A signed Record of Completion shall be provided to the inspector prior to starting
this testing.
The contractor is responsible for testing all components in accordance with the
manufacturers required and suggested procedures and in accordance with NFPA
72. If this specification incorporates a detailed Acceptance Test Procedure
(ATP) prepared by the engineer than it shall also be followed.
A program matrix shall be provided by the installing contractor referencing each
alarm input to every output function affected as a result of an alarm condition on
that input.
The commissioning inspector shall use the system record drawings and other
documents specified under this specification during the testing procedure to
verify operation as programmed. In conducting the commissioning test, the
inspector shall request demonstration of any or all input and output functions.
The items tested shall include but not be limited to the following:
a.
System wiring shall be tested to show the following results and the
systems subsequence operation:
1)
Open, Shorted or Grounded Circuits.
2)
Primary and Battery power disconnected.
3)
End-of-line voltage readings on notification circuits.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.7
System notification circuits and appliances operate as programmed.
Audibility and visual levels meet required standards.
A minimum of 15 dBA above ambient shall be obtained in every
occupiable space (throughout) per NFPA 72. This includes storage
rooms, electrical rooms, telephone rooms, and any other occupiable
space.
System shall demonstrate the correct messages at the FACP and any
remote annunciator.
System off-site reporting shall be verified for alarm, supervisory, trouble,
correct address, facility name, contact phone number, and contact name.
System shall be tested for stand-by battery backup as outlined in this
specification.
FINAL DOCUMENTATION
FIRE ALARM
13851-9
A.
System documentation shall be supplied to the owner and shall include but not be limited
to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
System record (as-built) drawings and wiring details including one set of
reproducible drawings, and a CD ROM with copies of the record drawings in
AUTOCAD .dwg format, or .dxf format for use in a CAD drafting program.
System Operating, Installation and Maintenance Manuals.
System matrix showing input signals to output commands.
Provide a copy of the FACP system programming on a CD-ROM.
B.
A copy of all above materials and documentation shall be provided in O & M package.
C.
The installation contractor shall provide the owner with account information, phone
numbers, passwords, and terms/conditions of the monitoring company.
END OF SECTION
FIRE ALARM
13851-10
DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Section 13915 – Wet Pipe Sprinkler Systems
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes fire-suppression piping and equipment for the following building systems:
1.
1.3
Revisions to existing wet-pipe fire-suppression sprinklers, including piping and automatic sprinklers.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Working Plans: Documents, including drawings, calculations, and material specifications prepared
according to NFPA 13 for obtaining approval from authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Design sprinkler piping revisions according to the following and obtain approval from authorities having
jurisdiction:
1.
1.5
Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: As follows:
a.
All Areas: 130 SQ. FT.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide sufficient copies of product data and shop drawings for review by the Post Fire Department,
AAFES Headquarters and Contracting Officer. Six 6) Copies are required for the review plus
however many are required by the contractor.
B.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Pipe and fitting materials and methods of joining for sprinkler piping.
Pipe hangers and supports.
Piping seismic restraints.
Sprinklers, escutcheons, and guards. Include sprinkler flow characteristics, mounting, finish,
and other pertinent data.
C.
Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13,that have
been approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Operating and Maintenance Data: Include NFPA No. 25, “Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and
Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection System”.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms whose equipment, specialties, and accessories are listed by
product name and manufacturer in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" and FM's "Fire
Protection Approval Guide" and that comply with other requirements indicated.
B.
Sprinkler Components: Listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking by a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
13915-1
C.
NFPA Standards: Equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing complying with the
following:
1.
D.
NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."
Military Standards: Equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing complying with the
following:
1.
Unified Facilities Criteria UFC-3-600-01, Design: Fire Protection Engineering for Facilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
2.2
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
2.3
Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.
PIPES AND TUBES
A.
Schedule 40 Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, ASTM A 135, or ASTM A 795; in NPS 2 and smaller.
B.
Schedule 10 Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795, Schedule 10 in NPS 2-1/2 and larger and
NFPA 13 specified wall thickness in NPS 6 to NPS 10.
2.4
2.5
Sprinklers:
a.
Badger Fire Protection, Inc.
b.
Central Sprinkler Corp.
c.
Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc.
d.
Globe Fire Sprinkler Corp.
e.
Grinnell Corp.
f.
Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
g.
Star Sprinkler Corp.
h.
Viking Corp.
PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS
A.
Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1.
B.
Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4.
C.
Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3.
D.
Steel, Threaded Couplings: ASTM A 865.
E.
Steel, Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed and FM-approved, ASTM A 47, malleable iron or
ASTM A 536, ductile iron; with dimensions matching steel pipe and ends factory grooved according
to AWWA C606.
JOINING MATERIALS
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
13915-2
A.
2.6
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for pipe-flange gasket
materials and welding filler metals.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES
A.
2.7
Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for gate, ball, butterfly, globe, and check valves not required to
be UL listed and FM approved.
SPRINKLERS
A.
Automatic Sprinklers: With heat-responsive element complying with the following:
1.
2.
UL 199, for applications except residential.
UL 1767, for early suppression, fast-response applications.
B.
Sprinkler Types and Categories: Nominal 1/2-inch orifice for "Ordinary" temperature classification
rating, unless otherwise indicated or required by application.
C.
Sprinkler types, features, and options include the following:
1.
2.
3.
Pendent sprinklers.
Sidewall sprinklers.
Upright sprinklers.
D.
Sprinkler Finishes: Match existing.
E.
Sprinkler Escutcheons: Match existing.
F.
Sprinkler Guards: Wire-cage type, including fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING APPLICATIONS
A.
Flanges, unions, and transition and special fittings with pressure ratings the same as or higher than
system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground applications, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Wet-Pipe Sprinklers: Use the following:
1.
2.
3.2
NPS 2 and Smaller: Schedule 40 steel pipe with threaded ends, cast- or malleable-iron
threaded fittings, and threaded joints.
NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Schedule 10 steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; steel, grooved-end
fittings; and grooved joints.
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.
B.
Steel-Piping, Grooved Joints: Use Schedule 10 steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; steel, groovedend fittings; and steel, keyed couplings. Assemble joints with couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and
bolts according to coupling manufacturer's written instructions. Use gaskets listed for dry-pipe
service for dry piping.
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
13915-3
C.
3.3
Dissimilar-Piping-Material Joints: Construct joints using adapters or couplings compatible with both
piping materials. Use dielectric fittings if both piping materials are metal. Refer to Division 15
Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for dielectric fittings.
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation.
B.
Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location
and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.
1.
C.
Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in
pipe sizes.
D.
Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller. Unions are not required on
flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved joints.
E.
Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
F.
Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hanger materials. Install according to NFPA 13
for sprinkler piping.
G.
Earthquake Protection: Install piping according to NFPA 13 to protect from earthquake damage.
H.
Install piping with grooved joints according to manufacturer's written instructions. Construct rigid
piping joints, unless otherwise indicated.
3.5
SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS
A.
General: Use sprinklers according to the following applications:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.6
Rooms without Ceilings: Upright and pendent sprinklers, as indicated.
Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Recessed sprinklers, as indicated.
Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers.
Sprinkler Finishes: Match existing.
SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A.
3.7
Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of acoustical panels.
CONNECTIONS
A.
3.8
Connect sprinklers to existing piping.
LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.9
Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities
having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved
working plans.
Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13.
CLEANING
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
13915-4
A.
Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
B.
Remove and replace sprinklers having paint other than factory finish.
3.10
A.
3.11
PROTECTION
Protect sprinklers from damage until Substantial Completion.
COMMISSIONING
A.
Verify that specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and accessories are installed and operate
correctly.
B.
Verify that specified tests of piping are complete.
C.
Verify that damaged sprinklers and sprinklers with paint or coating not specified are replaced with
new, correct type.
D.
Verify that sprinklers are correct types, have correct finishes and temperature ratings, and have
guards as required for each application.
E.
Fill wet-pipe sprinkler piping with water.
F.
Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required.
3.12
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Preliminary Tests:
1.
2.
3.
Flush, hydrostatically test, and inspect sprinkler piping according to NFPA 13, "System
Acceptance" Chapter.
Replace piping system components that do not pass test procedures and retest to
demonstrate compliance. Repeat procedure until satisfactory results are obtained.
Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Formal Test and Inspection:
1.
Do not submit a request for formal test and inspection until the preliminary test and
corrections are completed and approved. Submit a written request for formal inspection at
least 7 days prior to inspection date. An experienced technician regularly employed by the
system installer shall be present during the inspection. At this inspection, repeat any or all of
the required tests as directed. Correct defects in work provided by the Contractor, and make
additional tests until the systems comply with contract requirements. Furnish appliances,
equipment, electricity, instruments, connecting devices, and personnel for the tests. (The
Government will furnish water for the test.) Base fire chief and inspector will witness formal
tests and approved systems before they are accepted.
END 13915
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
13915-5
DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL
Section 15010 – General Provisions
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
WORK INCLUDES
A.
General Provisions of the contract, including the following, shall apply to Division 15
Specification Sections: Solicitation Documents and Division 1.
B.
The Work to be performed under this Division shall include all labor, materials,
equipment, transportation, construction plant, and facilities necessary to provide a
complete and satisfactory system ready to use. Wherever the words "the Contractor" or
"this Contractor" appears in this Division, they refer to the Contractor for the work
specified in that Section. This Contractor shall examine all Drawings and all Sections of
the Specifications and shall be responsible for ascertaining to what extent other Drawings
and Sections affect the Work herein specified.
CODES, REGULATIONS, AND STANDARDS
A.
All work must be performed in accordance with the requirements of local, county, state
and national codes and regulations including the requirements of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
2012 International Building Code.
2014 National Electrical Code.
2012 International Plumbing Code.
2012 International Mechanical Code.
Occupational Safety and Health Act. of 1970
Life Safety Code, N.F.P.A. No. 101.
For work not specifically listed above, use standards and codes of the National
Fire Protection Association.
All equipment, apparatus and systems shall be rated, tested, fabricated and/or installed in
accordance with the applicable industry standard mentioned. The following list will serve
to clarify abbreviations that appear in other sections of this specification:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
AABC
ADC
AGA
AMCA
ARI
ANSI
ASE
ASHRAE
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
ASME
AWWA
EPA
FS
IBR
IEEE
MCAA
NEMA
NSC
NSF
SBI
SMACNA
21.
UL
GENERAL PROVISIONS
Associated Air Balance Council
Air Diffusion Council
American Gas Association.
Air Moving and Conditioning Association
Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
American National Standards Institute
Association of Safety Engineers
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning
Engineer
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
American Water Works Association
Environmental Protection Agency
Federal Specifications
Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
Mechanical Contractors' Association of American
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
National Safety Council
National Sanitation Foundation
Steel Boiler Institute Industry
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National
Association
Underwriters Laboratories
15010-1
22.
23.
24.
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
ASTM
NEBB
NEC
American Society for Testing and Materials.
National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
National Electric Code (NFPA 70).
DEFINITIONS
A.
FURNISH: The term furnish means supply and deliver to the Project Site, ready for
unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation and similar operations.
B.
INSTALL: The term install describes operations at the Project Site including the actual
unloading, unpacking, assembly, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to
dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations.
C.
PROVIDE: The term provides means to furnish and install, complete and ready for
intended use.
SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01340 for requirements for shop drawings and product data.
B.
Asbestos-Free Material/Product: Prior to approval of the material/product to be used, the
manufacturer/supplier shall furnish the Contracting Officer with written certification that
the material/product contains no asbestos. This certificate is mandatory before approval
will be issued. Submittals furnished without the asbestos-free certification will be returned
to the Contractor with no action taken until such certification is provided.
C.
See applicable sections to this Division for items requiring shop drawings.
MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
A.
Materials, the style, make or quality of which is specifically designated, shall be as
specified.
B.
Contractor shall furnish necessary materials in ample quantities and as frequently as
required to avoid delay in the progress of the Work, and shall so store them as to prevent
interference with other work.
DEFECTIVE WORK AND MATERIAL
A.
All materials or work found to be defective or not in strict conformity with the drawings or
different from requirements of the drawings and specifications or defaced or injured
through negligence of Contractor or his employees, or through action of fire or weather
will be rejected and shall be immediately removed from premises by Contractor and
satisfactory materials and work substituted without delay.
B.
All defective work or imperfect work shall be corrected immediately on notice from
Contracting Officer. No previous inspection or certificate on account shall be held to
relieve Contractor from his obligation to furnish sound materials and to perform good and
satisfactory work.
COOPERATION AND COORDINATION
A.
Contractor shall confer with other contractors at the site before installing his work to avoid
interferences so that maximum head room and clearances may be maintained. In event
that interferences develop between work of various contractors, Contracting Officer's
GENERAL PROVISIONS
15010-2
decision will be final and no additional compensation will be allowed for changes required.
1.8
B.
Particular attention shall be paid to situations where recessed equipment, pipes and lights
occur, or where the work of several trades occurs together above suspended ceilings, in
pipe shafts or in areas where space is limited.
C.
All fixtures, equipment, devices, switches, outlets, pumps, etc., shall be positioned to
avoid all interferences with and to assure proper coordination with work of all other trades,
cases, partitions, wall, floor and ceiling patterns, architectural features, etc. All recessed
devices, fixtures, etc., shall be coordinated with all wall, floor and ceiling patterns.
Contracting Officer will reconcile conflicts and adjustments where such adjustments are
warranted.
PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A.
1.9
1.10
Contractor shall keep all his respective pipe openings closed by means of plugs or caps
to prevent entrance of foreign matter during construction and cover all fixtures,
equipment, and apparatus as required to protect them against dirt, water, chemical or
mechanical damage both before and after installation. Any such fixtures, equipment or
apparatus damaged prior to final acceptance of the Work shall be restored to its original
condition or replaced by Contractor at no cost to Owner.
CONTRACT DRAWINGS
A.
The layout shown on the Contract Drawings is diagrammatic but shall be followed as
closely as actual construction and as other work will allow. The dimensions of work as
shown on the Contract Drawings are not as-built dimensions. No measurements shall be
scaled from the drawings and used as definite dimensions for laying out or fitting work in
place.
B.
The layout of manufactured equipment as shown on the drawings shall be checked and
the exact location shall be determined from the dimensions of equipment shop drawings
approved by the Contracting Officer.
MAINTENANCE MANUAL AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A.
Upon completion of the Work, Contractors shall provide the Contracting Officer with three
copies of maintenance manual for all equipment furnished and installed under his Work.
Manuals shall be in substantial 3-ring binders with project name and number inscribed on
face and hinged back. Manual shall include roster of all AAFES and Installation training
session attendees. The manual shall, however, first be approved by the Contracting
Officer.
B.
The manual shall include manufacturer's lubricating and operating instructions and parts
list and serial numbers for all operating machinery, including drive information, and motor
horsepower, amperage, and voltage readings on all phases, valve chart, sequence of
operation, index following the order listed in the specifications, warranties in the name of
the Installation, and a list of manufacturers, service firms and subcontractors names and
telephone numbers.
C.
Training attendance rosters for each training session shall be included in manuals.
Roster will identify training subject, date, attendees name, job title, office symbol,
grade/rank, and telephone number.
D.
All switches, controls, and safety devices shall be clearly and permanently marked with
GENERAL PROVISIONS
15010-3
embossed or printed plates as to purpose and as to operation and shall be tested in the
presence of the Owner designated representative to ensure that he understands their
function and purpose.
E.
1.11
Upon completion of the Work, Contractors shall put the systems into service. Contractors
shall be entirely responsible for the equipment during all testing operations including the
lubricating and turning on and off of such apparatus.
SUBSTITUTION OF EQUIPMENT
A.
The contractor may offer to substitute equipment other than those specified for approval
of the Contracting Officer. The request for substitution of equipment shall be submitted
by the Contractor to the Contracting Officer within fifteen (15) calendar days after award
of the contract. It is incumbent on the Contractor to submit technical data that will fully
establish the equality of the proposed substitute equipment with that specified and
evidence to substantiate the availability of the required repair and maintenance service.
Each request for substitution shall be accompanied by the following information for each
piece of equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
1.12
In the event of Contracting Officer's approval of a substitution of equipment, the
Contractor will be notified by telephonic message by the Contracting Officer (or authorized
representative), followed by the issuance of an amendment to the contract incorporating
the equipment by name and model number.
PROJECT RECORD AND CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS
A.
1.13
Statement indicating that this substituted equipment will not increase the contract
cost nor extend the completion date.
Manufacturer's name and model number.
Catalog cuts, diagrams and other data published by the manufacturer with the
particular model identified and the pertinent design data for that model highlighted
or underlined for easy reference.
Parts lists and recommended spare parts required for preventive maintenance
and minor field repairs.
Each request for substitution shall also include the following information relating
to service maintenance and repair:
a.
Name, address and telephone number of nearest factory authorized
technical representative.
b.
Name, address and telephone number of firm(s) qualified to perform
preventive maintenance, minor or major repairs in the locale of the
project.
c.
Name, address and telephone number of firm(s) from whom spare parts
and major components are available.
d.
Building name and address, and the name, address and telephone
number of its owner's representative where equipment of the same
manufacturer as that requested for substitution has been installed and in
operation for two or more years. Two or more such installations shall be
listed and the location should be in the vicinity of the proposed project.
See Section 01720 for red lining of all documents during construction to reflect "as-built"
conditions.
APPROVED MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
A.
Contractor’s proposal shall be based on furnishing and installing any of the mechanical
GENERAL PROVISIONS
15010-4
equipment listed in the individual specification sections. This listing of mechanical
equipment has been determined by the Contracting Officer as meeting the requirements
of the construction documents, and competent maintenance and repair service has been
determined to be available in the locale of the project. The determination of availability of
this equipment within the time required for contract performance is the responsibility of
the Contractor.
END 15010
GENERAL PROVISIONS
15010-5
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
Section 15890 - Ductwork
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
Metal and flexible ductwork.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 09900 - Painting: Weld priming, weather resistant, paint or coating.
B.
Section 15910 - Ductwork Accessories.
C.
Section 15940 - Air inlets and Outlets.
D.
Section 15993 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM A 36 - Structural Steel.
B.
ASTM A 90 - Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles.
C.
ASTM A 167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
D.
ASTM A 366 - Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold Rolled, Commercial Quality.
E.
ASTM A 480 - General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate,
Sheet, and Strip.
F.
ASTM A 525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip
Process.
G.
ASTM A 527 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot-Dip Process, Lock Forming Quality.
H.
ASTM A 568 - Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled.
I.
ASTM A 569 - Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial
Quality.
J.
AWS D9.1 - Welding of Sheet Metal.
K.
NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
L.
NFPA 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.
M.
SMACNA - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
N.
SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
O.
UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission. Size round ducts
DUCTWORK
15890-1
installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular
and round ducts.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01340.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes, welds, and configuration
prior to start of work.
C.
Product Data: Provide data for duct materials, duct liner, and duct connectors.
1.6
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01720.
B.
Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes in fitting location and type.
Show additional fittings used.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible.
B.
Maintain one copy of document on site.
1.8
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with
minimum three years experience.
B.
Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years
experience.
1.9
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.10
Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B standards.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant
manufacturers.
B.
Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A525 and ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality,
having G60 zinc coating of in conformance with ASTM A90. Provide paint-grip finish on exposed
ductwork.
B.
Insulated Flexible Ducts:
DUCTWORK
15890-2
1.
Manufacturers:
a)
ATCO.
b)
Thermoflex.
c)
Wiremold.
2.
UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyethylene film supported by helically wound
spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation; polyethylene or aluminized vapor barrier film.
Pressure Rating: 10 inches WG positive and 1.0 inches WG negative.
Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm.
Temperature Range: -20 degrees F to 210 degrees F.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.
D.
Sealant:
1.
E.
2.2
Non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials; liquid used
alone or with tape, or heavy mastic.
Hanger Rod: ASTM A36; steel; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded.
DUCTWORK FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate and support ductwork, except hood exhaust ductwork, in accordance with SMACNA
HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material,
gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. Hood exhaust ductwork shall be
assembled according to hood manufacturer’s instructions, and in compliance with NFPA 96.
B.
Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline.
Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide turning vanes. Where
acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation.
Rectangular elbows are not allowed in hood exhaust ductwork.
C.
Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum
30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream.
D.
Provide standard 45 degree lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated where 90 degree conical
tee connections may be used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible.
C.
Duct Sizes are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining.
D.
Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers.
Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with
spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated
ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring.
DUCTWORK
15890-3
E.
Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance
activities.
F.
Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.
G.
Connect diffusers to low pressure ducts with 6 feet maximum length of flexible duct held in place
with strap or clamp.
H.
Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with liquid adhesive plus strap.
I.
During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to
prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.
3.2
SCHEDULES
A.
B.
DUCTWORK MATERIAL SCHEDULE:
AIR SYSTEM
Low Pressure Supply
(Heating Systems)
Low Pressure Supply
(System with Cooling Coils)
Return and Relief
General Exhaust
Outside Air Intake
Hood exhaust
MATERIAL
Steel
Steel
Steel
Steel
Steel
Black Steel
DUCTWORK PRESSURE CLASS SCHEDULE:
AIR SYSTEM
PRESSURE CLASS
Supply (Heating Systems)
1 inch
Supply (System with
Cooling Coils)
1 inch
Return and Relief
1/2 inch
General Exhaust
1/2 inch
Outside Air Intake
1/2 inch
END 15890
DUCTWORK
15890-4
DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL
Section 15940 - Air Outlets and Inlets
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Diffusers.
B.
Registers/grilles.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.3
Section 09900 - Painting: Painting of ductwork visible behind outlets and inlets.
REFERENCES
A.
ADC 1062 - Certification, Rating and Test Manual.
B.
AMCA 500 - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.
C.
ARI 650 - Air Outlets and Inlets.
D.
ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets.
E.
SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.
F.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
G.
NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01340.
B.
Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as to
size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing
type, size, location, application, and noise level.
C.
Submit color samples illustrating finish and color options for interior and exterior air outlets and
inlets.
1.5
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01720.
B.
Record actual locations of air outlets and inlets.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ADC Equipment Test Code 1062
and ASHRAE 70.
B.
Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500.
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
15940-1
1.7
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with
minimum three years experience.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS OF INTERIOR AIR DEVICES
A.
Titus.
B.
Krueger.
C.
Price.
2.2
AIR DEVICES
A.
Type: See schedule on drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with
architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
C.
Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection.
D.
Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite whether
dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly.
E.
Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Refer to Section 09900.
END 15940
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
15940-2
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
Section 16060 – Electrical Demolition for Remodeling
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Interior demolition, removal and abandonment of interior electrical systems, including
communications and special systems including fire alarm and telephone.
B.
Cleaning and repair of existing equipment to remain.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Division 01 - Selective Demolition.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A.
Materials and equipment for patching work: As specified in individual Sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings.
B.
Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities.
C.
Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents.
Report discrepancies to Contracting Officer before disturbing existing installation.
D.
Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions.
E.
Contractor shall verify and or test ballasts, transformers, and other devices or equipment to be
removed do not contain and PCB or other hazardous materials requiring special disposal.
Contractor is responsible for all testing and disposal costs.
PREPARATION
A.
Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal.
B.
Coordinate utility service outages (if required) with local store and project manager minimum 2
weeks in advance. Outage shall occur during non-customer hours. This shall typically be 2
hours after closing and 2 hours before opening the next day.
C.
Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during all
phases of construction.
DEMOLITION EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK
A.
Demolish existing electrical work under provisions of Section 01, and this Section.
B.
Remove existing installations to accommodate requirements for new construction.
C.
Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply or next active device to remain.
D.
Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling
ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING
16060-1
finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.
3.4
E.
Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit
servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which
are not removed.
F.
Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition work.
G.
Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has
been removed.
H.
Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other
accessories.
I.
Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or
provide access panel as appropriate.
CLEANING AND REPAIR
A.
Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused.
B.
Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace
damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit
directory showing revised circuiting arrangement.
END 16060
ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING
16060-2
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
Section 16111 - Conduit
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Metal conduit.
B.
Flexible metal conduit.
C.
Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
D.
Electrical metallic tubing.
E.
Flexible nonmetallic conduit.
F.
Fittings and conduit bodies.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Division 07 – Roofing Penetrations.
B.
Division 07 – Firestopping.
C.
Section 16130 – Boxes.
D.
Section 16170 – Grounding and Bonding.
E.
Section 16190 – Supporting Devices.
F.
Section 16195 – Electrical Identification.
REFERENCES
A.
Conduit and tubing shall meet the requirements of the latest editions of following
standards:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.4
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.5
ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.
ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.
ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit
and Cable Assemblies.
ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
NECA "Standard of Installation."
NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel
Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit.
NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA 70. Limit conductor cross sectional area to no more than 40%
of conduit cross sectional area.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Division 01 – Submittals.
B.
Product Data: Provide for metallic conduit, flexible metal conduit, liquid tight flexible metal
conduit, metallic tubing, nonmetallic conduit, fittings, conduit bodies.
CONDUIT
16111-1
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Submit under provisions of Division 01 – Project Record Documents.
B.
Accurately record actual routing of interior conduits larger than 2 inches on project record
documents and of all underground conduits regardless of size. For locations of
underground conduits provide dimensions indicating locations and depth.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
B.
Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for
purpose specified and shown.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage.
B.
Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide
appropriate covering.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
B.
Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in.
C.
Conduit routing is shown schematically on Drawings unless dimensioned. Route as
required to complete wiring system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
A.
Minimum Size: ¾” inch unless otherwise specified.
B.
Dry Interior Locations Above Floor Slab (Including Hollow Stud Partitions):
1.
2.
2.2
2.3
2.4
Concealed: Use rigid steel, intermediate metal conduit or electrical metallic
tubing.
Exposed: Use rigid steel, intermediate metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing.
METAL CONDUIT
A.
Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
B.
Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel.
C.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit, threaded
connections.
PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT
A.
Description: NEMA RN 1; rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating, 40 mil thick.
B.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel fittings with external PVC coating to
match conduit.
FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
CONDUIT
16111-2
2.5
2.6
A.
Description: Interlocked steel construction.
B.
Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.
LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A.
Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.
B.
Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.
ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A.
Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.
B.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel compression type or set screw type.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation” and NFPA 70.
B.
Provide supports as required by NEC maximum distance between conduit support tables.
Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
C.
Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers,
clevis hangers, and split hangers. Where possible, support conduits in ceiling cavity
space at the level of structural roof joists.
D.
Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel;
provide space on each rack for 25 percent additional conduits.
E.
Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section
16190. DO NOT SUPPORT CONDUITS DIRECTLY FROM ROOF DECK.
F.
Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for
temporary supports.
G.
Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. Fasten individual conduits to roof joists.
H.
Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
I.
Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls.
J.
Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.
K.
Where conduits enter boxes and cabinets, provide bushings with plastic insulated throat
for conduits 1 inch and larger.
L.
Seismic Bracing: provide seismic bracing for suspended conduits 2” or larger and trapeze
hangers at interval of 20 feet or less. Bracing shall consists of 1-5/8" square channel both
parallel and perpendicular to conduit, and fastened to roof joist at 45 degree angle relative
to vertical.
M.
Maintain minimum 6-inch clearance between conduit and piping.
N.
Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding
104 degrees F.
CONDUIT
16111-3
3.2
O.
Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends before joining.
P.
Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
Q.
AC and MC cable shall not be acceptable for use on this project. Except as specified in
Section 16150.
R.
Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and
wet locations and to cast boxes.
S.
Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes (no more than
two 90-degree bends for conduits containing telephone cables, fire alarm cables,
intrusions system cables, local area network (LAN) cables, etc.). Use conduit bodies to
make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one-shot bender to
fabricate factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size.
T.
Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit
system.
U.
Provide expansion/deflection couplings to accommodate expansion and deflection where
conduit crosses seismic joints or expansion joints. Such couplings shall have braided
copper bonding jumpers.
V.
Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves less than 20 feet long
and nipples.
W.
Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
X.
Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 16170.
Y.
Identify conduit under provisions of Section 16195.
Z.
Where conduits for telephone cables, cash register cables, etc. are stubbed from wall
boxes or cabinets to above accessible ceilings, turn conduits out of wall approximately 12
inches above accessible ceiling. Coordinate location with other trades. Provide bushing
on end of conduit to prevent signal cable contact with sharp metal. Provide tag on end of
conduit indicating type and location of utilization outlet (example: TELEPHONE - BREAK
ROOM).
AA.
Paint exposed conduit to match adjacent surface.
BB.
Where conduits turn up into dry type transformer or large utilization equipment, provide
grounding bushings on ends of conduits, and bond to equipment grounding terminal strip
or lugs using bonding jumper sized according to NFPA 70.
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A.
Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using
materials and methods under the provisions of Division 07.
B.
Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack
with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation.
END 16111
CONDUIT
16111-4
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
Section 16123 – Building Wire and Cable
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Building wire and cable.
B.
Wiring connectors and connections.
REFERENCES
A.
NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors Association).
B.
NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution
Equipment and Systems (International Electrical Testing Association).
C.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A.
Division 01 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.
B.
Product Data: Provide for each cable type.
SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION
A.
Division 01 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals.
B.
Test Reports: Indicate procedures and values obtained.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of
use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A.
Division 01 – Project Record Documents.
B.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and circuits.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.7
1.8
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section
with minimum three years documented experience.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to NFPA 70.
B.
Furnish building wire and wiring connectors listed and classified by Underwriters
Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B.
Conductor sizes are based on copper.
C.
Wire and cable routing indicated is schematic unless dimensioned.
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
16123-1
1.9
COORDINATION
A.
Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact
routing and lengths required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
BUILDING WIRE
A.
Description: Single conductor insulated wire.
B.
Conductor: Copper.
C.
Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
D.
Insulation: NFPA 70, Type THHN-2/THWN-2.
E.
Use standard color coding for phase A, phase B, phase C, neutral and ground: Insulation:
1.
208/120 volt circuits: black, red, blue, white, green.
2.
480277 volt circuits: brown, orange, yellow, grey, green with white stripe.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.
B.
Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.
C.
Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
3.4
Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.
WIRING METHODS
A.
Use wiring methods indicated.
B.
All branch circuit and feeder wiring shall be installed in raceways.
INSTALLATION
A.
Route wire and cable as required to meet Project Conditions.
B.
Install cable in accordance with the NECA "Standard of Installation” and NFPA 70.
C.
Use stranded conductors for power circuits.
D.
Use stranded conductors for control circuits.
E.
Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.
F.
Use conductor not smaller than 14 AWG for fused control circuits.
G.
Unless a larger size is indicated on plans, use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120
volt branch circuits with homeruns longer than 75 feet.
H.
Unless a larger size is indicated on plans, use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 277
volt branch circuits with homeruns longer than 200 feet.
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
16123-2
3.5
3.6
I.
Pull all conductors into raceway at same time.
J.
Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger.
K.
Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.
L.
Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.
M.
Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no
perceptible temperature rise.
N.
Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape
uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation
rating of conductor.
O.
Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices
and taps, 8 AWG and smaller.
P.
Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and
taps, 10 AWG and smaller.
Q.
Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 16195. Identify each
conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
B.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1.
INSULATION RESISTANCE TESTS
A.
Perform tests after cables have been installed in raceways, but before connection to lugs.
Notify Contracting Officer at least 14 days prior to cable tests.
B.
Measure resistance line-to-ground using a commercial meggar tester. Apply 1000 volts
DC to cables 2 AWG and larger and record DC insulation resistance for each circuit
conductor. Minimum acceptable level is 50 megohms.
C.
Record test results and include in O and M manual.
END 16123
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
16123-3
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
Section 16130 - Boxes
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Wall and ceiling outlet boxes.
B.
Pull and junction boxes.
REFERENCES
A.
NECA - Standard of Installation.
B.
NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.
C.
NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
D.
NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports.
C.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
D.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submittals under provisions of Division 01 – Submittals.
B.
Product Data: Provide dimensions, materials, and accessories.
SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT
A.
Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents.
B.
Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes on project
record documents.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for
the purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
OUTLET BOXES
A.
Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
1.
BOXES
Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment
supported; include male fixture studs where required.
B.
Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast feralloy. Provide gasketed cover by box
manufacturer. Provide threaded hubs.
C.
Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 16141.
16130-1
2.2
PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A.
Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
B.
Hinged Enclosures: As specified in Section 16160.
C.
Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 6; flat-flanged, surface mounted
junction box:
1.
2.
Material: Galvanized cast iron.
Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover
screws.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
BOXES
INSTALLATION
A.
Install boxes in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation."
D.
Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling,
equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements.
E.
Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated.
F.
Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned.
Adjust box location up to 10 feet if required to accommodate intended purpose.
G.
Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices as specified in Section 16141.
H.
Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance.
I.
Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas
only.
J.
Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from
ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.
K.
Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements.
L.
Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches,
and backsplashes.
M.
Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan.
N.
Unless otherwise indicated on plans, align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for
switches, manual starters, interval timers, thermostats, and similar devices. Align wall
mounted boxes for receptacles, telephone jacks, local area network outlets, and the like.
Where such devices are shown in close proximity on plans, locate adjacent outlets with
no more than 4 inch space between adjacent boxes.
O.
Use flush mounting outlet boxes in all areas except mechanical rooms, mezzanines, and
electrical closets.
P.
Unless otherwise indicated on plans, locate flush mounting boxes in masonry wall to
require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat
opening.
Q.
Do not install flush mounting boxes back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches
separation.
16130-2
3.3
R.
Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow
for surface finish thickness. After finished wall material is applied, provide box extensions
for all boxes with setback more than 1/8 inch.
S.
Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.
T.
Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.
U.
Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.
V.
DO NOT FASTEN BOXES TO CEILING SUPPORT WIRES OR DIRECTLY TO ROOF
DECK.
W.
Support boxes independently of conduit.
X.
Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional
box. Provide metal barrier plates between gangs to separate line voltage from low
voltage systems and where voltage between adjacent light switches exceeds 300 volts.
Y.
Use 4” square box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
Z.
Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather, interiors of walk-in
refrigeration equipment, and wet locations. Provide vapor seals at conduit entrances to
these boxes. Use U.L. listed sealing compound.
AA.
Provide pull boxes in feeder circuits as required but at least every 150 feet in straight
runs.
BB.
Identify all junction boxes by panel and circuit number on outside cover with legible
permanent ink marker on outside face of cover.
CC.
Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface-mounted cast
metal box in other locations.
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A.
3.4
3.5
Coordinate installation of outlet box for equipment connected to allow accessibility of box
and proper operation of equipment.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.
B.
Install knockout closures in unused box openings.
CLEANING
A.
Division 01 – Cleaning: Clean installed work.
B.
Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.
C.
Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.
D.
Check boxes for the presence of drywall screws, concrete residue, and other sharp
objects. Remove all sharp objects.
END 16130
BOXES
16130-3
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
Section 16141 – Wiring Devices
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Wall switches.
B.
Receptacles.
C.
Device plates and decorative box covers.
REFERENCES
A.
NECA - Standard of Installation.
B.
NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices.
C.
NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Requirements.
D.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A.
Division 01 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.
B.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors,
and configurations.
SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION
A.
Division 01 - Submittals: Submittals for information.
B.
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.6
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for
the purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WALL SWITCHES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Hubbell
2.
Pass & Seymour
3.
Leviton
4.
G.E.
B.
Description: NEMA WD 1, Heavy-Duty, AC only general-use snap switch. Provide single
pole, double pole, three-way, four way, pilot light, or momentary contact type as indicated.
WIRING DEVICES
16141-1
C.
Body and Handle: Plastic with toggle handle.
D.
Indicator Light: Separate pilot strap; red lens.
E.
Ratings:
1.
2.
F.
2.2
Color: Architect shall select from manufacturers standard colors. Note: Architect may
chose multiple colors throughout project.
RECEPTACLES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Voltage: 120-277 volts, AC.
Current: 20 amperes.
Hubbell
Pass & Seymour
Leviton
G.E.
B.
Description: NEMA WD 1, heavy duty, specification grade receptacle. In barber shop
and beauty shop waiting area, provide safety type receptacles which shall discourage
insertion of foreign object into receptacle by small children.
C.
Device Body: Nylon.
D.
Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as specified and indicated.
E.
Convenience Receptacle: Type 5-20.
F.
GFCI Receptacle: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to
meet regulatory requirements. Devices shall utilize “Lock Out” technology to ensure outlet
can not be used if ground fault protection fails. Device shall have status LED.
G.
Color: Architect shall select from manufacturers standard colors. Note: Architect may
chose multiple colors throughout project.
WALL PLATES
A.
Decorative Cover Plate: Smooth nylon in all areas except food prep. Manufacturer same
as device manufacturer. Color to match device.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height.
B.
Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.
C.
Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection
to wiring devices.
PREPARATION
A.
Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
B.
Clean debris from outlet boxes.
WIRING DEVICES
16141-2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation."
B.
Install devices plumb and level.
C.
Install switches with OFF position down.
D.
Install receptacles with grounding pole on top.
D.
After connecting wires to GFCI receptacles, wrap terminals with four layers of electrician’s
tape.
F.
Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding
conductor.
G.
Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas.
H.
Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal when using solid
conductors. Provide crimp on lugs for terminations when using stranded conductors.
I.
Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas and
above accessible ceilings.
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A.
Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 16130 to obtain mounting
heights indicated on drawings.
B.
Coordinate the installation of wiring devices with underfloor duct service fittings provided
under Section 16113.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect each wiring device for defects.
B.
Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation.
C.
Verify that each receptacle device is energized.
D.
Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.
E.
Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.
CLEANING
A.
Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents: Clean installed work.
B.
Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish.
END 16141
WIRING DEVICES
16141-3
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
Section 16150 – Manufactured Wiring Systems
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Prefabricated flexible cable assemblies.
B.
Distribution units.
C.
Cable accessories.
REFERENCES
A.
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Division 01 – Submittals.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate distribution box, switch box, outlet, and cable layout and branch
circuit configuration.
C.
Product Data: Provide for each cable type and for each fitting and accessory.
D.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include
instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of
Product.
E.
Provide voltage drop calculation showing wire size will support use per NEC guidelines.
F.
Provide scaled drawings showing connection and cable requirements. Electronic drawing
files may be obtained from engineer’s office (618-242-0473). Request drawings minimum
two weeks prior to need.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Submit under provisions of Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents.
B.
Record actual locations of cable assemblies and branch circuit arrangements.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
Submit under provisions of Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents.
B.
Maintenance Data: Include replacement parts list.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.7
ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this Section
with minimum three years experience.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
MANUFACTURED WIRING SYSTEMS
16150-1
B.
1.8
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
1.9
Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for
purpose specified and shown.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
COORDINATION
A.
Furnish luminaire connectors to luminaire manufacturer for factory installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
A.
AMP Inc.
B.
Hubbell Wiring Devices
C.
Siemens Co.
D.
Light Fixture Manufacturer.
MANUFACTURED WIRING SYSTEMS
A.
Cable Assemblies: Factory assembled units with appropriate connector on each end,
with lengths and circuit configurations as required.
B.
Voltage: 120 or 277 volts.
C.
Switching Unit Assemblies: Cable assembly with 6 inch pigtail on one end. Provide
cables configured for 3-way and 4-way switches where required.
D.
Luminaire Connector Assemblies: Connector suitable for mounting in luminaire body
knockout. At Contractor’s option, provide connector factory mounted in luminaire.
E.
Accessories: Provide manufacturer's standard accessories, including cable extenders,
distribution tees, and switching assemblies.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Support cable by means of straps and clamps independently of ceiling suspension
system.
C.
Support cable minimum 24” above suspended ceiling to avoid contact with and
interference with removal of ceiling panels.
D.
Arrange cable to avoid interference with access to other work.
END 16150
MANUFACTURED WIRING SYSTEMS
16150-2
SECTION 16170
GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Grounding electrodes and conductors.
B.
Equipment grounding conductors.
C.
Bonding.
REFERENCES
A.
NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution
Equipment and Systems (International Electrical Testing Association).
B.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
GROUNDING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Metal underground water pipe.
B.
Effectively grounded metal frame of the building.
C.
Rod electrode.
D.
Concrete encased electrode.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.5
1.6
1.7
Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms maximum.
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A.
Division 01 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals.
B.
Product Data: Provide for grounding electrodes and connections.
SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION
A.
Division 01 - Submittals: Submittals for information.
B.
Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground.
C.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include
instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of
Product.
SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT
A.
Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents: Procedures for submittals.
GROUNDING AND BONDING
16170-1
B.
1.8
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.9
Record actual locations of components and grounding electrodes.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
ROD ELECTRODES
A.
Material: Copper-clad steel.
B.
Diameter: 3/4 inch.
C.
Length: 10 feet.
MECHANICAL CONNECTORS
A.
Manufacturers: Burndy or approved equal.
B.
Material: Bronze.
EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS
A.
2.4
2.5
WIRE
A.
Material: Stranded copper. Unless noted otherwise, provide with green insulation.
B.
Size: As required by NEC.
GROUND BUSHING/LUG
A.
2.6
Manufacturers: Cadweld or approved equal.
Insulated metallic grounding bushings, tin-plated open-type lug dual rated for CU-AL
conductors, thermoplastic liners rated 105 degree C, die cast zinc, to provide a smooth,
well-rounded bearing surface for wires or cable at the end of threaded conduit or a
conduit connector as required by the NEC.
ISOLATED GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A.
Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground,
identify grounding conductor at both ends of conductors and at any boxes or splice
locations with alternating bands of green and yellow tape. Provide at least three bands of
green and two bands of yellow tape.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
GROUNDING AND BONDING
16170-2
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
3.3
Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod
electrodes.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install rod electrodes at exterior of building near service equipment. Install additional rod
electrodes as required to achieve specified resistance to ground.
B.
Provide 3/0 AWG bare copper grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing
steel in foundation footing. Bond steel together using tie wires so there is a minimum of
40 feet of continuous bar to which to bond grounding electrode conductor.
C.
Provide 3/0 AWG bare copper grounding electrode conductor and connect to metal cold
water pipe. Metal cold water pipe must be in continuous direct contact with the earth a
minimum of 10 feet. Make connection a maximum of 5 feet from the point of entrance to
the building.
D.
Provide bonding to meet Regulatory Requirements.
E.
In addition to bonded equipment grounding conductors, provide isolated grounding
conductors for circuits shown on plans. Conductors shall be 12 AWG unless noted
otherwise and one per circuit.
F.
Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within each
feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing.
G.
Where multiple ground terminal strips are provided with new panels, run solid bare
#8AWG between all ground terminal strips.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
B.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13.
C.
Maximum acceptable resistance to ground shall be 5 ohms.
END OF SECTION
GROUNDING AND BONDING
16170-3
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
Section 16190 – Supporting Devices
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Conduit and equipment supports.
B.
Anchors and fasteners.
REFERENCES
A.
NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association.
B.
ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Division 01 – Submittals.
B.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog data for fastening systems.
C.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include
instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and
starting of Product.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
B.
Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A.
Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance.
B.
Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads
of equipment and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products.
C.
Anchors and Fasteners:
1.
Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast insert system or expansion anchors
and preset inserts.
2.
Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps or welded fasteners.
3.
Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors.
4.
Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts and
hollow wall fasteners.
5.
Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors and preset inserts.
6.
Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.
7.
Wood Elements: Use wood screws.
STEEL CHANNEL
A.
Manufacturer: Unistrut (P1000 unless otherwise noted) or approved equal.
B.
Description: Galvanized or painted steel. (1-5/8” square.)
SUPPORTING DEVICES
16190-1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of
Installation", NFPA 70 and maximum distance between conduit support tables.
C.
Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, ceiling support wires, and
conduit.
D.
Do not use spring steel clips and clamps.
E.
Do not use powder-actuated anchors.
F.
Do not drill or cut structural members.
G.
Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use
hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use
spring lock washers under all nuts.
H.
Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.
I.
In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards
one inch off wall.
J.
Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards
recessed in hollow partitions.
END 16190
SUPPORTING DEVICES
16190-2
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
Section 16195 – Electrical Identification
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Nameplates.
B.
Wire and cable markers.
C.
Conduit markers.
REFERENCES
A.
1.3
1.4
ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Division 01 – Submittals.
B.
Product Data: Provide catalog data for nameplates, labels, and markers.
C.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by Product testing agency specified under regulatory requirements. Include
instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and installation of
Product.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
B.
Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for
purpose specified and shown.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NAMEPLATES
A.
Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, white letters on black background.
Screw on type with two self tapping screws. Mastic type nameplates not allowed.
B.
Locations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Letter Size:
1.
2.
2.2
Each lighting and appliance panelboard.
Relays and contactors. Indicate loads controlled.
Time switches. Indicate load controlled.
Transformers.
Where more than two switches are located adjacent to each other or where
switches control loads not in same space.
Where noted on plans.
Use 1/8 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads such as safety
switches, motor starters, and relays.
Use 1/4 inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads such as
panelboards, switchboards, and motor control centers.
WIRE MARKERS
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16195-1
A.
Description: Cloth, tape, split sleeve, or tubing type wire markers.
B.
Locations: Each conductor at distribution equipment panelboard gutters, pull boxes,
outlet and junction boxes, and each load connection.
C.
Legend:
1.
2.
2.3
Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder circuit number.
Control Circuits: Control wire number corresponding to applicable control
schematics.
CONDUIT MARKERS
A.
Location: Conduit couplings and junction box covers shall be painted to indicate system
that conduit serves.
B.
Color:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
208 Volt System: Natural conduit.
Fire Alarm System: Red.
Security System: Black.
Emergency: Red
Comm/Data: Blue
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates.
APPLICATION
A.
Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines.
B.
Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws.
C.
Identify conduit using field painting under provisions of Division 09.
D.
Field paint colored couplings on each conduit longer than 6 feet and conduit stubs.
E.
Color:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
208 Volt System: Natural conduit.
Fire Alarm System: Red.
Security System: Black.
Emergency: Red
Comm/Data: Blue
END 16195
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16195-2
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
Section 16461 – Dry Type Transformers
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Division 03 – Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete for supporting foundations and pads.
B.
Section 16111 – Raceways.
C.
Section 16170 – Grounding and Bonding.
REFERENCES
A.
NEMA ST 1 - Specialty Transformers (Except General-Purpose Type).
B.
NEMA ST 20 - Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications.
B.
NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution
Equipment (International Electrical Testing Association).
C.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A.
Division 01 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals.
B.
Product Data: Provide outline and support point dimensions of enclosures and
accessories, unit weight, voltage, kVA, and impedance ratings and characteristics, tap
configurations, insulation system type, and rated temperature rise.
SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION
A.
Division 01 – Submittals: Submittals for information.
B.
Test Reports: Indicate loss data, efficiency at 25, 50, 75 and 100 percent rated load, and
sound level.
C.
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and
limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory
Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation, and installation of Product.
SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT
A.
Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents: Submittals for project closeout.
B.
Record actual locations of transformers in project record documents.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.8
Two-winding transformers.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
16461-1
1.9
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy
canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and
traffic.
B.
Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided
for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to transformer internal components,
enclosure, and finish.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
TWO-WINDING TRANSFORMERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
General Electric.
Siemens.
Square D.
Cutler Hammer.
Cooper.
B.
Description: NEMA ST 20, factory-assembled, air cooled, copper winding dry type
transformers , ratings as indicated .
C.
Primary Voltage: 480 volts, 3 phase.
D.
Secondary Voltage: 208Y/120 volts, 3 phase.
E.
Insulation system and average winding temperature rise for rated kVA as follows:
1.
2.
1-15 kVA: Class 185 with 80 degrees C rise.
16-500 kVA: Class 220 with 80 degrees C rise.
F.
Case temperature: Do not exceed 35 degrees C rise above ambient at warmest point at
full load.
G.
Winding Taps:
1.
2.
Transformers Less than 15 kVA: Two 5 percent below rated voltage, full capacity
taps on primary winding.
Transformers 15 kVA and Larger: NEMA ST 20.
H.
Sound Levels: NEMA ST 20.
I.
Basic Impulse Level: 10 kV for transformers less than 300 kVA, 30 kV for transformers
300 kVA and larger.
J.
Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of a visible flexible copper
grounding strap.
K.
Mounting:
1.
1-15 kVA: Suitable for wall or trapeze mounting.
2.
16-75 kVA: Suitable for wall or trapeze mounting.
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
16461-2
3.
2.2
Larger than 75 kVA: Suitable for floor or trapeze mounting.
L.
Coil Conductors: Continuous windings with terminations brazed or welded.
M.
Enclosure: NEMA ST 20, Type 1 ventilated. Provide lifting eyes or brackets.
N.
Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing mounts.
O.
Nameplate: Include transformer connection data and overload capacity based on rated
allowable temperature rise.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Production test each unit according to NEMA ST20.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Set transformers plumb and level. Hold transformers minimum of 6 inches from walls.
B.
Use flexible conduit, under the provisions of Section 16111, 2 feet minimum length, for
connections to transformer case. Make conduit connections to side panel of enclosure.
C.
Mount wall-mounted transformers using integral flanges or accessory brackets furnished
by the manufacturer.
D.
Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 16170.
E.
Mount trapeze-mounted transformers as indicated.
F.
Provide seismic restraints. Provide lateral and longitudinal bracing using 1-5/8" square
steel channel.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
B.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.2.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.4
Measure primary and secondary voltages and make appropriate tap adjustments.
CLEANING
A.
Division 01 – Cleaning: Clean installed work.
B.
Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finishes.
C.
Clean dust and debris from interior and exterior of transformer according to
manufacturer’s instructions.
END 16461
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
16461-3
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
Section 16470 - Panelboards
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
Branch circuit panelboards.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 16170 – Grounding and Bonding.
B.
Section 16195 – Electrical Identification.
REFERENCES
A.
NECA Standard of Installation (published by the National Electrical Contractors
Association).
B.
NEMA AB1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
C.
NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies.
D.
NEMA KS1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts
Maximum).
E.
NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards.
F.
NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of
Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
G.
NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution
Equipment (published by the International Electrical Testing Association).
H.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A.
Division 01 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus
ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch
arrangement and sizes.
C.
Arrange circuit breakers in panels same as shown on plans.
SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION
A.
Division 01 – Submittals: Submittals for information.
B.
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and
limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory
Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation, and installation of Product.
SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT
A.
PANELBOARDS
Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents: Submittals for project closeout.
16470-1
1.7
B.
Record actual locations of panelboards and record actual circuiting arrangements in
project record documents.
C.
Maintenance Data: Include spare parts listing; source and current prices of replacement
parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.8
1.9
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A.
Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
General Electric.
Siemens.
Square D.
Cutler Hammer.
B.
Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit
panelboard.
C.
Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each
panelboard; provide insulated ground bus where scheduled.
D.
Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 208 volt
panelboards. Provide higher ratings where indicated. Series rating not allowed.
E.
Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt-on type thermal magnetic trip circuit
breakers, with common trip handle for all poles, listed as Type SWD for lighting circuits,
Type HACR for heating, air conditioning, or refrigeration equipment circuits, Class A
ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled. Do not use tandem circuit
breakers.
F.
Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1 for dry locations, type 3R for exterior locations.
G.
Cabinet Box: 6 inches deep, 20 inches wide. Where multiple section panel cabinets are
specified, all cabinets shall be of same dimensions.
H.
Cabinet Front: With concealed trim clamps, door in door type hinge, metal directory
frame, and flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
I.
Where multiple section panel cabinets are specified, all cabinets shall be of same
dimensions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
PANELBOARDS
16470-2
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1 and the NECA "Standard of
Installation."
B.
Install panelboards plumb. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes.
C.
Height: 6 feet to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 feet with bottom no
more than 4 inches above floor and with handle of top circuit breaker no more than 6'-6"
above floor.
D.
Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.
E.
Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to
reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads.
F.
Provide screw-on type engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section
16195.
G.
Provide and install arc flash warning signs per NEC 110.16.
H.
Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 16170.
I.
Do not splice conductors in panelboard cabinets.
J.
Land only one conductor to each circuit breaker. Where multiple conductors are used,
splice in junction box before entering panelboard.
K.
Where multiple ground terminal strips are provided with new panels, run solid, bare,
#8AWG between all ground terminal strips.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
B.
3.3
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.4 for switches, Section 7.5
for circuit breakers.
CLEANING
A.
Division 01 – Cleaning: Clean installed work.
B.
Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish.
C.
Clean dust and debris from interior and exterior of panelboards.
END 16470
PANELBOARDS
16470-3
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
Section 16510 – Interior Luminaires
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Interior luminaires and accessories.
B.
Exit signs.
C.
Ballasts.
D.
Lamps.
E.
Luminaire accessories.
REFERENCES
A.
NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
B.
ANSI C82.1 - Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps - Specifications.
C.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
D.
NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements.
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A.
Division 01 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a
standard product of the manufacturer.
C.
Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data.
SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION
A.
Division 01 – Submittal: Submittals for information.
B.
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and
limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory
Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation, and installation of Product.
SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT
A.
Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents: Submittals for project closeout.
B.
Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions for each product.
C.
Warranty for normal ballasts, exit signs, and emergency standby ballasts.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.7
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
16510-1
B.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 101.
C.
Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
LUMINAIRES
A.
2.2
Furnish products as scheduled. Contractors wishing to submit voluntary substitutions shall
submit complete cut sheet information showing fixture dimensions, options and
photometrics. Alternate fixtures must be received at engineers’ office minimum two weeks
prior to bidding. Engineers’ evaluation shall be final. Fixtures submitted without prior
approval will be returned to contractor without comment.
FLUORESCENT BALLASTS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.3
2.4
General Electric Ultra Start or prior approved equal.
B.
Unless otherwise noted, programmed start fluorescent ballasts shall be General Electric
Ultramax solid state electronic type for use with T8 fluorescent lamps. Ballasts shall have
a total harmonic distortion of 10% or less, minimum ballast factor of 0.87 and a minimum
power factor of 0.95. Where noted on plans, provide high output General Electric
Ultramax ballasts having a ballast factor of 1.15. Maximum input wattage for normal
ballast factor ballasts shall be as follows:
277V
1.
One lamp:
25 watts
2.
Two lamps:
48 watts
3.
Three lamps: 70 watts
4.
Four lamps:
92 watts
C.
Certify fluorescent ballast design by Certified Ballast Manufacturer, Inc.
FLUORESCENT LAMP EMERGENCY BALLASTS
A.
Manufacturers: Bodine, ITOA or approved equal.
B.
Description: Emergency battery power supply suitable for installation in ballast
compartment of fluorescent luminaire or for remote mounting.
C.
Ratings: Ballasts to power one F32 lamp: 1100 lumens. Ballasts to power two F32 lamps:
1400 lumens. Provide ballast canister for two lamp ballast for remote mounting above
luminaire. Contractor to provide wire and conduit between ballast and luminaire.
D.
Battery: Sealed pure lead type, rated for 10 year life. Provide 3 year full warranty.
E.
Include TEST switch and AC ON indicator light, installed to be operable and visible from
the outside of an assembled luminaire.
LAMPS
A.
Lamp Manufacturers:
1.
B.
General Electric Wattmiser Series or prior approved equal.
Lamp Types: As specified for luminaire.
INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
16510-2
C.
Unless otherwise noted 4 foot fluorescent lamps shall be low-mercury premium grade T8
type instant start type rated 28 watts maximum, 2650 lumens minimum, 3500 degrees
Kelvin, rendering index (CRI) of 85 or greater. Lamps shall pass federal TCLP criteria
(low mercury).
D.
Metal halide lamps shall have a constant color temperature of 3000 degrees Kelvin, shall
be pulse and have CRI = 85.
E.
Lamps of each type shall be by one manufacturer.
F.
Low-Mercury Lamps: Comply with EPA’s to toxicity characteristic leaching procedure test;
shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested per NEMA LL1 standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Support recessed luminaires independent of ceiling framing. For recessed
fluorescent luminaires, provide four hanger wires fastened at corners of luminaires and at
structural joists. Provide two hanger wires for recessed downlights. Supports wires shall
be same type and gauge as ceiling support wires.
B.
Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan.
C.
Support surface mounted luminaires on grid ceiling directly from building structure.
D.
Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building
lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement.
E.
Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below.
F.
Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
G.
Connect luminaires to branch circuit outlets provided under Section 16130 using flexible
conduit. In exposed grid ceiling areas, use premanufactured wiring systems at
contractor’s option.
H.
Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for
temperature conditions within luminaire.
I.
Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
J.
Install specified lamps in each luminaire.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
3.3
3.4
Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection
and operation.
ADJUSTING
A.
Aim and adjust luminaries as directed.
B.
Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated.
CLEANING
A.
Division 01 – Cleaning: Cleaning installed work.
B.
Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials.
INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
16510-3
3.5
C.
Remove dirt and debris from enclosures.
D.
Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
E.
Clean finishes and touch up damage.
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A.
Prior to final acceptance, relamp luminaires that have failed lamps.
END 16510
INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
16510-4
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
Section 16741 – Telephone Service, Raceways and Wiring
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Telephone service raceways and cables.
B.
Equipment and terminal backboards, building entrance terminals, and gas tube
protectors.
C.
Premises wiring and outlets.
REFERENCES
A.
EIA/TIA 568B - Commercial Building Wiring Standard.
B.
EIA/TIA 569 - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and
Spaces.
C.
Directorate of Information Management (DOIM). Communications Squadron Standards.
D.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Premises Wiring: AAFES furnished / AAFES installed.
B.
The telephone system equipment is AAFES furnished / AAFES installed by Exponent
Systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
TELEPHONE CABLES
A.
Premise cabling shall be AAFES furnished / AAFES installed. Building contractor to
provide conduit stub to above ceiling for AF/AI cables.
2.2
JACKS – AAFES FURNISHED / AAFES INSTALLED
2.3
PATCH PANELS – AAFES FURNISHED / AAFES INSTALLED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Stub minimum ¾” conduit (or larger where indicated) from each outlet location up to roof
level. Provide bushing at end of conduit.
B.
Support raceways, backboards, and cabinets under the provisions of Section 16190.
END OF SECTION
TELEPHONE SERVICE, RACEWAYS AND WIRING
16741-1
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
Section 16904 – Occupancy Sensors
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
Occupancy sensors for lighting control.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 16111 - Conduit.
B.
Section 16123 - Building Wire and Cable.
C.
Section 16130 - Boxes.
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
1.4
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
SUBMITTALS
A.
In accordance with Division 01 – Submittals, provide:
1.
2.
3.
1.5
Product Data: Provide electrical ratings, adjustment ranges, enclosure type, outline
dimensions, mounting dimensions, and terminal connection information.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of
use stipulated by Product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.
CAD generated lighting plans for each building marked by occupancy sensor
manufacturer showing proper product, location, and orientation of each sensor.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.6
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with
minimum three years documented experience.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose
specified and indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SENSORS
A.
Ceiling mounted dual technology sensors shall employ both passive infrared and ultrasonic
detection methods. Sensors shall have a multiple segmented lens and provide coverage for up
to a 40' x 40' room.
B.
All sensors shall be capable of operating normally with any electronic ballasts and compact
fluorescent lamp systems.
C.
Coverage of sensors shall remain constant after sensitivity control has been set. No automatic
reduction shall occur in coverage due to the cycling of air conditioner or heating fans.
D.
All sensors shall have readily accessible, user adjustable controls for time delay (0 - 15 minutes)
and sensitivity.
OCCUPANCY SENSORS
16904-1
E.
In the event of failure, a bypass manual “override on” shall be provided on each sensor. When
bypass is utilized, control shall divert to a wall switch until sensor is replaced.
F.
All sensors shall provide a method of indication to verify that motion is being detected during
testing and that the unit is working.
G.
All sensors shall have no leakage current to load, in manual or in Auto/Off mode, for safety
purposes and shall have voltage drop protection.
H.
Wall mounted combination occupancy sensor with light switch sensors shall employ both
passive infrared and ultrasonic detection methods. Sensors shall have a multiple segmented
lens.
2.2
CIRCUIT CONTROL HARDWARE - CU
A.
Control unit(s) shall mount through a 2" knock-out on a standard electrical enclosure and be an
integrated, self-contained unit consisting internally of an isolated load switching control relay and
a transformer to provide low-voltage power. Transformer shall provide power to a maximum of
four (4) sensors and shall power to a larger number of sensors where indicated on plans.
B.
Relay contacts shall have ratings of:
1.
2.
C.
2.3
20A - 277 VAC Ballast.
Where noted on plans, provide relays with two (2) load contacts.
Control wiring between sensors and controls units shall be Class II, 18-24 AWG, stranded UL
Classified, jacketed cable. Cable shall be plenum rated.
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Leviton.
B.
Wattstopper.
C.
Hubble.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Locate and aim sensors in the correct location required for complete coverage. Rooms shall
have ninety (90) to one hundred (100) percent coverage. The locations and quantities of
sensors shown on the drawings are diagrammatic and indicate only the rooms which are to be
provided with sensors. Provide additional sensors if required to properly and completely cover
the respective room.
B.
Meet with the manufacturer’s factory authorized representative, at the jobsite, to verify
placement of sensors and installation criteria prior to beginning work.
C.
Locate sensors to ensure the best possible coverage in the available space and to overcome
local difficulties due to space limitations or interference of structural components. Provide
training necessary to familiarize Owner’s key personnel with the operation, use, adjustment, and
problem solving diagnosis of the occupancy sensing devices and systems.
END 16904
OCCUPANCY SENSORS
16904-2
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
Section 16950 - Testing
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDES
A.
1.2
Provide:
1.
Testing of electrical components and systems:
a.
Insulation resistance test.
b.
Fire alarm acceptance test.
c.
Continuity test.
d.
Voltage test.
e.
Phase relationship verification.
2.
3.
4.
Test reports.
Correction of defective components or systems.
Retest of corrected components, systems.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Test Reports: Submit seven (7) copies of all test reports to Contracting Officer.
1.
Type each test report on 8-1/2 inch x 11 inch paper. Include:
a.
Project Number.
b.
Project title and location.
c.
Test performed.
d.
Date performed.
e.
Test equipment used.
f.
Contractor's name, address and telephone number.
g.
Testing firm's name, address and telephone number if other than
Contractor.
h.
Name (s) and title (s) of person (s):
1.
Performing test.
2.
Observing test.
i.
j.
k.
l.
2.
Statement verifying each test.
Nameplate data from each motor and equipment item tested.
Test results.
Retest results after correction of defective components, systems.
For each copy, assemble all test reports and bind them in a folder. Label each folder,
"Electrical Test Reports".
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS: Furnish all equipment, manpower and casual labor to perform specified testing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
When temporary electrical service is used for testing, do not energize any equipment or
portion of permanent system that exceeds capacity of temporary service.
B.
Ensure that all electrical work is complete and ready for testing.
C.
Disconnect all devices or equipment that might be damaged by application of test voltages,
voltage of reversed phase sequence or other test procedures.
16950-1
TESTING
3.2
TESTING: Conduct tests and adjust equipment to verify compliance with specified performance.
3.3
INSULATION RESISTANCE TESTS
A.
Resistance measured; line-to-ground.
B.
Perform testing on the following items:
1.
2.
3.4
Item Tested
No. 2 and larger
cables (600V)
Panelboard Buses
Voltage of Test
Min. Acceptance
Resistance in Megohms
1000V
1000V
50
25
PHASE RELATIONSHIP
A.
Examine connections to equipment for proper phase relationships. Verify proper motor
rotation.
3.5
CONTINUITY TESTS: Test branch circuits and control circuits to determine continuity of wiring and
connections.
3.6
VOLTAGE TESTS
A.
Make and record voltage tests and recorded at the following listed points. Conduct tests
under normal load conditions.
1.
2.
3.7
Service entrance at main panel.
Terminals of all motors.
FIRE ALARM ACCEPTANCE TEST
A.
Have the fire alarm acceptance test performed by the Alarm Company Representative and
Installing Contractor in the presence of the base Fire Chief's Representative.
B.
Acceptance Test Procedures:
EXPECTED INDICATION ON
PREMISES AND REMOTE STATION
PANEL/RECEIVING STATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
3.9
Normal Power to Panel
Disconnect Power to Panel
Activate Detection Device
Silence Alarm Signaling Devices
Return Normal Power to Panel & Reset Panel
Place Each Function Switch in an Abnormal Position
Remove supervised Devices from System (During
this portion of testing, ensure proper wire has been
used and devices are properly installed.)
Return Supervised Device to System
Disconnect Normal Power to Panel
Activate Detector(s) for each Zone
Inspect all Horns Zone Indication, and Auxiliary Devices
Silence Horns
Reset System
Return Normal Power to System
Place Panel in Alarm Condition. Disconnect Primary
Power Source for a Minimum of 15 Seconds and Return
to Normal Power. (The above transfer procedure shall not
cause a loss of an alarm condition at Receiving Station.)
CORRECTION OF DEFECTS
TESTING
16950-2
(Normal)
(Trouble)
(Alarm)
(Trouble)
(Normal)
(Trouble)
(Normal)
(Trouble)
(Alarm)
(Working List)
(Alarm/Trouble)
(Trouble)
(Normal)
A.
When tests disclose any unsatisfactory workmanship or equipment furnished under this
Contract, correct defects and retest. Repeat tests until satisfactory results are obtained.
B.
When any wiring or equipment is damaged by tests, repair or replace such wiring or
equipment. Test repaired items to ensure satisfactory operation.
END 16950
TESTING
16950-3